Phy 2

AL CE DSE.
BY-TOPIC
PAST PAPER
.c:
·-
0,
U ,U
Ln
I
, 'i
lO
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAl-M/01 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAl-M/02
WAl : Wave Propagation WAl : Wave Propagation
t�
Part A : HKCE examination questions 4. < HKCE 1991 Paper ll- 23 >
-----3>- Direction ofwave

1. <HKCE 1983 Paper n- 26 >
p Vibrator
A vibrator of frequency 5 Hz generates waves on a string. The above diagram shows the shape ofthe string at the instant
-------- Q ----- when the vibrator has made one complete VJ.bration. Which of the following best shows the wavefon:n 0.1 slater?
A.
(vD
-
R
B.
A transVerse wave is travelling steadily from left to right through a series of particles. At a certain instant the wave form is
as shown in the figure. Which of the following statements about the particles is/are correct?
(1) Particle P is IIlOVmg down.
(2) Particle Q is moving up.
rJ\y-
AAr
(3) Particle R is momentarily at resL C.
A. (I) only
B. (2) only
C. (1) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only D.
2. <HKCE 1987Paper 11-11 > �
t = 0.000 s 5. < HK.CE 1991 Paper ll- 21 >

�--- p
---➔ Direction of wave
Q
t = 0.025 s
�----·
The above diagram shows a water wave travelling to the right. Which ofthe following statements is/are true?
The above figures show a wave in the same section of string at two different instants, What is the greatest possible pe riod of (1) PQ is equal to the wavelength.
the wave? (2) PR represents the amplitude.
A. 0.025 s (3) The particle at P will move to S after a quarter of a period.
B. 0.050s A. (1) only
c. 0.100 s B. (3) only
D. 0.200 s C. (1) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only
�-�
3. < HKCE 1988 Paper Il - 12 > 6. < HK.CE 1992 Paper II- 22 >
------'----------�----------------
The above diagram shows a progressive transVerse wave at a certain instant when traVelling from left to right. 'Which of the
following correctly shows the direction ofrootion of the particles at P, Q andR?
A water wave travels towards the right. The above diagram shows the waveform at a certain instant. Which of the following
p Q R statements is/are true?
(1) Particle P is moving downwards.
A. ➔ ➔ ➔
(2) Particle Q is moving upwards.
B. .j. -1- -1- (3) Particle R is momentarily at rest.
A. (1) only
C. -1- t -1- B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only
D. t -1- t D. (2) & (3) only
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAl-M/03 DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WAl-M/04
WAl : Wave Propagation WAl: Wave Propagation
7. <BKCE1993Paperll-22> 10. < HKCE 1999 Paper II- 20 >

---➔ Direction of wave A cork in the water vibrates up and down 4 times in 2 s when a wave passes through it The distance between r.vo successive
I£:\V
_____D,__
crests ofthe wave is IO cm. Find the speed ofthe water wave.
A. 0.05mir1
Vibrator P Q B. 0.1 ms- 1
C. 0.2 ms- 1
D. 0.4ml>1
A viorator generates a travelling wave on a string. The above diagnun shows the shape ofthe string at a certain instant
Which ofthefollowing shows the shape of the string betweenPQ after a quarter ofa period?
R 11. < BKCE 1999 Paper II - 21 >
A
(\}
The diagram shows a transverse wave travelling along a string.
p Q At the instant shown, particle Pis moving upwards. Which ofthe
following statements is incorrect ?
A. The wave is travelling towards the left.
B. Particles P and Q VJ.lirate with the same :frequency.
c. D.
C. Particle Q is moving downwards at this :instant.
D. Particle R is at rest at this instant
12- < HKCE 2{100 Paper II - 24 >

Which of the following statements correctly descnbe(s) the meaning of the frequency ofa wave?
8. < BKCE 1995 Paper Il- 24 > (1) the time taken for the wave to make one complete vibration
Displacement/ cm (2) the distance travelled by the wave in one second
(3) the number of waves produced in one second
A. (!) only
025 B. (3) only
C. (!) & (2) only
1--'\--/--\--�-+Time Is D. (2) & (3) only
0. .2 0. .4
--025 13. < HKCE 2001 Paper II- 23 > Direction of
+---- wavem.otion
A train of water waves is generated in a ripple tank. The graph above shows the variation of the displacement of a cork R
�::':',j�=k,. ,�= ==��- ===== __,,,:;:�,==-- ===== --========:=,=,

placed in the water with time. Find the frequency of the waves.
A. 0.2Hz
B. 0.25 Hz
c. 4Hz
D. 5Hz Fo � corks are moving up and down on the surface of a pond as a water wave passes through them. At time t = 0, the
positions of the corks are shown above. The figure below shows the displacement-time graph of one of the four corks.
(Note: Displacement is positive when the cork is above the still vvater surface.)
9. < HKCE 1996 Paper II - 24 >
X
DWIJJacement Di,p1",emont L\
Direct;M
of
Vibration
t ----- ----- -----
�
--,.
0�
V V J Time
Direction of Which cork has the motion represented by the graph?

propagation A. p
Figurc(a) Figure (b) B. Q
C. R
A viOrator generates a travelling wave on a string. Figure (a) shows the shape of the string at a certain instant. Figure (b)
D. S
shows the variation of the displacement of a certain particle on the string with time. Which of the following expressions
represents the speed ofthe travelling wave?
A. X 14. < BKCE 2002 Paper II - 25 >
B. y
A wave source generates waves of frequency 50 Hz. How long does it take for the waves to travel 100 m?
C. � A. 0.5 s
y B. 2s
C. 5000 s
D. l'..
X D. It cannot be detennined as insufficient information is given.
Questions 15 and 16 : A transvezse wave travels along a string with a speed of 1.2 m s-1• The diagram below shows the shape of Questions 18 and 19 :
the string at a certain instant.
Displacement/cm The displacement-distan.ce graphs of the particles along a travelling wave at time t= 0 and t = 0.2 s are shown below.
_____.,. Direction ofwave motion
Displacement at t = 0
"'
15. <HKCE 2003 Paper Il- 2S >

'Which ofthe following statements about the transverse wave are correct 'I
(1) Its wavelength is 20 cm.
(2) Itsfrequencyis 6Hz.
(3) Its amplitude is 6 cm.
A. (1) & (2) mtly Displacement at t = O 2 s
B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only
D. (1). (2) & (3) \ ;
I
-�i--
I
--1--i .+ 1--l-f l · 1-.J.�_J_,�
I
16. <HKCE2003Paperll-26> 0 Distance
Which ofthe following diagrnn:,.s shows the shape ofthe string at a quarter of a period later ?
A.
Displacement/cm
B. --•'
Displacem<::=cm -+- \-I· 1-:--: 1- ·I-H_J_1
.....L.LJ'-t-H-C
. I -r-rLL.t
..�_J......L...L_I I LJ 2
__
18. < HK.CE 2005 Paper Il- 34 >
10 20 30 .,
l-+--+----t-c--1-+--+--+Distance/cm ,1---+----'>--+--,-+Distance/cm
., Which of the following statements about the wave are correct ?
(1) Its amplitude is 6 cm.
-3 ----- ----------- ----- (2) Its waveleng1h is 8 cm.
(3) Its frequency is 5 Hz.
D.
C. Displacement/cm Displacement/cm A. (1) & (2) only
B. (1) & (3) mtly
3 ----- ----------- C. (2) & (3) only
D. (1), (2) & (3)
19. < HKCE 2005 Paper Il- 35 >

'What is the speed of the wave?
-3 ------------------------- A. 0.2ms- 1
B. 0.3 m s-1
C. 0.4ms-1
17. <HKCE2004Paperll-22> D. 0.Sms-1
2,m
The solid curve in the diagram shows a transverse wave at
a certain instant After 0.05 s, the wave has travelled a
distance of 2 cm and is indicated by the dashed curve. Find 20. < BKCE 2006 Paper n- 16 >
the wavelength and frequency of the wave. ,
, In December 2004, an earthquake in the Indian Ocean caused a tsunami which produced water waves having wavelength
Wavelength/ cm Frequency/ Hz about 100 m and frequency about 2 Hz. What was the approximate time taken for these water waves to trav el from the
earthquake centre to Sri Lanka across a distance of about 1500 km?
A. 8 2.5
A. 1 hour
B. 8 5
B. 2hours
c. 16 2.5
C. 3 hours
D. 16 5
D. 4 hours
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAI -M/07 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAl-M/08
21. < HKCE 2007 Paper II -38 > 23. < HKCE 2009 Paper II - 36 >
a h d e f g h j k
A longitudinal wave is travelling from left to right in a medium. Figure (a) shows the equilibrium. positions ofparticles A to J
in the medium. At time t = 0, the positions of the particles are shown in Figure (b). Which of the following correctly shows
the displacemenMime graph of particle I? (Note: displacement to the right is taken to be positive) Figure (a)
Figure (b)
Figure (a) shows a series ofparticles (a - k) at their equilibrium positions. Figure (b) shows the positions of the particles at a
certain instant when a longitudinal wave travels to the right passes through the particles. Which are the directions of the
motion of the particles c andfat the instant shown in Figure (b) ?
direction of propagation particle c particlef
A. to le.ft toleft
A.
B. to left to right
C. to right to left
D. to right to right
24. < HKCE 2010 Paper II-34 >

direction oftravel
22. <HKCE2008Paperll-37> ---�------,quili'briumposition

a h , d f g h j k
� wave trav � along a string to the left. The� abo � shows its waveform at time t = I s. 'Which of the following
displa.cemenMime graphs best represents the motion of particle P ? (Take displacement upwards to be positive.)
Figure (a)
A. Displacement B. Displacement
ah , d f g hij k
Fig,,re (b) 6
ti'
2 4 ' 6
11,
Figirre (a) shows a series of particles which is uniformly distributed along a slinky spring. Figure (b) shows their positions at C. D.
a certain instant when a travelling wave passes through the slinky spring from left to right Which of the following diagrams: Displacement
shows the correct positions of the particles after half a period from the instant shown in Figure (b) ?
ab, d ' f g h ijk
ti' ti'
H-4 6 5 6
A. : : ri-
(4
a h ,d, f g h 25. < HKCE 2010 Paper IT� 35 >

Figure (a) shows the equiliorium. positions of particles E to Nin a medium. A longitudinal wave is travelling from left to
B. right. At time ti, the positions of the particles are shown in Figure (b).
E F G H I J K L
a h ' d,f g h j Figure (a) equilibrium positions
C.
h ' d e fgh i j k
direction oftravel
D. Which of the following particles is momentarily at rest at ti ?
A. K B. L C. M D. N
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAl-M/09 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAl-M 110
Questions 26 and 27: Part B : HKAL examination questions
The figure below shows the displacement-distance graph of a wave travelling to the right with speed 2 cm s- 1 at a certain instant.
P and Qare two particles at distances x = 8 <:m and 18 i:m respectively. 29. < HKAL 1992 Paper I- 20 >
Displacement/ cm
Figure (a)
,p,___-___,,__4\J----+-PP-12\J
_ l,__p_Q -.----2�------,,--• xi=
Figure (b)
26. < HKCE 2011 Paper II- 34 > Figure (a) shows the etpmlbrium positions of equally spaced particles in a nwdium. A longitudinal wave travels from left to
What is the period of the wave ? right through the medfum. At a certain inst.Int, the positions of the particles are shown in Figure (b). What will be the
directions of.1I10tion of particle 1 and particle 7 at this instant 'l
A. 0.25 s
Particle 1 Particle 7
B. 4s
A. to the right to the right
C. 8s B. to the right to the left
C. to the left to the right
D. 18 s
D. to the left to the left
27. <HKCE2011Paperll-35> 30. < HKAL 1993 Paper I-24 >

What is the shortest tin,.e for p to have the same displacement as Q at the instant shown ? displacement
A. 1'
B. 3s
Ol�f-=;;'s----,f,Ll
_.,,--,-,;,_---➔-. time in seconds
c. 4s 0.45 0.70"'--
�
D. 5s
A displacement-time graph of a particle in a travelling Wli'/e is shown. What is the frequency of this wave 'l
A. 1.43 Hz
28. < BKCE 2011 Paper Il- 36 > B. 2.00Hz
Figure (a) sbov,s a series of particles (E - 0) at their equihorium positions. Figure (b) sbo\W the positions of the particles at C. 2.22 Hz
a certain instant when a longitudinal wave travelling to the right passes through the particles. D. 4.00Hz
F
31. < BKAL 1994 Paper IIA-14 >
Figure (a)
displacement/ m dispIacement / m
o o.,vo., op '0; /JL0J\_ •

� t. LJo., , position/m time I ms
-
_. , Figure (b)
!_
Figure (a) Figure(b)

Which of the following statements is incorrect ?
Figure (a) represents the displacement-position graph of a travelling wave at a certain instant and Figure (b) represents the
A. The separation between F and N equals to the wavelength ofthe wave. displacement-time graph ofa particle in the wave. Calculate the speed of the wave.
B. The amplitude of the wave is4 cm. A 300m s·1
C. J is momentarily at rest at the instant shown in Figure (b). B. 150ms·1
D. N is at the centre of compression at the instant shown in Figure (b). C. 1.2m s·1
D. 0.6m s·1
-
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAI-M/11 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAI-M/12
WAl : Wave Propagation WAI : Wave Propagation
32. < HK.AL 1995Paper IIA - 12 > 35. < llKAL 2003 Paper IIA-14 >
direction of propagation ofwave
I I ! I I ! I 111 I I I 111 I
A B
------� -----
1
The above figure shows a longitudinal wave travelling to the right The particles and B are at the centre of a compression
.
The figure shows three particles P, Q and R on a transverse wave travelling towards the right The three particles will reach
their own equilibrium.positions at different times in the sequence of
and a rarefaction respectivel y. Which of the following gives correctly the clirectJ.ons of motion of A and B at the moment
shown? A. R,P,Q
B. R,Q,P
Particle A ParticleB
C. P,R,Q
A to the right to the left
B. to the right at rest D. P,Q,R
C. to the right to the right
D. at rest to the right
36. <HKAL2009 Paper IIA-16>
33. <BKAL 1998 Paper llA-13 >

B
A C Q
I I l � x/cm
8 10
D
The above figure shows a tnmsven;e wave propagating along a string. At the instant shown, the particle D on the string is The above :figure shows the displacement y against the position x of a transverse wave travelling to the right at time t = 0. P
moving downward. Which of the follow:ingdeductions is/are correct? and Qare two particles at x = I cm and x = 9 cm �ectively, Nex.t time when Preaches its crest position is at t = 03 s.
(1) The wave is propagating to the left. Which of the following statements are correct?
(2) Particle B talces longer time to reach its equilibrium position than that ofparticle A. (1) The speedofthetransversewave is IO cms-1,
(3) Particles C and D are moving in opposite directions at the instant shown. (2) Particle Qfust reaches its crest position at t = 0.5 s.
A (!)only (3) When Qreaches its crest position,P also reaches its crest position.
B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only A (1) & (2) only
D. (2 ) & (3) only B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only
D. (I), (2) & (3)
34. < HKAL 2000 Paper IlA-17 >
Displacement of air particles
+p
Part C : BKDSE examination questions
- "J�
f---"�---c�/:______.
""�----,---➔) position
37. <BKDSESamplePaperlA-17>
-,,,---....__p The solid curve ill the above diagram shows a triltlsverse wave 2cm
at a certain instant. After 0.05 s, the wave has travelled a
The above figure shows the displacement- position graph of a longitudinal wave at a certafu instant Take the displacement
towards the right as positive, which of the following statements about particle Pat this instant are correct?
distance of 2 cm and is indicated by the dashed curve. Find
,,--,, I', / "Y, r----
\\
the wavelength and frequency of the wave.
'
(1) Pis a centre of compression.
(2) P has the greatest kinetic energy.
WaveJength / cm Frequency/ Hz ,/ / I I \\ \
I \, \
(3) Pis moving towards the right A. 8 2.5
'
,,:' /
A. (1) & (2) only
B. (I) & (3) only
c . (2) & (3) only
B.
C.
D.
16
8
16
2.5
5
5
',.xI/
D. 0), (2) & (3)
38. < BKDSE Sample Paper IA - 18 >
-----�-----
direction of propagation
41. < HKDSE 2013 Paper IA - 16 >
displacement
p -
direction oftravel
R
The figure shows the shape of a transVerse wave travelling along a string at a certain instant. Which statements about the
motion of the particles P, Q andR on the string at this instant is correct 7
The figure shows a snapshot of a section of a continuous transVerse wave travelling along the x-llirection at time t = 0.
A. Particle P is moving downwards. At t = 1.5 s, the particle Pjust passes the equilibrium position for a secondtime at that moment. Find the wave speed.
B. Particle Q is stati.onaty. A. 20 cms-1
C. Particle R attains its maximum acceleration.
B. 12 cms- 1
D. p and Qare in phase.
C. 6cms~ 1
D. 4cms-1
39. <HKDSE Practice PaperIA-17 >
2=
- 42. <HKDSE2013 Paper IA-17>
2 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13
' , ' I-++
. : t��+:+�
Figure (1) ,...,..,...
• • • • • • • • • • • : rt-,
2 4 6 7 9 101112 13
,, ,+1 ..
direction of propagation
Figure (2)
..,.,.
A longitudinal wave travels to the right through a medium containing a series of particles. The figure above shows the +:+ � .,... :.· '..'. +!"""!"a
positions of the particles at a certain instant. The dotted lines indicate the equilibrium positions of the particles. Which of the Figure (1) shows the equilibrium positions of particles a to k separated by 5 cm from each other in a medium. A longitudinal
following statements about the wave at the instant shown is/are correct 7 wave is travelling from left to right with a speed of 80 cm S-1• At a certain instant, the positions of the particles are shown in
(1) The wavelength of the longitudinal wave is 16 cm. Figure (2). Determine the amplitude and frequency of the wave.
(2) Particles 8 and 10 are moving in the same direction.
'==
(3) Particle 3 is momentarily at rest amplitude frequency
A. (1) only A. 2 llz
•=
B. (3) only B. 6 4llz
C. (1) & (2) only C. 2 llz
D. (2) & (3) only D. 9om 4 llz
•1tlilfflflifflm
40. < BKDSE 2012 Paper IA-15 > 43. < HKDSE 2014 Paper IA-14 >
abc d f ghijk direction oftravel -<-------
Fi-(a) p Q
---- ------- �------
ammoom1n11•
a b c def g h i j
s
Fi�•�)
5= A transverse wave travels towards the left on a long string. P, Q, R and S are particles on the string. Which of the following
statements correctly descnbe(s) their motions at the instant shown ?
A series of particles is uniformly distnbuted along a slinky spring initially. Figure (a) shows their positions at a certain (1) Pis movingupwards.
instant when a travelling wave propagates along the slinky spring from left to right. Figure (b) shows their positions 0.1 s
(2) Q and Sare moving in opposite directions.
later. Wm.ch statement is correct?
A. Particle e is always stationary. (3) R is momentarily at rest.
B. Particles a and i are in phase. A. (1) only
B. (3) only
C. The wavelength of the -wave is 16 cm. C, (1) & (2) only
D. The frequency of the wave is 10 Hz. D. (2) & (3) oruy
44.
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WAl : Wave Propagation
< HKDSE 2015 Paper IA - 12 >

a b c de g h
PC-WAl-M/15
I
47.
WAI: Wave Propagation
<HKI>SE 2018 Paper IA-15 >
PC-WAI -M/16
11
j The figure below shows the displacement-time graph of particles P and Q on the same transverse travelling wave of
Figure (a) wavelength A.
displacement
ab, d g k Q p
p;g,re (b) \ y "
I I\
a ' h j
0 • 4 6 time/s
Figure (c)
\ \I I
\ J\ , \
1/\
A series of particles is uniformly distn'buted along a slinky spring initially. When a travelling wave propagates along the
slinky spring from left to right, Figure (a) shows the positions of the particles at a certain instant Figures (b) and (c) Which ofthe following statements MUST BE correct? Upward displacement is taken to be positive.
respectively show theirpositions 0.05 sand 0.1 slater. Which of the following is/are a possible frequency of the wave 7 (1) At it me t = 2 s, Pis mom.entarily at rest.
(1) IO Hz
(2) At time t = 4 s, Q is moving downwards.
(2) 20 Hz
(3) 40 Hz (3) The separation between the equilibrium positions ofP and Q is 0.25 ...t.
A (1) only A. (2)only
B. (2) only B. (3) only
C. (3) only c. (!) & (2) only
D. (!), (2) & (3) D. (!) & (3) anly
45. < HKDSE 2016 Paper IA -15 > a. <HKDSE 2D19 Paper IA�1 >
The above figure shows a snapshot of a transverse wave which travels along a string. Which statement is correct ?
A. The wave is travelling to the left ifparticle P is moving upwards at this instant.
B. Particles P and Rare moving in the same direction at thisinstant.
C. Particle Q is at rest at this instant
D. Particle R vibrates with an amplitude larger than that ofparticle Q.
46. <BKOSE2017 Paper IA- 14>

Figure (a) shows the equilibrium positions of particles E to Nin a medium. At time t = 0, a longitudinal wave starts travelling
fromkftto right At time t= l s, the positions of the particles are shown in Figure (b).
H J K L M N
Figure(a) ·;7 ·h
-
=!+" :
'i-1- --i:
T
equiltoriumpositions
M N
Figure(b) , , '-\- time= 1 s
direction oftravel
Which of the following statements MUST BE correct?

A. The distance between particles F and N is equal to the wavelength of the wave.
B. The periodofthewaveis Is.
C. Particle Eis always at rest
D. Particle I is momentarily at rest at!"' I s.
49. <HKDSE 2020PaperIA-11>
Figure (1) shows the equilibrium positions of partidcs a to kin a medium. The particles are separated
by 2 cm ftom each other. A longitudinal wave of frequency S Hz is travelling fi-om left to right. At a
a:.rtain instant. the positions of the particles arc' shown in Figure (2). Determine
· the amplitude and
spec:4 of the wave.
am.pUtwle ,p«d
w•
A. 3.6c:m 40 cm.s
B. 3.6an SOems-1
C. 2.4cm 40an s-•
D. 2.4cm 80a:ns-l
50. <HKDSE 2020 Paper IA-12>
The figure sbowi partoflhe m.,pt:accmcnt..distancc graph of a travelling wave of period Tat tim
e t.., O,
P is a pvticle on the waw.
Which graph below con-ectly shows the 'VBriaf.ion of the particle's kinetic energy £ Within a period
Ulmngihnnt•0'1
A. B.
E
T t
T t
:� L
C. D.
T t
I
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAl-MS/01 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAl-MS/02
WAl: Wave Propagation WAl : Wave Propagation
HKEAA's � Schenwis p.re9an:d fot the markers' tefcrence. It should not� regmled as a set ofxnodel �wee; .
Student, andteachers who are not involvedin the marking :PIQCCSS ate advised to intetpret the Marking Scheme with care. 4. A
M.C. Answers T= ..!._ =_!_=0 .2s

f 5
I. D II. D 21. C 31. A 41. B .-. AfterO.l s which is ±T, the wave should propagate by ½A..
C 12. B 22. C 32. A 42. A
2.
3. C 13. B 23. C 33. A 43. A 5. C
4. A 14. D 24. C 34. D 44. A ✓ (I) P and Qare two particles in phase with mmimum separation ⇒ PQ = A
C 15. A 25. A 35. A 45. B ✓ (2) Pis in ma:timuJl1 displacement ⇒ PR = amplitude

5.
(3) Particle P vibrates vertically about its equilibrium position, thusP will move to positionR.
6. D 16. D 26. B 36. B 46. A
7. D 17. C 27. B 37. B 47. C

D
6.
8. D 18. A 28. C 38. C 48. C
C 19. B 29. C 39. A 49, D

9.
C 20, B 30. B 40 . B 50. C

IO.
R
M.C. Solution (I) Pis at its maximum displacement and is momentarily at rest
✓ (2) Q is moving upwards as shown by the above diagram
I. D
✓ (3) R is at the instant of maximum. displacement and is momentarily at rest
7. D
R , ,,.(�\, ,,.T,\
_.,__\.,-;-. "'""·:,r"-•- '~: Q�,�----
I '
✓ ;' : \
(1) Pis at the crest position, thus it nnist be momentarily at rest.
-�-�'-P.,:
✓ (2) i
Draw the dotted line representing the wave at a later instant, Q is mov ng upwards ' \ /
' ',./ \
✓ (3) R is at the trough position, thus it must be momentarily at rest
After a quarter of a period, the wave would travel towards the right a distance of a quarter ofwavekngth.
2. C
8. D
In 0. 025 s, the wa.vefonnpropagatcs by¾ ofits wavelength.
From the graph, T"" 02 s.
-
:. Period= 0. 025x4 = 0. 1 s
f•.!_• 2._ dHz
T 0.2
3. C
ilitection of wave motion
9. C
�--, ½7\:: From figure (a), A"" x.

Fromfigure(b), T'"'-y.
_____ .,.__,._ _____
_ �.,....-;- ---- ----�'-� --
v=f/4=!:.=3..
T y
DSE Physics · Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAl-MS/03 DSE Physics · Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAl-MS /04
C 16. D
f• i,211z After a quarter of a period, the waveform should propagate ¼ wavel ength towards the right.
2
Thus the crest initially at 5 cm should move to the point at 1O cm.
A.= 10cm = 0.lm
.·. v = p. = (2)(0.1) = o.2m s-1 17. C
Wavelength: 'A, = 2 cm x 8 = 16 cm
11. D
AI; the wave travels 2 cm, i.e. ½ 'A, in0.05 s which is ½ T, thus period T "" 0.05 s x 8 "" 0.40 s
Frequency: f = ..!. = _l_ = 2.5 Hz

T 0.40
18. A
✓ (1) Amplitude is the maximum displacement, thus A = 3 x 2 cm = 6 cm
✓ A P moves upward= the wave is travelling to the left
✓ (2) Wavelength is the minimum distance to repeat itself; thus 'A, = 4 x 2 cm = g cm
✓ B. All particles in same wave must have the same frequency
✓ C. Q is moving downwards at the instant shown (3) Since at t = 0.2 s, the wave has propagated ¾),,,,thus 0.2 s = ¾ T :. T = 0.267 s
D. R is moving downwards as shown by the above diagram Frequency f = ..!. = _l_ = 3.75 Hz* 5 Hz
T 0.267
12. B 19. B
The time taken for the wave to make one complete vibration is the period. 3
v = E,_ = xz = 30cm.S-1 = 0.3m s-1
(1)
(2) The distance travelled by the wave in one second is the speed . t 0.2
✓ (3) The number of waves produced in one second is the frequency.
20. B
13. B By v = f/2 :. v = (2) (100) = 200ms-1

By d = vt :. (1500 X 103) = (200) t t = 1500 s"' 2hours
p 21. C
As shown in the above diagram, particles P, and R are momentarily at rest at t - 0
while Q is moving upwllids and S is moving downwards.
Figure (a) equ:ilil>tium position
Since the Displaccn:tent-tinw graph shows that the motion of cork is moving upwards at t = 0 :. Q is the answer.
14. D
Figure (b) t= 0
Time taken should be found by t = d Iv.

However, V = fi,, •
displacement displacement ofparticle I
As /. is unknmvn, v cannot be determined, so time taken to travel 100m cannot be determined.
O� __ypositinn o��•-
15. A
✓ (1) The distance that the wave repeats itself in 1 cycle is 20 cm. This is the wavelength.
✓ (2) By v '°' f"J,. :. (1.2) = f (0.20) :. f = 6 Hz. Since the particle I is initially at the equilibrium position.
(3) The amplitude should be 3cm from the graph.. At a later time, it would move towards the left, i.e. it would have a negative displacement
22. C 26. B
In Figure (b), particle ais at the centre of compression, thus it must be at the equihOrium position. Wavelength: IL, = 8 cm
After half a period, particle a shouldperform half a cycle, By v - f' .·. (2) = /(8) :. f= 0.25Hz
thus it must be still at the same equih'brium position but it then becomes at the centre of rarefaction. Period: T= .!. = _l_ - 4,
J 0.2s
The graph in option C show s that particle a is at the rarefaction and at the same position, thus it is the answer.
27. B
23. C
Particle b andj are at the centre of compression and par ticlefts at the centre ofrarefaction. The wave is moving towards the right, thus particle P is moving downwards.
They are at the equilibrium positions. To reach the position of Q, that is the crest, particle P has to move through ¼ cycle. Thus, the fune taken is f T.
After a small time interval, the wave travels towards the right and is r epresented by the dotted line.
:.t=¾x4=3s
Particle b and together with particle c nearby are moving towards the right
Particlefis movin g towards the left. 28. C
Particle Jis at the position of rarefaction, thus it must be at the equilibrium position.
24. C At equilibrium point, it must move with the maximum. speed, not at rest. Thus option C is incorrect.
tlirection oftravel
_'w ____ �---

�P___ � . . on
--------- eqw"liibriumpos.,
29. C
Tak e the rightward direction as(+) :
l e.
The wave would travel towards the left after t = 1 s as shown by the dotted in
It shows that particleP is at the equilibrium position and is moving downwards at t = 1 s. Particle I is moving towards the negative direction, thus it is moving to the left.
Thus, option C shows the correcty - t graph for particle P. Note that position of Patt = I s. Particle 7 is moving towards the positive direction, thus it is moving to the right
25. A 30. B
Period: T = 0.70- 0.20 = 0.5 s
E
'.,
;
" time = ti I=.!.= __1__ = 2Hz
T 0.5
direction oftravel 31. A

From the graph, E and Mare at the centre of rarefaction and I is at the centre of compression. From Figure (a), particles separated by0.6 mare in the same phase, thus the wavelength : IL,= 0.6 m
Centr e ofrarefaction and centre of compression must be at the equil ibrium pos itions and are moving at greatest speed. From Figure (b), a partic le takes 2 ms to complete a cycle
For a particle to be momentarily at rest, it must be at the extreme point, T=2xI0-3s

1
and its position should be at the middle of the compression and rarefaction. J =}.. = - - = sooHz
T 2xI0-
3
l ftmost position and must be momentarily at rest at !1.

From the graph shown, particle Kis at the e
V ""f/L, = (0.6) (500) = 300 m S-1
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAl-MS/07 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAl-MS /08
WAl: Wave Propagation WAl : Wave Propagation
32. A 37. B
Take the rightward direction as(+) : Wavelength: /1. = 2 cm x 8 = 16 cm
As the wave travels 2 cm, i.e. ½ /1. in 0.05 s which is ½ T,
Period T = 0.05 s x 8 = 0.40 s
Frequency : f = l = _l_ = 2.5 Hz

T 0.40
Particle A is moving towards the positive direction, thus it is moving to the right.
OR
Particle Bis moving towards the negative direction, thus it is moving to the left.
As the wave travels 2 cm in 0.05 s, speed: v = !!.. = � = 40 cm. s-1
t 0.05
33. A
By V = JA :. (40) = I (16) :. f= 2.5Hz
38. C
• A. M P is at the crest, it must be momentarily at rest.
B. M Q is at the equilibrium position, it must have the maximwn speed and must be moving.
✓ (1) Particle D moves downward ⇒ the wave moves to the left
✓ C. MR is at the extreme position, its acceleration is the.maximum.
(2) A moves upward before going downward but Bmoves downwatd only
⇒ A : takes a longer path to reach the equih'britunposition D. M the separation between P and Q are not n A, they cannot be in phase.
(3) C and D both move downward.

39. A
2 5 11
-10.,.-- 12 13
34. D 3 4 6 7
��L
,, ........ :
"""""'
✓ Pis a centre of compression rightwards
(1) ,__
.
since the particles at the left hand side of P have positive displacement, i.e. moves to the right ; ��: _ .... ---:
�� ..� :
..
1 � ..
while the particles at the right hand side ofP moves to the left. • • • • • •
✓ P:atequihl>riumposition ⇒ maximumKE 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13
(2)
✓ Draw the displacement- position graph as shown in the above figure.
(3) p: has(+) displacement later ⇒ moving to the right
Note that particles 3 and 11 are at the compression and particle 7 is at the rarefaction.
✓ (1) The separation between two compressions is 1 wavelength. :. A = 8 x 2= 16 cm
35. A
Af. the installt shown, particle P is momentarily atrest, particle Q and R are moviog downwards.
• (2)' After a short time, the wavewould move rightwards to the dotted position.
Thus, particle 8 is moving leftwards and particle 10 is moving rightwards.
Time for P to reach the equilibrium point = ¼T They are moving in opposite directions.
Time for Q to reach the equih"briu!n point > ¼ T • (3) Particle 3 is at the equilibrium position, it must have the maximum speed, but not at rest
Time for R to reach the equihnrium point < ¼ T
40. B
36. B
• A. For a travelling wave, particles maybe momentarily at resl There is no particle that is always atresl
✓ At this instant, P is moving downwards. ✓ B. In Figure (a), particles a and/ are both at the compression, thus they are in phase.
As it takes 0.3 s for P to reach the crest position that performs ¾ cycle, the period is 0.4 s. • c. The separation between a and i is one wavelength, which is 32 cm..
Wavelcngth ofthewaveis4cm. Speed= ;\,IT= {4)/(0.4)=10cm s-1
• D. Particle a is at the compression in Figure (a) and at the rarefaction in Figure (b),
(2) At t"" 0.5 s, Q should reach its trough position.
that is, particle a has moved through half cycle of the oscillation, thus the time taken is half period.
✓ (3) The separation of P and Q is two wavelengths, thus their motions are in phase. tr=0.ls .·. T=0.ls :.f=liT=1!0.2=5Hz
41. B 45. B
From the graph, wavelength: /2 = 30 - 6 = 24 cm • A Ifparticle Pis moving upwards, the wave should be travelling to the right
In 1.5s, particle P performs ¾ cycle, thus it talces a time of¾ T, where Tis the period. ✓ B. Ifthe wave is moving to the right, then bothP andR are moving u.pwards.
:. T = 2s Ifthe wave is moving to the left, then both P and R are moving downwards.
Thus, they must be m oving in the same direction at this instant
Frequency: f = ..!..
T
= .!.
2
= 0.5 Hz • C. Particle Q is at the equilibrium position 1hat bas the greatest speed, it must be moving.
Speed : v = fJ. = (0.5) (24) - 12 cm s- 1 • D. Particle Rand Q should be moving with the same amplitude since it ls a travelling wave.
42. A 46. A
From Figure (2), particles b andj are at the centres of compression. ✓ A. From Figure (b), bothE and Mare at the centre of rarefaction,
Separation between them is the wavelength. thus distance between E and Mis one wavelength.
:. /4 = 8x5 = 40cm Therefore, distance between the next particles, F and N, is also one wavelength.
Byv = fli ;. (80) - /(40) ;. f- 2Hz • B. There is no information concerning the period or frequency of the wave.
From Figure (2), as particle bis at the compression andparticle/is at the rarefaction, they are at eqnilibriwn positions. • c. In a travelling wave, there is no particle that is always at r est.
Particle d should then be at the extreme position. • D. Particle I is at the centre of compression, it is moving towards the right at this instant.
Displacement ofparticle dis the arnplitude.
.-. Amplitude = 6 c m 47. C
✓ (!) At t = 2 s, P is at the position of trough, thus it must be moinentarily at rest

43. A
✓ (2) A t t = 4 s, Q is at equilibrium positon and later at a lower position, thus it must be moving downwards.
After a while, the wave would shift to the left shown as the dotted Cl,lt'l'e.
• (3) P and Q are neither in phase nor anti�phase,, there is no phase relation oonceming tbcir separation.
✓ (!) Particle P is moving upwards.
(2 ) Particles Q and S should move in the same direction.
(3) Particle R is not momentarily at rest, but mo ving downwards.
44. A
In Figure (a), particle e is at the centre of compression.
✓ (!) fff= lOHz,then T= I.=..!__= 0.1s. Afteratirneof0.05s: t = �T= fT,

/ 10 U
particle e should travel ½ cycle to the position of the centre of rarefaction as shown in Figure (b).
Thus,f= 10HzispossiOJe.
(2) Iff= 20Hz,then T= _!_= 2.. = 0.05s. Afteratimeof0.05s: t =IT,

/ 20
p article e should travel I cycle to the position of the centre of compression,
but not the rarefaction as shown in Figure (b). Thus,/= 20 Hz is imp ossible.
(3) If f= 40Hz, then T= _!_ = 2.. = 0.025s. Afteratimeof0.05 s: t = 2 T,

/ 40
particle e should travel 2 cycles to the position of the centre of compression,
but not the rarefac tion as shown in Figure ( b). Thus,/= 40 Hz is impossible.
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WAl-Q/01 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA1-Q /02
Part A : HKCE examination questions 2. <HKCE1990PaperI�5>
A vertical vibrator generates waves on a string. It takes 0.25 s to produce a complete wave of wavelength
1. < RKCE 1981 Paper I - 6 > 0.8 m on the string.
(a) Find the frequency and speed oftbe waves on the string.
(b) How longdoes it take for the wave to propagate a distance of2 m ? (2roarks)
(c) The figure below shows the shape of the string at the instant vrl1en the vtDrator has made one complete vibration.
A transverse wave is travelling steadily from left to right through a series of particles. At a certain�� vnve fonn is as
shown in the above figure. Each ofth.e vt'bratingparticles is observed to perform four complete oscillatLons m 16 s. � Directionofwavemotion
Direction
of t
(a) Find the following quantities: Vibration ,J,
(i) the amplitude ofthe wave, D

I- 0.Sm ----J.j
(u) the wavelength.

(i) At the instant shown, whlch ofthe particles A, B,. C, Dis/are
(1) moving downwards,
(iii) the period,
(2) at rest?
(2marks)
(iv) the frequency.
(ii) Sketch the shape of the string after 0.125 s. In your figure sh.ow the positions of the particles A, B, C andD.
(4nurrks)
(b) At the instant shown, which of the particles P, Q, R, S, T is/are (5 marks)
(i) moving upwards,
(il) moving downwards,
(iii) momentarily at rest?
(c) What will be the position of particle Q a qtlazter of a period later 'I
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WAl-Q/03 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WAl-Q/04
1
3. <HKCE1998Paperl-7> 3. (c) (iii) Find the amplitude and wavelength of the wave.
(2-k,)
Figure I
'. ;; {iv) If each particle takes 0.25 s to complete one oscillation, find the speed of the wave.
,, ..i..11..tt:L1.1...1..Li..:J..J�i.·d:H:r2 _ ,_l-i£B
A Iongitidi.nal wave is travelling from left to right in a medium. Figure 1 shows the equilibriuDl positions of some particles A
_ _
to Kin the medium. Figure 2 shows the positions of the particles at a certain time t when the wave 1s passmg through them.
(a) What is meant by a longitudinal wave? Give an example of a longitudinal wave. (2 marks)
(b) Point out a particle in Figure 2 which is 4. < HKCE 2002 Paper I - 4 >
(l) at the centre ofa comp ression,
(ii) at the centre ofa rarefaction. (2m&ks) Q
----------· Equilibriuznposition
p
{c) The table below shows the displacements of particles A and B at time t. (Note : Displacement to the right is taken to be
positive.) 0.3m ----
(i) Using Figures 1 and 2, :find the displacements of the other particles and complete the Table below. (2 maxks)
A wave is generated on a string. The figure above shows the shape of the string at a certain instant At this instant, both
particles P and Qare moving downwards.
(a) State the type ofwave generated on the above string. (I :mark)
(nj In the figare below, draw agraph showing the displacements of the particlesalongthewave at tune t. · (2 marks)
J¼tf·'
Displacement/cm '
(b) What is the direction of1l:aveI of the above wave? (l=k)
\-J� -i ,
·cr-i-,r
rc, f
' (c) At the instan.t shown, which particle (P or Q) has a greater speed? Explain briefly.
(2mawJ
(d) Find the wavelength of the wave. (1 DWk)
_, (e) Describe the motions ofparticlesP and Q at a quarter of a period later.

(2 maw)
-10
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAl-QS/01 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAl-QS/02
HICEAA's Matking Scheme is� for the ntarkets' xefert:nce. It should not be regarded as a set of model answers.
Students and tcacheis who ate not mVolved in the marlting process are advised to inte;rJltet the Matking Scheme with care. 3. (c) (i) [2]
Particle C D E F G H I J K
Question Solution
Displacement/ cm -8 -6 0 6 8 6 0 -6 -8
I. (a) (i) A= 2cm [l]
(ii) 'A.= 8cm [l] (ii)
(iii) T=4s [l]
(iv) f = 025 Hz [l]
(b) (i) R,S [2]
(u) P,T [2]
(ili) Q [l]
(,) Q is at 2 cmbelow its present position [2]
-5
2. (a) Frequency = 4 Hz [l]
Speed=!!._""� = 3.2ms-1
t 025
OR v=f/2=4x0.8=3.2ms-1 [2]
_10 'iti:1=1==:TF;./:0, t:r+.-·-i��ti#.Jfflt:+=l::¥ +1 · +· .
(b) By d = vt [l] < Correct points > [l]
_-. (2) a (3.2) I t = 0.625 s [l] < Correct curve > [l]
(,) (i) (1) A (iii) Amplitude= 8 cm [!]

Wavelength = 80 cm
(2) BandD [l]
(iv) speed = /A, [1]

(u) D
< For wave fon:n > [2] 1
a --x0.8 "'3.2mS-l [l]
_______!: -------- ----------- < 0.5 mark for each particle> [2] 0.25
4. (a) It is a transverse wave [1]
3. (a) A longitudinal wave is a wave in which the 'Vibrations are parallel to the direction of trave l of the wave. [1] (b) The direction is towards the left. [l]
Example: (Any ONE of the following) [l] (,) ParticleP has a greater speed,
*
[l]
Sound waves since it is at theequiblmum position. [l]
* Ultrasonic waves
* Waves generated in a slinky spring
(d) Wavelength= o3
= 0.2 m [l]
1.5
( b) (i) ParticleA (OR J) i satacentreofcompression. [l] (e) Particle P is momentarily at rest. [l]
(u) Particle Eis at a centre of rarefaction. [l] Particle Q is moving downwards. [l]
Hong Kong Diploma of Secondary Education Examination DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WA2-M/01
Physics - Compulsory part ( ;t,/,-<fl5,'- ) WA2 : Wave Phenomena
Section A-Heat and Gases (��#t.ittt:)
1. Temperature,Heatandinternalenergy(il:..if., #..'fl'liit)
2. Transfer Processes (�ff.$i1Ht) Part A : HKCE examination questions
3. ChangeofState(�/!!./1-Jtt�)
4. General Gas Law (-t�.ifi.:ttit.#) 1. < HKCE 1982 Paper Il-12 >
5. Ki.netic Theory (¾Til�Ur) A train ofwater waves is travelling froma deep water region to a shallow water region. Which ofthe following properties of
Section B -Force and Motion (h�.il!�) the water waves will be changed ?
L PositionandMovement(1Jt.'l;fo-$t!i) (l) wavelength
2. Newton'sLaws(4'ij(;t.#")
(2) frequoncy
3. Moment ofForce (:hif.) (3) velocity
4. Work,EnergyandPower(,ft.;I;, �:i'fl'-Wll!l-)
A (I) only
5. Momentum ($';-:I)
B. (3) only
6. Projectile Motion (�tti!J&i) C. (1) & (3) only
7. Circular Motion (l!l!J!Jilf») D. (2) & (3) only
8. Gravitation (31 iJ)
Section C- Wave Motion (1;t$!,)
I. Wave Propagation (iltliH/liiJ!.) ,. <HKCE 1982 Paper II� 13 >
2. WavePhenomena(it�JP..�) A stationary wave is obtained by attaching one end ofa string toa 50 Hz
3. Reflection and Refraction ofLight(;\;.11\l.&.MJl#Af) vibrator as shown in the diagram. The velocity ofthe waves propagated
4. Lenses (.i!::lt) in the string is
5. Wave Nature ofLigbt (;\;.11-Jilttii#·!i.) A. 0.1 m s- 1
6. Sound(¾%) B. 0.2ms- 1 �I
0.Im
Section D - Electricity and Magnetism ( ii!��) C. Sm s-1
L Electrostatics (Mi-'IJ!:�) D. 10 ms-1
2. Electric Circuits ( 't4)
3. Do mestic Electricity (;f<:.ls Jfl 1£)
4. MagneticField(.ittljj-)
,. < HK.CE 1983 Paper II- 23 >
5. Electromagnetic Induction ( 1l!:��.ii,) A stationary wave is set up alonga string by a vibrator as shown
6. Alternating Current (5U1.i. 'ii!:) in the diagram. If the frequency of the vibrator is 5 Hz, what is
vibrator
the velocity of the wave setup in the string?
Section E -Radioactivity and Nuclear Energy (�:f#j{.�:fi,;tt:�)
A. 25 cm s-1
1. Radiation and Radioactivity (�Af:f,,�Af.W.. �)
B. S0cms-1 I<--- 20cm �
2. Atomic Model (�-r.m?I:!)
C. 75 cms- 1
3. Nuclear Energy (-ltt/lg,)
D. IO0cms-1
Physics - Elective part (�1f� f;-)

Elective 1 -Astronomy and Space Science (it.:t.$:faNi.*#4':) 4. <.HKCE 1984 Paper Il- 22 >
L The universe seen in different scales (�!SJ :irr-,1M'f.T"9o/WimYr.) In a ripple tank experiment, a series of plane water waves are sent through a narrow slit Which of the following will have
2. Astronomy through.history (XX,$/r,11t&:t) changed when the water waves emerge from the slits?
3. Orbital motions under gravity('Jt.jJf{jg$Jr.;t.;(i?)) (I) wave speed
4. Stars and the universe (,rJ.£:f,,o/'ili)
(2) wave pattern
Elective 2 -Atomic World (Jfi,f-ilt!/f..) (3) :freq uency
I. Rutherford's atomic model (,i�#Z.lf.-r�1'!)
A. (1) only
2 Photoelectric effect( 16 ·utit)
B. {2) only
3. Bohr"satomicmodel ofhydrogen (.it.Ii "9.&,J.f.7-il�) C. (I) & (2) only
4. Particles or waves ($.-:;-*it) D. (2) & (3) only
5. Probing into nano scale («.ffi.#J;fH!l;·.¾'l,.)
Elective 3- Energy and Use ofEnergy (Ji6itf<>115iJf.�fi:.}ij)
I. Electricityathome(Ulfi'll!:) 5. < HK.CE 1985 Paper II - 25 >
2. Energy efficiency in building (�1/i,/r,l�l,IJltt.$) A stationary wave is produced ina string bya vertical vibrator as shown P A
3. Energy efficiency in transportation (�fti#lil.r��tt.Jil.) in the diagram. If P is at the crest of an antinode at a certain instant,
(V\J
4. Non-renewable energy sources (�"f.jl}!t�i,lli) what is the direction ofmotion of the point A at that in5tant?
5. Rmewable energy sources ("f .jl},:l�62fJ A. upwards viDrator
Elective 4 - Medical Physics ( U.�#JJ;t/ffe) B. downwards wall
I. M.ucing sense ofthe eye (O!l{ig/& '!{) C. to the right
2. Makingsenseoftheear(.lf-lr,i�'a') D. momentarily at rest
3. Medical imaging using non-ionizing radiation ( .'/� 'lt4/t#.M i}*:%1l$)
4. Medical imaging using ionizing a r diation (11l:�ffiMY<¥:ifll*)
·.,
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WA2-M/02 DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WA2-M/03
1
WA2: Wave Phenomena WA2: Wave Phenomena
<BKCE 1986Paper ll- 24 > 11. < BKCE 1990 Paper ll-26 >
'Which of the following properties of
Straight waves in a ripPle tank are observed using a hand stroboscope with a single slit The maxinnun frequency of rotation In a ripple tank experiment, a series of plane 'Water waves passes through a narrow slit.
of the stroboscope where a stationary pattern can be observed is 2 revolutions per second. The distance between the first the waves will remain unchanged?
crest and the eleventh crest is found to be 0.2 xn. What is the speed of the wave 7 (1) speed
A. 0.2 m s-1 B. 0.2 m s-1 (2) direction of travel
11 10 (3) frequency
A. (1) only
D. 0.4 ms-1 B. (2) only
10
c. (1) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) ool y
7. < RKCE 1987Paper Il-12 >
p p
The figure shows a stationary water wave at its maximum vibration. 12. <BKCE1990Paperll-23>
What is the direction of the motion of a particle P at this instant 7
A. towards the right
== =Aas�=r.,,',,==Q
B
B. upwards
C. downwards
=
D. momentarily at rest
above. Which of the following
A straight pulse AB is travelling towards a straight barrier PQ in a ripple tank as shown
a=, = Q
figures best shows the :reflected pulse?
8. <HKCE 1988Paperll-24> B.
7
A.
P======Q P===aa�=;ec
30
In a ripple tank, when water waves pass through a narrow gap in a barrier, what happens to its frequency and wavelength?
Frequency Wavelength
A. increases decreases
B. decreases increases C D.
=
p
C. decreases remains unchanged
D. remains unchanged remains unchanged =====,7
=,=,, Q
9. < HK.CE 1989 Paper 11-25>
13. <HKCE1991Paperll-24>
The figure above shows the wave pattern in a ripple tank from coherent point sources S1 and S2. What kind of interference
occurs atX, YandZ? A series ofwater waves, generated in water of uniform depth, is travelling towards an obstacle as shown above. Which ofthe
X y z following diagrams best shows the wave pattern after passing the obstacle?
a c n
�1111
A
A. destructive constructive constructive
�jj jj �j j j J �j J j j
B. no interference constructive constructive
C. no inootference destructive no interference
D. no interference destructive constructive
14. < HKCE 1992 Paper 11-24>

In a ripple tank experiment, the pattern of plane water wave� is frozen by �ing a
� stroboscopic lamp flashing at a freqllency of 50 Hz as shown m the above diagram.
DJ
If the frequency of the vibrator is 50 Hz, find the wavelength and speed of the waves.
A stationaiy wave is formed in a string. The above diagram shows the string at the instant of maximum displacement. What
will be the shape ofthe wave pattern one quarter of a period later ? Wavelength Speed
A R C A 4om 2ms-1
B. 4om 12.5 ms-1
C. Som 2.5 JllS-1
D. Som lOm s-1
PC-WA2-M/04 PC-WA2-M/05
1
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA2 : Wave Phenomena WA2 : Wave Phenomena
IS. < HK.CE 1992 Paper ll 25 > 18. < RKCE 1993 Paper n .23 >
pm
R
R
S• J�3on
� so
M best
Plane water waves travel towitrds a straight barrier PQ as shown in the figure above. Which of the following diagrams
In a doubie-1;li t experiment, a source S sends waves towards two slits P and Q, which are equidistan.t:fromS. The distances of shows the re.fleeted waves ?
a point M:fromP and Qare 53 cm and 50 cm respectively. If constructive interference occurs at M; the possible wavelength A. B.
of the waves is
A. I cm.
B. 2cm.
c. 4cm. �Q �Q
D. 6cm.
tttH
C. D.
16, < HKCE 1992 Paper ll 26 >R
Obstacle
Shallow Deop
region region < HKCE 1994 Paper n- 20 >
6f
A vibrator generates a stationary wave on a string. The
tA
The figure above shows a series of plane water waves travelling in a shallow region of water. The waves pass through a small
diagram shows the string at an instant of maximum
r-------g� ---·7r
slit to a deep r egion of water. Which of the following diagrams shows the wave pattern in the deep region?
displacement. Which of the following statement is coi:rect? Drr,ctio
A. R C �
jl)))
A. Particle Pis moving towards the right ofVt1trati�.,
B. Particle Q is moving u pwards.
c:, Particle R always remains at rest. Vt"hrator Fixed end
n:' All particles in the string move with the same amplitude.
r
20. <HKCE 1996Paperll-25>
Vibrator
17. <HKCE1993PaperIIR25> \ I� I
\--\ ..._ �-----_--17
Figul'e(a) Figun(b)
(0J_____l____i'.0\
A vibrator generates continuous plane waves in a ripple tank (see Figure (a)). Fi gure (b) shows the wave pattern. observed.
p N Q
Two vibrators P an.d. Qare set to vibrate in phase in a ripple tank. MN is the perpendicular bisector ofPQ as shown above;
'Which of the following statements is/are true?
(1) Constructive interference occurs along MN
(2) Destructive interference occurs alongPQ.
(3) A crest is always formed at M
A (1) only
B. (2) <m!y
C. (I) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) only
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA2-M/061 DSE Physics • Section C : M.C. PC-WA2-M/07
-I
21. < HKCE 1997 Paper TI - 25 > ZS. <HKCE1998Paperil-26>
pass the obstacle, they bend
A series of plane water waves travel towards an obstacle in a ripple tank. When the waves
around the corners of the obstacle. \Vbich of the following statements is/are correct?
(1) The phenomenon is called diffraction.
{2) The speed of the waves remains unchanged as they bend round the comers.
(3) The degree of bending of the waves depends on the size of the obstacle relative to the
wavelength of the waves.
A. (1) only
B. (1) & (3) only
A vt'brator generates continuous plane waves in a ripple tank. The waves undergo diffraction when they pass through a slit. C. (2) & (3) only
Which of the following can increase the degree of diffraction of the waves? D. (!), (2) & (3)
(1) Increasing the width the slit
:L
(2) Placing the vibrator closer to the silt
(3) Increasing the wavelength ofthe water waves 26. <HKCE 1998 Paper Il- 25>
A. (1) only
B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only Shallow '' D"I'
regi. on
D. (2) & (3) only region
\
of water. Which of
Questions 22 and 23 : A vibrator generates a stationary wave on a string. The diagram below shows the string at a certain instant. The diagram above shows a series ofplane water waves travelling from a shallow region to a deep' region
the following diagrams best shows the wave pattern in the deep region ?
A. B.
Direction
ofvi'bration
t ---------- X----------y -----------
Vibrator
Fixed end
22. <HKCE 1997 Paper D- 23 >

Which of the following statements is incorrect?
A. The distance betweenX and Yis equal to half the wavelength of the stationary wave.
B. All particles betweenX and Yon the string vi'brate in the same direction.
c. D.
C. All particles between X and Yon the string vibrate withthe same frequency.
D. All particles betweenX and Yon the stting vioraf:e with the same amplitude.
23. <JIKCE1997Paperll-24>
The vt"bratilig string also sets the neighbouring air into vibration. Which of the following statements about the waves on the
string and those in air must be correct ?
A. They are both stationary.
B. Theyhavethe same speed.
C. They have the same wavelength.
D. Theyhavethesamefrequency. 27. <HKCE1999Paperll-22>
24. < BKCE 1998 Paper Il - 27>

lm ------,-;
Direction l
ofvibra.tion
Vibrator Fixedend ::
to obtain the waves as
A series of straight water waves travels towards the right in a ripple. tank as shown above. In order
A vibrator generates a stationary wave on a string. The above diagram shows the string at the instant of maxim.um shown in the right hand side, what kinds of phenomenon have the straight waves undergone ?
displacement \Vbich of the following statements is incorrect ?
A. reflection only
A. Particles P and Q move with the same amplitude.
B. The motions of particles P and Qare in phase. B. refraction only
C. Particle Q is momentarily at rest at this instant C. diffraction only
D. The wavelength of the stationary wave is 0.4 m. D. refraction and diffraction only
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA2-M/08 DSE Pbysics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA2-M/09
28. <HKCE 1999 Paper Il- 23> 32. < HKCE2001 Paper Il- 25 >
A plane water wave travels from a de ep region to a shallow region of water. If the wavelength, frequency and speed of the
wave in the deep region are A1, Ji and vi respectively, while the corresponding values in the shallow region are ,t2 , fi. and
,�:.:.,
Vz respectively. Which of the following relations is/are correct?
(1) A1 > A2
(2)v1> V::!
(3) Ji > fi
A. (!) only In the above diagram, XYrepresents a boundary between a deep region and a shallow region of water ma ripple tank. A
B. ( 3) only series of straight water waves in the deep region travels towards XY. Wbicli of the following diagrams best shows the wave
C. ( 1) & (2) only pattern in the shallow region ?
D. (2) & (3) only A. B.
29. < HKCE 2000 Paper D - 26 >

A water wave of frequency 30 Hz travels in a deep region of water. '\Vhen the wave enters a shallow region, its wavelength is
reduced to one-third of its original value. Find the frequency ofthe waterwave in the shallow region,
A 30Hz
B. 60Hz
C. 90Hz
D. It cannot be determined since the speed of the water wave is not given.
C. D.
30. < BI{CE 2000 Paper II - 27 >
p t Q
A straight pulse PQ travels: towards a V-shaped barrier in a ripple tank as shown above. Which of the following diagrams
best shows the reflected pulse(s) ? 33. <HKCE2002Paperll-24>
A. B. In a ripple tank experiment, a series of water waver travels towards a barrier. Which of the following quantities would
�-// remain unchanged after the waves are reflected by the barrier ?
"°'
(1 ) wavelength
� (2) frequency
� (3) speed
(
A. ! ) & (2) on ly
B. (1) & (3) only
C. D. C. (2) & (3) only
D. (!), (2) & (3)
34. < 8KCE2002 Paper II- 26>

Rippletimk
S},Qngy lining
31. < HKCE 2001 Paper Il - 26 >
Water waves of wavelength A, are diffracted as they pass through a
gap of width d as shown in the figure above. Which of the
following changes would produce the most significant diffraction Plane water waves
-
A.
'
remains unchanged
d
halved
OpeJJing
Which ofthefollowingphenomena would be observed when the water waves pass through the opening in the above set-up?
A. reflection
B. remains unchanged doubled B. refraction
C. halved halved C. diffraction
D. halved doubled D. interference
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA2-M/10 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA2-M/11
35. < HK.CE2003 Paper II- 27 > 37. <HKCE2004Paperil-23>
/ obstacle
--.
Plane water waves travels towards an L-shaped barrier in a ripple tank as shown above. Which of the following diagrams
best shows the reflected wave pattern ?
l]] ripple tank
A a '--------"-----�
A student uses the above set-up to study the diffraction of water waves. Vlhich of the following changes can make the
diffraction effect more significant?
(1) reducing the width of the gap between the obstacles
(2) increasing the frequency of the viOrator
(3) adding more water to the ripple tank
A (1) only
B. (2) only
C. (1) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) on ly
c. D.
38. <HKCE 2004 Paper 11-25 >
Two dippers S1 and Sl are cowiected to the same vtlxator and produce identical waves in a ripple tank. Pis a point such that
S1P - SiP= ,t, where ,l is the wavelength of the water waves generated. Which of the following statements is/are correct ?
(1) Constructive interference occurs at P.
36. < HKCE 2003 Paper 11- 28 >
(2) A crest is always formed at P.
Obstacle (3) If the wavelength of the waves generated by the dippers is doubled, destructive interferen ce will occur at P.
A. (1) only
B. (2) only
C. (1) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) only
39. < HKCE2004 Paper Il- 21 >

Doop Sh,llow
region region --- --• equilibrium position
Q
p
Plane water waves travel from a deep region to a shallow region of water through a narrow gap as shown above. Which of
the following properties of the waves remains unchanged? The figure shows the waveform ofa transverse stationary wave at a certain instant. Ifparticle Pis at its lowest position at this
instant, what will be the instantaneous motion of particles P and Q after a quarter of a period 'l
"""
A direction of travel
p Q
B.
A. moving upwards at rest
C. wavele ngth B. moving upwards moving upwards
D. frequency C. at rest at rest
D. at rest moving upwards
DSE Physics - Secti.on C : M.C. PC-WA2-M/12 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA2-M/13
I
WA2 : Wave Phenomena WA2: Wave Phenomena
40. < HKCE2005 Paper II. 36 >
43. <1IKCE2006Paperll-15>
An interference pattern is formed by two coherent point sources of water waves. Which of the following variations can
change the positions of constructive interference ?
(1) changing the amplitude of the waves
medium.A
(2) changing the wavelength of the waves
(3) changing the separation between the point sources
A. (!) & (2) only
mediumB
B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only
D. (!), (2) & (3)
A series of plane waves travel from medium A into medium B. The figure above shows the positions, PQ and P'Q', of�
41. < BKCE 2005 Paper II - 14 >
wavefront before and after entering the medium.B. What woold happen to the speed and the wavelength of the wave when it
'travels from medium A to medium.B?
Speed Wavelength
/
A. increases increases
B. increases remains unchanged
C. decreases decreases
D. decreases remains unchanged
Straight water waves travel towards a barrier as shown above. Which of the following diagrams best shows the reflected 44. < BKCE2007 Paper n -16 >
wave pattern? light source
l
A B.
Light trwels from air to water through a slit as shown above. Which of the properties of the light in water remain(s)
unchanged?
(I) direction oftravel
(2) speed
(3) frequency
C. D. A (1) only
B. (3) only
C. (!) & (2) only
D. (2) & (l) only
45. <BKCE 2009 Paper 11-14>
� direction of wave propagation
42. < BKCE 2005 Paper II - 15 >

- - - =---- - - ---- -:
oo,k
--;�- --,:�-�-:-: --�:- ---- -,:��------- ----

A cork floats in water and a dropper is used to produce circular waves
as shown in the diagram. Vlhich of the following describes the motion \ckopp«
of the cork when the waves pass through it? -
A. moves towards the dropper 0
0 A cork is floating on a calm water surface as shown in the above figure. At time t = 0, a "'.3-ter wave is travelling towards the
co� with a speed of0.2 m s·1• When will the corlc rise to its highest position for the first time?
--- ---'-----------'1-------------
B. moves away from the dropper
C. Vibrates vertically about its original position A 3.00 s
B. 3.50 s
D. moves away from the dropper and vibrates vertically at the same .____ ___ ______ _____________________________ ____ ______ ___.._._-___
time C. 3.75 s
D. 4.00 s
WA2: Wave Phenomena WA2 : Wave Phenomena

46. < BKCE 2009 Paper ll - 38 >
s, s, Solid �es represent�· S1 and S2 are two narrow gaps

The figure above shows the wavefronts formed in a rip�le tank. statements tS correct?
The figure above shows the circu1at wavefronts produced by two identical dot vibrators, S1 and S2, in a ripple tank at time
allowing water waves to pass through and interfere. Which of the followmg
t = O. Solid lines represent crests. A cork is placed at point P on the water surface. Which of the following graphs best
A. Refraction occurs when.water waves pass through S1 and S2.
represents the variation of the displaceme:at s ofthe cork with time t'l (Take upward as the positive direction.) at the moment sbown above.
B. The displacementofthe water particles atP and Qare the same
A. s R
C. Constructive imerference occurs at Q.
D. The water particle atP is always at a crest.
ot-----------+
Part B : HKAL examination questions
50. <HKAL 1990 Paper I- 16 >

IV d,op p shallow
c. D.
Ot-----------+
towards the inte rface PQ betw� a shallow re�o� and a

The fi�e shows wave crests moving in the direction of the arrow one ofthe wave crests m the deep region .
h m· •"- fim=.
deep region ass own o.w, o--· Which of the lines shown may represent
47. <HKCE 2009 Paper II- 37>
A. I
A musical note is produced by a guitar string. 'Which of the following properties about the sound wave produced and the B. Il
wave in the string is/are the same? ,C. ill
(1) wavelength D. IV
(2) frequen cy
(3) wave speed
A. (!)only 51.
B. (2) only
C. (1) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) only
Two point sources S1 and S2 are producing cireularwaterwaves in
a ripple tank. The :6gw-e shows the wave pattern at a certain
instant. Solid lines repre sent crests and dotted lines represent
the frequencyf ofthe vi'brator. Wbich of the
troughs. Which ofthe following statements is/are correct? In the above figure, a stationary wave is set up on an elastic string by adjusting
(1) The water particle at A is always at rest. following statements is/are correct? . . .
of antmodes m the wave pattern mcreases.
(2) The water particle at B is always at a crest (1) If/increases so that another sta.tioruuywave is.set�• the number
(3) The interference at C is neither constructive nor (2) If/increases, the speed ofthe waves on the stnng mcmises . .
v.raves on the stnng.
destructive. (3) The waves produced in air by the strillg have the same speed as the
A. (1) only A. (!) only
C. (1) & (3) only c. (!) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only D. (2) & (3) only
PC-WA2-M/16 PC-WA2-M/17
1
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. 1
52. <BKAL 1996PaperllA-12> 56. <HKAI.2011) Paper llA-14 >

The waves from two coherent sources must have
(1) the same amplitude
(2) the samewavelengfu
(3) a constant phase relationship
A. (!) only
B . (3) only
s,
C. (!) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only
s,
53. <HKAL2001PaperllA-12>
In which of the following cases can the principle of superposition be applied to two overlapping waves of the same nature ?
(I) Two waves that have the san,.e amplitude.
(2) Two wave s that travel in opposite directions. Figure (a) Figert (h)
(3) Two waves that are coherent.
the same frequency. Figure (a) �ows the pa� of water
A. (I) & (2) only In a ripple tank, s1 and S2 are nvo coherent sources VI'brating with .
waves. Figure (b) shows the displacement-time gtaph of
B . (I) & (3) only waves at time t"" O. The solid lines represent the crests of the water
correct for the particle R at mid-way between. PQ as
•,�, •,�, c,)A:., •,�,

C. (2) & (3) only the particle P. Vilbich of the tollowing <lisplacement-fune graphs is
D. (!), (2) & (3) shown?
54. <HKAL2005 PaperllA -29 >
x
___J= -- y
57. < HKAL 2012 Paper lIA-15 >
ofthe same nature :
The principle ofsupruposition can be applied to two overlapPingwaves
(l) only if they have the same frequency.
Two identical transverse waves, travelling in opposite directions along stringXY fued at both ends, fonn a stationary wave . (2) only lf they have the same amplitude..
i
The separations between.Xand Y s 45 cm. Particle Pis an anti.node with an amplitude of 2 cm. The above figure shows the (3) onlylftheytravel in the Slime direction.
shape ofthe string at an instant when P is at its maximum displacen:ient from the equilibrium position. What is the amplitude A. (I) & (2) only
and the wavelength ofeach of the travelling waves on the string ? B. (I) & (3) onlY
C. (2) & (3) only
Amplitude Wavelength n: None of the above conditions is necessary.
A 1cm 30cm
B. 1cm 15cm
C. 2cm 30cm
D. 2cm 15cm
Part C : BKDSE examination questions
55. < BKAL 2009 Paper llA -15 >
58. · < Hl(DSE Sample Paper IA-19 >
The diagram shows the wavefronts of a wave passing the boundaty of
two different media. Which of the following combinations about the String XY is fixed at both ends. The distance between X and Y is
type of wave and the two media is/are possible? 45 cm. Two identical sinusoidal waves travel along..l'Y in opposite
directions and form a stationary wave with an antinode at p oint
...
typeofwave mediUIIll medium2 medium! P. The figure shows the.string when Pis 2 mm, its maximum
'"""
...
displacement, from the equilibrium position. What is the '21Dlplitude
(!) light waves
medium2 and wavdeogth of each of the travelling waves on the string ?
(2) sound vro.ves ware,
Amplitnde Wavelength
(3) waterwaves shallow water deep water
A. (I) only A. Imm 30cm
B. (3) only B. Imm !Som
c. (!) & (2) only c. 2mm 30 ""
D. & (3) only D. 2mm !Som
(2)
1 DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WA2-M/1'11
59. < BKI>SEPractice Paper IA -19 > )r.- <HKDSE2014PaperIA-16>

a gap in a sea
A stationary wave issetup along a string by a vibrator. The waveform The photograph shows a series of plane seawaves travelling through
waves remains
at a certain instant s
i shown. lfthe frequency of the vibrator is 50 Hz. wall which exhi.Oits diffraction. Assuroing that the frequency of the
vibrator "!
what si the wave speed along the strin g ? unchanged, which of the following will i ncrease the degree of diffraction
A. 15ms- 1 (1) Thegap in the sea wall becomes narrower.
B. 30ms""1 (2) The wavelength of the waves increases.
C. 4Sms-1 �) The amplitude ofthe waves becomes larger.
·n. SSm s-1 A. (!) & (2) only
wall B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only
60. < HKDSE 2012 Paper IA-18 > ··D. (!), (2) & (3)
01
63. < HKDSE 2014 Paper IA- 13 >
· Imm t� · _:rtI Uzf1 rl r-

A stationary wave is funned on stri ng fixed a t both endsX and Y. The above figure is a snapshot of the string at time t= O.
The amplitude of vibration at an an.tin.ode is A. If upward displacement is taken as positive, which of the following shows the
displacement-time graph ofpointPon the string for one period ?
displacement water falling in a ripple tank. The pulses are thenreflected
1I
The above figure shows two circular pulses produced by drops of
c
by a straight barrier. Whi h diagram bes t shows the r eflected pulses?
,B.
A
IfH]fflf-
C. D.
I
D.
c.
61. <BKDSE2013PaperIA-18>
p Q
t 64. <JJKD� 2015PaperlA-13 >

R Two waves p and Q travel in thesame direction and meet at a point displacement
Toe graph shows the variation of the displacetnent of each wave with
.
time at that poi nt. Which ofthe following statements 15/arecorrect? -,
A vibrator generates a stationazy wave on astring which is :fixed at one end. The figure shows the appearance of thestring at (1) P and Q have the same frequency. ,\ I
acertain instant Which of the following descriptions aboutthe motion of particles P, Q andR must becorrect? 7
(2) The oscillatio n due to Pis in anti-phase with that due to Q.
(1) P and Qare momentarily at rest at this instant..
(2) Q and R take the same timetoreach their respective equilibrium positions.
(3) The amplitude of the resultant wave at that point i s four 0 � "
times the amplitude of P.
(3) P andR are always in ant:iphase. '
A. (1) only · A. (1) only
c. (!) & (2) only C. (1) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only D. (2)&(3) only
65. <HKDSE 2015 Paper IA-18 >
68. <HKDSE2017PaperlA-16>
The figure shows plane water WKVCS travelling from region X to region Y. The wavelengths of the water waves in regions X
and Yare4 cmandS cm respectively.
Region% Region Y
A String is set to vibrate at .frequency /such that a standing wave is formed between two fixed supports X and Y as shown in
the above figure.
If the tension in the string is increased by adding wtight _gradually while the frequency is kept atf, which ofthe following is a
possible mode of vibration at a steady state ?
A.
B.
y Which of the followin.gstatemerrts is correct?
A. The speed of the water waves in region Xis higher than that in region Y.
C. B. Toe direction of travel of the water waves bends to"('ll'ds the normal as they ent ef region Y.
C. The frequency of the water waves is the same in botltregions.
D. If plane water waves of wavclengtb 5 cm travel from region Y to region x; the wavelength becomes 6 CJJl after the
D. waves enter region X:
1
, t 69. <HKDSE 2017 Paper IA-17>
In which of the following simauons MUST the direction of travel ofa wave change ?
66. <HKDSE 2016 Paper IA-16 > (1) when a wave is reflected by a barrier
=
- - - - -.-:=�:f=�==-- -.-:::::ff=:�-:---
The su:rfer in the figore reaches a crest at the moment shawn. {2) 'Ml.en a wave enters from one medium to another medium
The crests of the water wave are 20 m apart and the surfer
dirootion oftravel (3) when a wave travels through a gap smaller than its wavelength
descends a vertical distance of 4 m from a crest to a trough
in a time interval of2 s. What is the speed of the wave ? - --- A. (1) & (2) only
A. lms-1
B. 2ms-1
= B.
c.
(1) & (3) only
(2) & (3) o,tly
C. 5mS-1 D. (1), (2) & (3)
D. lOm s-1
70. <HKDSE2018PaperIA-16>
67. < HKDSE 2016 Paper IA - 18 >
Light undergoes diffi:action round an obstacle.
A string is tied to a vibrator while the other en dis :fixed to a wall A stationary wave is fon:ned as shown.
light------'>- uwidth
The angle of diffi::a,ction would increase ml.en

y
(1) the amplitude of the incident light is increased.
(2) the width. ofthe obstacle is increased.
Which statement is c0trect when the frequency of the vz'btator doubles? (3) the wavelength of the incident light is increased.
A. The wavelength. will double.
B. The wave speed will double. A. (2) only
C. The amplitude will be halved. B. (3) only
, • D. Particles X and Ywill beeome vtOlating in phase. C. (1) & (2) only
,;,. (1) & ( 3) only
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-W2-M/22
A
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC- WA2-MS / 01
, HKBAA'sMarltlng Scheme is PICParedfor 1he IWIIkcts' rcfcccnce. It should not be xe gamed as a set of model answers.
71. < HKDSE 2018 Paper lA - 18 >
m
! Students and teachem who aie not involved the IlUlrki:ng process are advised to inte:rp,ret the M.ai:king Scheme with care.
The figure shows a string with one end fixed and the other ead tied to a vforator A stationary wwe
. is funned as shown at a
certain. fre quency. M.C. Answers
'� 1. C 11. C 21. B 31. A 41. D

2. D 12. D 22. D 32. A 42. C
�m�Rsb
Ifthe speed ofthe wave along the string is 7 m s-1 , whatis the frequency of the wave ?
3. B 13. B 23. D 33. D 43. A
A. 2.8Hz 4. B 14. C 24. A 34. C 44. B
B. 7Hz
C. 17.5 Hz 5. D 15. A 25. D 35. D 45. C
D. 35Hz
6. D 16. A 26. A 36. D 46. D
7. D 17. A 27. D 37. C 47. B
72 . <HKDSE 2019 Paper IA-15>
8. D 18. B 28. C 38. C 48. A
9. B 19. C 29. A 39. A 49. C
10. B 20. B 30. D 40. C 50. C
51. A 61. D 71. C

52. D 62. A 72, A
53. D 63. B 7 .
54. A 64 . A 7 . A
55. C 65. D
56. C 66. C
57. D 67. D
58. A 68. C
7 • <HKDSE 2019 Pa per IA-16>

59. B 69. B
60. D 70. B
M.C. Solution
1. C
✓ (1) From deep to shallowwaterregion., the wavelength would decrease.
)< (2) The frequency would remain unchanged durin g refraction.
✓ (3) The veloci ty would decrease when water wave travels from deep to shallow w-ater region.
: 2. D
A= 0 1
. :x2 = 0.2m
A. 3
B. 4 V = f,t "' (50) (0.2) = 10 Ill s-l
C. 6
0. 7
7 • <HKDSE 2019 Paper IA-18>
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. Solution l'C-WA2-MS /02 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC- WA2-MS /03
WA2 : Wave Phenomena WA2: Wave Phenomena
3. B C
Distance between 2 adjacent nodes is equal to half of a wavelength. ✓ For the same medium, the same speed is unchanged.
(1)
.'. (4) X .': = (20) :. A.= 10cm Diffraction occurs when the wave passes through the slit and spreads out to give a change of direction.
2 (2)
:. v =f,1. = (5) (10) = SOcms-1 ✓ (3) Frequency is unchanged during diffraction.
4. B 12. D
-7
(1) San:ie medrom gives the same speed.
✓ (2) 'When the wave passes through nauow slit, diffi'action occurs, giving a change in wave pattern.
(3) Frequency is unchanged during diffraction.
B
Draw the dotted line that the incident pulse appears to be.
5. D
Then reflect the dotted line to give the reflected pulse. The reflected pulse should be at the right side oftbe barrier.
P is at the crest, thus P is momentarily at rest.
For a stationary wave, all particles within the same loop are in phase, thus A is also momentarily at rest.
13. B
All the figures in A, B, C give proper diffi::act.ion pattern.
6. D
However, since it is unifonn depth, there is no change in speed, thus no change in wavelength
Distance between the 11 crests = 10/1.
.-. B is correct since the wavelellgth. remains the same.
:. /1.= �:m
- 14. C
v = f A= (2 )x(0.2) = OA ms
1
10 10
Wavelcngth : A==20==5Clll
4
7. D Speed: V = jJ."" (50)(0.05) = 2.SmS-1
As the stationazy wave is at its maximum vi'bration,
each particle is at their extreme positions with maximum displacement, thus each particle is momentarily at rest. 15. A
6.=53-50=3cm
8. D For constructive interference to occur, 6. = n 'J,. where n = 0, 1, 2, ....
Frequency: no change in source ⇒ no change in frequency A If'),.= 1 cm, then A = 3 cm = 3 'J,,,, thus constructive interference occurs.
Wavelength : no change inmedium ⇒ no change in speed ⇒ no change in wavelength B. If'),.= 2 cm, then A = 3 cm = 1.5 'J,,,, thus destructive interference should Oct:Ur.
C. If'),.= 4 cm, then 6. = 3 cm = 0.75 'J,,,, thus neither constructive nor destructive interference occurs.
9. B D. If'),.= 6cm, then I:,. = 3 cm = 0.5 '),,,, thus destructiveinl:erl"erence should occur.
x, A= 1I,i - U = �,i :. No interference

4 4 16. A
y, /:J. = 1_!.il. -1]_1 = Oil Constructive interference A, B, C give proper diffraction pattern.
2 2 Afu:r the wave passes through the slit, it is a deep region, thus the wave speed increases, and the wavelength increases.
z, A=2A-Ll=Lt Constructive interference
17. A
10. B ✓ Path difference at any point on MN "" 0, tlms cons!Jllctive intetference occurs along MN.
(1)
For stationary wave, after ¾ period, the particles at antinodes will be at the equih"brium positions. Alternate constructive and destructive interference occurs alongPQ
(2)
Therefore, the waveform will become a horizontal line. (3) Crest and trough can both be formed at points of constructive interference.
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA2-MS/04 DSE Physics - Section C : M. C. Solution PC-WA2-MS/05
18. B 25 D
.
✓ (1) Bonding araund the comers is diffraction
✓ <,) No change in depth of water, thus no change in medium, giving no change in speed
✓ The increase of wavelength gives greater degr ee of diffraction

(3)
26. A
No changein medium, thus no change in speed and no change in wavelength.
!9. C
A. ParticleP v.ihtates vertically about ts equilibrium position only; at this iostant, P is momentarily at rest
i
Qis anode, thru, t is alway s at rest
B. i
✓ c. Risa node, thus it is always at rest
Shallow -> deep ⇒ speed inmases
D. P has the maximum amplitude while Q has zero amplitude
.
⇒ wavelen gth increases
⇒ imgle made with the boundazy increases

20. B
Tilting =::> at middle is the same depth but increasing depth to the right and decreasing depth to the left
27. D
⇒ increasing wave speedto the right and decreasing wave speed to the left
Wavelength.decreases⇒ speed decreases⇒ refraction.occurs
:::::> increasing wavelength to the right and decreasing wavelen gth to the left
The wave bends round corner :::> diffraction occurs
21. B
'
28. C
(1) Increase ofwidth gives smaller degree of diffraction.
Waterwavetravelsfasterindeepregion ⇒ vi >vz (2) is correct
' <,) Degree of diffraction is independent ofthe position of the source.
No change in source ⇒ J; ::. fz (3) is not correct
✓ In.crease of the wavelength gives greater degree of diffraction
(3) = (l) is con-ect
By v f/1. :::> A 1 >A2
22. D
29 . A
✓ A. The distance betweenX mui Y, i.e . distance between 2 nodes, is half of the wavelen gth
The change of medium results in refraction, but in refraction, th.eie is no change in frequen cy
✓ B. Alltheparticles within the same loop vibrate in pruse, thus vibrate in the same du"eci:i.on. Frequency remains the same of30 Hz
✓ C. All particles in the same wave vibrate with the same frequency .
' D. Differentparticles have different amplitudes in a stationary wave . 30. D
23. D
The wave on the string and the wave in airhave the same frequency as they come from the same source.
t
24. A
31. A
A. At this mslant, Pis the antinode which has the maximum amplitude . Q has smaller amplitude .
The most signi.ficant diffraction effect occurs when
✓ B. Particles in the same oop must move in the same phase
l © wavelength.is greater
✓ C. g is at maximum &placement and must be momentarily at rest
@ slit size is smaller
✓ D. Since distan.ce between2 nodes is half ofthe wavelength which is 0. 2 m : A= 0. 4m :. A is the best choice.
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. Solution PC-WA2-MS/06 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA2-MS I 07
32. A 40. C
Water wave in shallow region travels with a smaller speed, thus the v,,,avelength i s decrea;ed. (1) Changing the amplitude ofthe waves would not affect the positions of conttructive interference
Vii'hen entering the shallow region, it moves a shorter distance, thus bending occurs. ✓ (2) II. t ⇒ separation between two lin� of constructive interference t
✓ (3) Separation between the point sources -l, ⇒ separation between two lines of constructive interference t
33. D
✓ (1) By v ""j')... asvandfremainunchanged, A. is unchanged. 41. D
✓ (2) Frequency depends on source only, so it is unchanged.
✓ (3) Speed depends on medium only, so it is unchanged.
34. C
Diffraction occurs when water waves passes through a small opening.
35. D
During reflection, incident angle = reflected angle
Note that both the incident angle and the reflected angle equal 60 °.
42. C
Since water wave is a transverse wave,
Consider the direction of travel oftbe wave, the wave reflects two times and travels backwards. the co:rk would oscillate vertically up and down about its original position.
36. D 43. A
• A During diffraction through the nan-ow slit,
As shown in the above diagram. 0a > eA
the direction of travel changes from one direction to many direction by spreading out from the slit.
• B. The speed decreases when the water waves travel from deep region to shallow region.
During refraction : sin e oc v oc ,t. mediumA
• C. The vvavelengtb decreases when the water waves travel from deep region to shallow region. : . vs > VA and An > AA x·
P' \Jg,
✓ D. The frequency remain.s unchanged during diffraction and refraction. mediumB
�\Y'
Q'
37. C
✓ (1) A smaller gap can give greater degree of diffraction.
44. B
• (2) By increasing the frequency, the wavelength is decreased. Thus, the degree of diffraction is decreased.
(1) Direction of travel would change after diffraction from the slit.
✓ (3) By adding more water, depth is increased,. thus speed is increased, wavelength is then increased.
(2) Speed would change after refraction as the light travels from air to water.
Therefore, the degree of diffraction is increased.
✓ (3) Frequency depends on the source only, it remains unchanged during refraction and diffraction.
38. C
45. C
✓ (1) Since the path difference atP is equal to 1 t,,, constructive interference occurs at P.
• (2) At points of constructive interference, ctem: or trough 'f1lB'J form.
✓ (3) Ifthe wavelength is doubled, path difference: b = ½ (ZA,), thus d.ettructive interference occurs.
39. A
P is an antinode. After a quarter of a period, it is at the equi.h"briUlll. position. At that instant, it shm.tldmove upwards. Distancedbetweenthenearestcrestand thecork = 0.15+0.6 = 0.75m
Q is a node. It is always at rest. By d = Vt ... (0.75) - (0.2) t :. t = 3.75s

DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA2-MS/08 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA2-MS /09
WA2: Wave Phenomena WA2: Wave Phenomena
46. D I D
I 53. I
At the time instant shown, pointP is at the trou gh position of wave I and also trough position of wave 2.
Principle of Superposition can be applied to :
Thus it is at the lowest position.
all i,pes ofwaves wrth different :frequency, amplitude, directions and phas
Moreover, trough and trou gh give s constructive interference, thusP is at constructive interference.
54. A I
47. B
0) Amplitudeofeachtra:ve llin.gwave "' ½ A= 1 cm
As the wave speed depends on the medium, sound wave in air and the wave in the string should have different speeds.
(l) Wavelengthofeachtravellingwave "' 45x j = 30cm
As the two wave s come from the same source , they must have the same frequency.
By v = fJ, they must have different wavelength.
55. C
As the wavelength inmcditn:n l is longer, the wave in medium 1 has great er speed.
48. A
✓ light waves travel with greater speed in IU1' than in water
✓ (1) At A, crest meets trough to give destructive interfere.nee, thus th e p:micle there is always at rest.
• ✓ sound waves traVel with greater speed in water than in IU1'
•
(2) AtB, crest meets crest to give constructive interference, B then vibrates with the greatest amplitude .
However , B would be sometimes at the crest and sometin1es at the trough as it vibrates up and down. water waves travel with smaller speed in shallow water than in deep water
• (3) From the graph, S1 C = 125 A and S2 C = 2.25 A.

Path &:ffetence at C = 225 A - 1.25 A = l A. Thus C is at constructive interference. 56. C
p has crest on crest andR has trou gh on trough, both ofthem have coostruotive interference.
49. C At t "' O, dis placement ofR is negative since it is at the trough positiw.
• A When water wavespass through Si and S2, diffraction occurs .
• B. P is at the crest, with positive displacemen t; Q is at the U'OUgh, with negative displacement 57 D
✓ C. Q is at the position of trough on trough, thus give greater trough to have constructive interference. • (1) Two waves with different frequency can be supeiposed.
The path difference at Q = 3.5 A-2. 5 A = 1 A :. constrnctiveintetferenceoccurs atQ • Two waves with different amplitude can be supecpos ed.
•
(2)
D. At this instant, Pis at the cres t, but later the displacement ofPwould vary, it1t1ay be at the trough later. • (3) Two waves in opposite directions can be superposed.
The princ iple of superposition can be applied to any two waves of the same natw:e.
50. C
N ,hallow
-
p
Water wave in dee per region moves with a greater speed.
SB. A
:.vd>v,:::;-8,i>t?,
:. m is the possible wavefront
N is not correct
since the wavefront makes a refracted angle greater than 90°

with the boundary, which is impossible .
Q
(l) Amplitude
51. A
The stationary wave is formed by two travelling waves in opposite direction supexpose together.
✓ (1) ft⇒ A-i- ⇒ numberofloopslncreases ⇒ numberofantinodesonthestringt
• (2) Speed on the same medium is constant, not affected by the change of frequency .
The amplitude of each travelling wave should be 1 mm so that they add tog ether to give the antinode of2 mm.
• (3) The two waves are in different medium, they have different speed. @ Wavelength = 45 x ½ = 30 cm
52. D
• (1) Waves from two coherent sources ma y have simil;l.r amplitude , due to different path lengths .
59. B
✓ (2) Two coherent sources must have same frequency, thus same wavelength.
Wavelen gth: A = 90 x ½ = 60 cm = 0.6 m
✓ (3) Two coherent sources must have constant phase relationship. Speed : v "' Ji,. = (50) (0.6) = 30 m s-1
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA2-MS/ 10 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA2-MS ill
60. D 66. C
P is at the extreme point, that is, the crest of its oscillation at t = 0. /2 = 20m
From crest to trough, it is ½ cycle, thus it takes a time of ½ penod.
61. D
.-.tT=2s T = 4s
(!) P and Q may not reach the exb:emc positions, thus they may not be momentarily at rest
✓ (2) Q and R are in antiphase (opposite phase), they reach their own equilibriwn positions at the same time. Speed of the wave:
✓ (3) P andR are at adjacent loop, they must always be in antipbase. v=�=�=Sms-1
T 4
62. A
OR
✓ (!) Ifthe gap is narrower, the degree of diffraction will increase. f• 2_ • '- • 0.25Hz
T 4
✓ (2) As the wavelength of the waves increases, the degree of diffraction will increase. v =f/2= (025)(20) = Sm s-1
(3) The degree of diffra¢tion is not affected by the amplitude of the waves.
67. D
63. B A. "\Vb.en the frequency doubles, the wavelength should become halved.
The wave grows llll.til it is reflected by the walls. B. The wave speed is not affected by the frequency, thus it should be unchanged.
Use dotted line to show the incident pulse behind the walls. C. The amplitude is not affected by the frequency, thus it should be uncb3!1ged.
The reflection of the dotted pulse gives the reflected pulse. ✓ D. "\Vb.en frequency doubles, the wavelength becomes halved.
The number ofloops in the stationary wave changes from.4 loops to 8 loops.
Particle Xis 5th loop and particle Y is in the 7th loop, counted from the vi'brator.
'' Particles in these two loops are all vibrating in phase.
' 68. C
'
'' • A. During refraction, speed vis proportional to wavelength /4.
As the wavelength in Xis smaller, the speed of water wave inX should be smaller than that in Y.
• B As shown in the figure, the direction of travel in region Y should be bent away from the normal.
✓ C. The frequency of wave IIlUSt remain unchanged during refraction.
64. A
✓ As shown in the figure, the period T of the two waves are both 4 divisions,
• D The ratio ofwavelengths in the two regions should remain unchmged.
Thus, the ratio should be 4: 5, but not 5 : 6.
by / "" ,!_, they have the same frequencyf.
T
(2) WhenP is at the cre$t, Q is not at the trough, thus they are no in anti-phase. 69. B
✓ (!) When a wave is reflected, it direction must change.
(3) The amplitude ofP is 1 division and the .amplitude of Q is 3 divisions.
Since the two waves are not in phase, • (2) When a wave enters from one medium to anothermedi\llll, refraction occurs.
the amplitude of their resultant wave would not be the sum of their individual amplitudes, During refraction, the direction may not change if the angle of incidence is 0° along the normal.
thus the amplitude of their resultant wave would not be 4 divisions, that is, not 4times of that ofP. Thus, the direction may not change during re:frac:tion.
✓ (3) When a wave travels through a gap, diffraction occurs.
65. D The wave spreads out through the gap, thus the direction must change.
As the tension in the stting is increased, speed of the transverse wave along the string increases.
; 70. B
Since the frequency is unchanged,
• (!) Degree of diffraction is not affected by the amplitude ofthe wave.
by v = fA, the wavelength incteases.
• (2) To increase the degree of diffraction, width of obstacle should be decreased.
The only option that shows an increase of wavelength of standing wave is D. ✓ Longer wavelength gives greater degree of diffr:acti.on.
I (3)
PC-WA2-MS/12 PC-WAl-Q/01
1
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution DSE Physics - Section C : Question
71. C
Part A : HKCE examination questions
There arc S locps in the statiollal)'wave. The length of each loop is 0.5 A.
:. Sx0.54 = I I. < IIKCE 1979 Paper I� 6 >
:. A= OA m (a) What are the uses ofthe following parts of a ripple tank in wave expcriments ?
Byv=fA (i) a dot vibrator, (1 =<k)

(7) • J (0. 4)
:. f= 17.SHz
(ii) the shallow portion of the tank.
(iii) the spongy lining around the edges of the tmk (1 mark)
(b) In a ripple tank experiment, waves are generated by a straiglrt vtDrator as shown below.
refiecting bamer
,i
'�
'❖
shallow portion :i
•,<
,,
,;,.
sponge limllg edge

might vibrator
(i) In the above figure, sketch the wave pattern at the shallow portion of the tank.
(ii) What phenomena occur in the shallow portion of the tank ?

PC-WAJ-Q/02 PC-WA2-Q/03
1
DSE Physics - Section C : Question DSE Physics - Section C : Question
2. < HK.CE 1984 Paper I- 5 > 3. <BKCE1985Paperl-5>
In a ripple taDk. experiment, a generator produces a train of straight waves travelling towards a bani.er with tvlo narrow slits. In a ripple tank experiment, a train of water waves are produced by a straight vibrator of frequency 10 Hz. The train of waves
The distance between two successive wave crests is found to be 2 cm. goes from region A to another region B through a straight boundary PQ as shown in the figure below. The two regions are of
different depths. The distance betWeen two successive crests of the waves in region A is O.o3 m while that of the waves in the
(a) The ripple tank is illuminated by a stroboscope lamp. The wave motion appears to be stationary when the frequency of region Bis 0.02 m.
the stroboscope lamp is 10 Hz What is the speed of the train of waves ? (3 marks) p
(b )
region A regionB
(a) Describe briefly how to set up two regions of different depths in a ripple tank.
Two sources St and Sz vibrating in phase give out water waves. The above figure shows the pattern of water waves at a (b) Describe briefly bow to measure the distance between the crests of two successive v.ravefronts. (4marks)
certain instant.
(i) Explain why the energy of the water waves is at a maximum at points A and E and is at a minimum at points B
and.D. (4marks)
(c) Find the speeds of the trains of water waves in

(i) regionA, and
(ll) Since very little or no wave motion is seen at points B and D, a student concludes that energy disappears there. (U) regionB. (4nwks)
Explain briefly where the energy goes. (2 marks)
(d) Which of the regions, A orB, is deeper 7
(fu) Sketch the water level along the line XC at the above .instant. (2marks)
(e) If a barrier Xis now placed in position RS as shown in the figure, which wave pbenome11on would occur 7 Sketch the
wave pattern that you expect to observe. (2 marks)
(iv) How would the separation between A and C change if

(1) the frequency of the generator increases, and
(2) the separation betmen the two sources increases ? (2 """")

DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA2-Q/04 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA2-Q/05
4. < BKCE 1989 Paper I - 5 >
- 5. < HKCE 1990 Paper I - 5 >
A vertical vibrator generates waves on a string. It takes 0.25 s to produce a complete wave ofwavdength 0.8 m on the string.
1ttrcc{;=-,';";,J{
(a) Fmd the frequency and speed of the waves on the string. (3 m>ttks)
(b) The figure below shows the shape of the string at the :instant when the vibra.tcr has rnade one complete vibration.
A B
Im
B --,, Dkectmnofwavemotion
Direction A
t --------
A glass tank is filled with a liquid. A cork is placed at the mid-point of the tank as shown above. A vibrator Xis moving up C
and down at the surface producing straight waves.
Vib:tion
(a) Describe the motion of the cork. (! marl<)
vibrator D
1- 0.8tn �
(b) Suggest a Slmple method of measuring the wavelength of the wave using a stroboscope. (i) At the instant show.rt, which of the part:iclesA,B, _C, Dis/are
(3 marl<,)
(1) moving downwards,
(2) atrest?
(c) It takes 2 s for the waves generated by Xto reach the opposite end AD of the tank. During this tillle interval, the vibrator
makes 5 'up' and 'down'. Find (ii) Sketch the shape of the string aftet 0.125 s. In your figure show the positions. ofi:he perticlesA, B, CandD.
(,) the frequency, �----------------------- (4ma,-ks)
-,
( ii) the wavelength, and
(iii) the speed of the wave. (6marks)
(c) A certain pointP on the string is fixed to the wall so that a stationary wave is foIIIled The figUre below shows the string
at the instant of maximtun displacement
(d) If another vt"bratcrplaced at the opposite end AD is also moving in exactly the same way as X, what will be the change in
the amplitude of the movements of the cork? Explain briefly. (3 marks) ,�::.�.Jr"� vfbrator
(i) Describe the motion ofparticlesXand Yat this instant
(,) If the tank is tilted so that A is higher thanB and Xis moving as before, sketch a dwgram to show the wave form that
would be observed when viewed from the sideABCD. (n) Sketch the shape of the string after one quarter on a cycle. (4marl<s)
(2 marl<,)
(d) The vi1,rating string in (c) also sets the neighbouring 1lir VJ.orating. List two differences between the wa;ves in air and
those on the string. (.2 marks)
•- < HKCE 1994 Paper I· 5 > I
< HKCE 1996 Paper I� 4 >
Displacmnent/ cm 1. 7.
<:�-�,,
:?:::i�d
A train of straight waves is generated in a ripple tank The figure above shows the displacement-time graph of a cork placed - <-------
vflnto,
o. 6m - --- ->
- - --------------,
in the water. The waves take 0.5 s to ttavel a distance of 12 cm.
A tring is fixed at one end to a wall and a viDrator generates a stationary wave on the string. The distance between the
(a) Find the amplitude, frequency, speed and wavelength oftbe waves. (5 marks) . m. The figure above sbows the string at the instant oflllUimurn displacement
ibr:tor and the wall is 0 6
{a) Find the wavelength of the stationary wave. (1 nwk)
(b) Suggest one methodto prevent water waves from bouncing back at the edges ofthe tank. (2 marks)
{h) Describe the motion of particles P and Q at this instant. (2:marks}
(c) Abarrier with an opening is placed in the ripple tank and the waves travel towards it as shown in the figure below .
(c) In the below figure, l'.l'l3Ik in the positions of the nodes (labelled as N) and antinodes {labelled as A).
R.ippletank
Direction t
Vibrator of
villtation
----
Q
vibrator
0.6m -------->
(i) On the above figure , sketch the wave pattern fDr.med on the other side of the barrier. (2 """1<s)
(ll) Name this wave phenomenon. (1 m,,k) (d) The figure below shows the displacement~time graph of particle P.
Displacement
{d) The bacrierin (c) is replaced by onewithtwo smaller openings.
In the above figure, sketch the displacement-time graph of particle Q. (2ma<ks)
The vibrating string also sets the neighbouring air into vibration. State two differences between the waves on the string
i) The figure above shows the wave pattern at a certain instant. Among the 4 points A, B, C and D, state a point of (
( e) and those in air. (2 marks)
constructive interference and a point ofdestructive interference. {2 marks)
{ii) A student says that at a point ofcoru!nlctive interference, a crest is always formed. Is the student correct? Explain
briefly . (3 marks)
8. <HKCEI997Paperl-2> : 9. <BKCE2001Paperl-4>
) ))
s,.
•P
s,.
A dipper 81 is connected to a vi'brator and produces circular water waves in a ripple tank. A cork is placed at a point P on the
water surface as shown in the above figure.
Two dippers 81 and,S'i �te in phase producing identical circular water waves in a ripple tank The Figure above sh (a) Descnbe the motion of the cork as the water waves pass through it (l=k)
the �ve pattern. at a certaln inStant {Note : The dark lines represent er�.) The distance between Si and s2 is 0.06
and it rs .known that the water waves travel with a speed of 0.4 m s~l.
(a) Find the wavelength and frequency of the water waves. (3 maw)
(b) Suppose another dipper S2 is connected to the sam.e vibrator and produces identical water waves. It is known that
S1P= 6.0 cm, SiP=7.8 cm andthewavelengthofthewaterwaves is 1.2 cm.
{b) The ripple tank.has a spongy lining: at its edges. Explain the function of the spongy lining. c2 maw)
(i) Name the wave phenomenon that occurs when both dippers vibrate.
(c) P and Q are two points at the water surface as shown in the above F.igure. F"md the path difference at
(ii) How would the motion of the cork be affected? &plain }'Our answer. (3 maw)
(i) pointP, and
(ii) pointQ
from 81 and Ji , giving the answers in terms ofthewavelength ,l, ofthe water waves.
Hence state thefypes of interference occurring atP and Q.
IO. < BK.CE 2004 Paper I� 5 >
(d) How would the interference at Q be affected if the frequency of vibration of the two dippers js doubled ? Explain your
answer. (Note: You may assume that the speed of the water waves remains unchanged.) (3 marks)
Figure l
::::.:_:_::::.��-::amik
seabed
(e) If only 01:e dip�er is available, suggest a method of producing an interference pattern in the ripple tank. Illustrate your
answerwith a diagram.. Figure 1 above shows a sectional view of a beach. Two boats are loc ated at positions P and Q as shoMl., wherePQ "" 20 m.
(l marks) Straight water waves travel towards the beach. The waves take 4 s to travel from P to Q.
(a) Find the average speed of the waves bctweenP and Q. (2marks)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA2-Q /10 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC- WA2-Q I 11
10. (b) < BK.CE 2008 Paper I- 5 >
Figure 1 shows a plastic box floating on the water .surfuce of a pool which has a deep region and a shallow region. A boy
tries to get the box back. He throws a stone into the water to produce waves and he expects that the water waves will "push"
the box towards the poolside.
�;:,-,-
Figurtl
Q
.... -
..
�-'--------------'=
,.,
, ,,
wavefront,,,,,- ,./
/ path of stone
Figure 2 shows the view of the beach from. above. In Figure 2, draw the wave pattern observed when the waves travel
towards the beach. (2 marks) plastic box
/
/
(c) Name the wave phenomenon that occurs as the waves travel towards the beach. (1 mark)
11. < BKCE 2005 Paper I- 5 >

Figurel
vibrator (a) According to the direction ofD10tion of the water molecules, state the kind of wave produced on the water surface.
(l:znark)
....,.,.,
shallow region Q
deep region P deep region P shallow region Q (b) Explain whether the water waves can "push" the box to the poolside. c2mms)
Figure2
Figure 1 shows a ripple tank with a deep region P and a shallow region Q.
{a) Suppose that two obstacles are added in the ripple tank as shown in.Figure 1.
(i) Name two wave phenomena that may occur if water waves travel from P to Q. (2 marks)
\
poolside
(ii) Figure 2 shows the wave pattern obser,,ed when straight water waves are generated in P. Compare the wavelength
and speed of the waves travelling in Q with those inP. (2 nwks)
--�--------
(b)
vt'"brator
FigureZ
(c) Figure 2 shows a continuous water wave traveling towards the poolside. Deduce the relationship between the velocity of
Figure3
the water wave and the depth of water on the pool. Show your reasoning. (3 tna rks )
deep region P shallow region Q
Suggest one method of obtaining the wave pattem in Q as shown in Figure 3. ffiustrate your answer by completing
Figure 3. (2 mar.ks)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA2-Q/12 PC-WA2-Q/13
1
DSE Physics - Section C : Question
WA2 : Wave Phenomena WA.2: Wave Phenomena
13. <BKCE2009PaperI-10>
In a ripPle tank, initially five tiny plastic beads (P, Q, R, S, 1) float on the calm water surface. ! 14. < HKCE 2010 Paper 1-11 >
A vibrator begins to produce I
straight waves at time t= D. Figure I shows the positions of beads on the waves at t= 7 s. Figure Figure I s hows threepoints,A,B andX, inarippletaDk where AX= 15 cmandBX=25 CJll.
2 shows the displacement
time graph of S.
/::-
R
/-_; - Q s T ripple tank

-_ -:./ -
':<------- 9 cm A
Figure I
Figure 1
displacement/ cm A dipperplaced at A vi'brates andproduces circular water waves o��ve!ength 10 cm. Figure2 shows the displacement-time
graph for a waterparticle at X: (fake displacement upward as poSitive.)
Displacement / cm
0.4 '
:\:"I. '
0.2
Fignre2 0 Time/s
(a) (i) Find the wavelength. of the wave.

(I"""<)
Fi.gm:e2
(ii) Find the frequency of the wave. (a) (i) FindtheamplitudeofthewaterwaveatX

(2nwks)
(ti) Fmd the speed ofthe water wave. {3nwk)

(iii) Find the distance between the vi'brator and S.
(3 nwks)
(fu) Jn FigUre 3, sketch the wavefomi. along the straight line A..Z at time t = 0.2 s.
(rake displacement upward as positive.) (2nwks)
Displacement
(b) State the bead(s) that is/are moving
(i) in the same direction with Tat time t = 7 s,

1-----L---":-----!;--+Distance/ cm
0 5 IO 15
(A) (X)
(ii) in the opposite direction with Tat time t = 7 s.

Figure3
(b) Another dipper is now placed at B and always moves in the same direction as the dipper at A. Detetmine the type of
interference occurring atX (3 marks)
(c) In Figure I, sketch the wavefonn betweenPand Tata quarter of period after t= 7 s. Mark the position ofS.
(2marks)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA2-Q/14 l
!
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA2-Q 115
15. < HK.CE 2011 Paper I- 3 > Part B : HKDSE examination questions
Read the following passage about tsunamis and answer the questions that follow.
,'----------------------- -------------------- --------------------------------------------------''

16. < HKDSE Practice Paper IB- 5 >
(a) Two rectangular barriers are put into a ripple tank. A viDrator vibrating at 25 Hz produces water waves with straight
:' Tsunami
' ''
! wavefronts. The wavelength of the water waves is 0.8 cm. Circular wavefronts are observed after the water waves pass
through the opening between the two barriers. Figure (a) shows the top view ofthe set-up.
l: When earthquakes occur under the sea, the water above is vertically displaced and waves are formed as water
attempts to regain. equib:brium. When large areas of sea floor rise or sink, a tsunami can be produced. Other than
!
:
:' earthquakes, landslides and undersea volcanic eruptions can also cause tsunamis. :
' ''
I�))
i Tsm:iamis are different from wind-generated waves. Wmd-generated waves we usually see at beaches may have a 1
/ wavelength of 150 m and a period of about 10 s. A tsunami, however, can have a wavelength exceeding 100 km : Figure(a)
-
''
: and a period ofa few hours. :'
'
As a result of their long wavelengths, tsunamis behave as shallow-water waves. Shallow-water waves move at a
/iJ
) : I,.,
speed given by the equation v =
) [ vib-
''
: where gis the acceleration due to gravity and dis water depth.
''
/
i Tsunamis can travel great distances with limited energy losses. As tsunamis leave the deep water of the open sea \ straight wavefronts opening
: and approach the coast, their wave speed decreases but their height grows. Tsunamis may reach a height onshore :
: above sea level of20 m or more and cause serious destruction. :
: --------------- ---------------- ------ ----------------- ------------------------- ----------- --: (i) Name the wave phenomenon that takes place when the water waves pass through the opening. (1 mark)
(a) Name two natural phenomena that can cause tsunamis. (2marks)
(ii) Calculate the speed of the water waves in the ripple tank.
{b) The typical water depth is about 4000 min the Pacific Ocean. Estimate the speed ofa tsunami generated there.
(1 mark)
(ii() If the experiment is repeated using a higher vibrator frequency, descn"be the changes, if any, in the wave pattern
shown in Figure (a). (2 marks)
(c) As shown in the map in the figure below, an undersea earthquake occurs at Sand produces tsunamis. Both islands Q
and R are struck by the tsunamis.
l
(b) Figure (b) shows three points, P, Q andR, ina ripple tank such that PR= 8 cm and QR= 10 cm. A dipper is put atP to
produce circular water waves of wavelength 0.8 cm.
®
s p
lslandR
Island Q
Figure(b)
(i) Although islandR is sheltered from S by island Q, why is it still struck by the tsunamis ? (1 mark)
(it) When the undersea earthquake occurs, a ship is at point P which is in the open sea deep water area as shown in the
above figure. On receiving the tsunami waming, the captain of the ship decides to stay at P rather than going back Another identical dipper, vi'brating in phase with the one at P, is later put at Q. Explain the change, if any, in the
to island Q. Refetring to the given passage, comment on whether the captain's decision is correct or not. amplitude ofthe water wave at R. (3 ma rks)
(2 marks)
17. <RKDSE2012PaperIB-6>
WA2 : Wave Phenomena
PC-W
A2-Q/16
I 17
.
PC-
WA2
-Q
/ 17
I
(b) Figure (b) shows the profile of the water level along line£ at a certain instant Sketch on the same figure the p rofile at a
In a ripple tank, circular water waves are produced by two vibrators S 1 and Sz of the same fre quency vibrating in phase. i time Tlater, where Tis the period ofthe water waves.
½ (1 mark)
Their separation is 3.5 ..t, where A is the wavelength of the waves.
water level
Figure (a) shows the two circular waves pro pagating on the water surface at a certaln moment
Line Lis a line connecting all points P which have path difference S1 P- S2 P = O.
Figure (b) ->-- -+--+-+--<-�- undisturbed water level
(c) Q is a p oint on the line joining S1 and 82 as shown in Figure (a). State the kind of interference that occurs at Q and give
a reason for this occurrence. (2 marks)
Trough
18. <HKDSE2017Pap erIB-6>

(a) A dip per vibrating with a frequency of 5 Hz is put in a water tank. Figure 1 shows the displacement-distance graph of
the water wave at time t=O. Yis a particle in the water tank.
Figure (a) dis placement

direction oftravcl
-· 1
(i) Deten:rrine the wave speed ofthe water wave. (2 marks)
(ii) State the direction of motion of particle Yat t = 0. (1 mark)

(a) (i) Draw and label a line in Figure (a) connecting all points P which have path difference
(label it as L 1)
(iii) Sketch the displacement-time gra ph of particle Ybetween t= 0 and t= 0.4 sin Figure 2. (2 m,xk,)
displacement
(ii) What would happen to Li and L2 if the separation between S1 and Sz is reduced slightly ? (I mark)
-c,+---,---,---,---,---,---,---,--,----- ➔time Is
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
I DSE Physics - Section C : Question
WA2: Wave Phenomena
PC-WA2-Q/18
I DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solntion

PC-WA2-QS /01
BKEAA's Maiking Scheme is prepared for the :markers' :reference. It should not betegmde.d as a set of model answers.
r:.--- � ,
18. (b) In Figure 3, A and Bare two dippers vt"brating in phase in a water tank The distance between A and Bis 6 cm. OP is Stlidents and teacbtr.S' who are not involved in the marking process are advised to intctprcttheMatkiog Sc:bemt with caie.
the perpendicular bisector of.AB. Q is a second minimum fromP, whereAQ- 12 cmand BQ = 15 cm.
Question Solution
' 12 cm --�-----::::7'1
/ '
'Q
, 1. (a) (i) To act as a point source for producing circu1a:r wavefront [!]
·- ,y;v - ;, -
---
(ii) To show the phenomenon of refraction. [!]
' '
(iii} To absorb the waves and prevent the rebounding of waves at the edges. [!]
((1r
F1g,m3
(b) ( i)
Bi
(i) Explain why a miDinnun occurs at Q. (2 marks)
< wavefronts closer together> [!]
< waves spread out> [!]
< circular wav efronts shown> [!]
(ii) Diffraction and refraction occurs [2]

(ii) Determine the wavelength of the water wave. (2 marlcs)
2. (a) f - lOHz [!]

11 =JA = I0x2 [!]
(fu) Sketch in Figure 4 how the AMPLITUDE of the water wave varies along the line OP. (1 mark)
=20cms""1 [!]
.
amplitude
(b) (i) AtA and E, constructive interference occurs [2]
AtB and.D, destructive interference occurs [2]
(h1 Energy goes to the points of constructive interference [2]

Flgure4 ' . dis1'nce
0 (in) [2]
p
(iv) (1) separation would decrease [!]

(2) separation would decrease [!]
3. (a) Place a transparent plastic sheet totally :immen;ed :in water to give a shallow region [2]
(b) Freeze the wave pattern using a stroboscope [!]

Place a metre rule closed to the ripple tank. [l]
The position of2 successive crests is marked on the metre rule. [!]
The length between the two marks is the wavelength. [!]
there is question in next page
19. <HKDSE 2019 Ppaper-IB-5>
S. A ripple tank has a .shallow region P and a deep region g. Straight wHter wave of fteqnettcy' 10 Hz fa
travelling in the shallow region as shown in Figure S .l when viewed from above.
shallow region P
6an
direction f
++-ii>- Top view
Figure 5.l
(a) The separation between seven crests .in the sbillow region is fouad to be 6 cm as shown.
(i) Find the wa;vele.ng:tb. ofthe wave in the shallow region. (! mark)
(ii) What is the wave speed 1n the shallow region ?

(b) The wat:r wave then propagates into tml deep region where the wa.vel�ngtb of the wave is double that in
the shallow region.
(I) St3te the fregu.ency ofthe water wave in the deep region. (!mark)
(il) On Figure S.J, skercii Ill• wave pattern in !he deep region. (2 ma.ks)
(iii) Name the phenom.coon occurred across the boundary and e-xplain its cause. (2 marks)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAZ-QS I 02 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA2-QS/03
3. (c) (i) v =fit= lOx0.03 [l] 5. (a) Frequency= 4Hz [l]

0.3ms-1 [l] v=i=� =3.2ms-1 [2]
t 025
(ii) V 10 X 0.02 [l]
OR
0.2mS-1 [l]
v=JA= 4x0.8=3.2ms-1 [2]
(d) RegionA [l]
(b) (i) (1) A [l]
(e) Diffraction occurs [l]
(2) Band D [l]
(ii) D
[l]
C
< For wave form> [2]

< 0.5 mark for each particle> [2]
4. (a) The cork moves up and down. [l] {,) (i) X and Y are both at rest. [2]
(b) The wave motion can be frozen by viewing through a stroboscope. [l] (ii)
[2]
I
A metre rule is placed close to the tank. [l]
The wavelength is measured by marking the position of2 successive wave crests on the meter rule. [l] �
(c) (i) f = Z. [l] (d) Any TWO of the followings: [2]
= 2.5Hz [l]
* Waves in air are longitudinal waves but waves on string are transverse waves.
* Waves in air are travelling waves but waves on the string are stationary waves.
(ii)t.=.!. [l]
* Wa:ves in air and waves on string have different wavelengths (OR speeds).
= 0.2m [l]
{fu) v =/A=2.5x0.2 OR v = !.=.!. [l]

' 2 6. (a) Amplitude = 0.2 cm [l]
= 0.Sms-1 =O.Sms-1 [l] Frequency = ..!_ = 10 Hz [l]
10
(d) Since the path difference at the cork is zero, [l]
Speed = !!,_ = O.!Z = 0.24 m s-1 [l]
constructive interference oc(;UIS. [l] t 0.5
The cork will move up and down with greater amplitude. [l] Wavelength /1, = � = � [l]
f 10
(o) [2] = 0.024m [l]
(b) AnyONEofthefollowing: [2]

* Insert spongy plastic (cotton wool) around the edge of the tank.
* Use water tanks that have sloping edges.

DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA2-QS/04 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA2-QS/05
6. (o) (i) [2] 8. (c) (t) Path differenceatP = 2 A. [!]
Constructive interference occurs at P. [1]
(ii) Path difference at Q = l ½ ..:t [1]

:. Destructive interference occurs at Q. [!]
(d) Hthe frequency ofvi"bration is doubled, the wavelength ofthewater waves would become halved. [1]
The path difference at Q would then be equal. to 3 times the wavelength ofthe water waves, [1]
so the interference at Q becomes constructive. (1]
(ri) Diffraction. [!]
( e) Place a barrier with two small opemngli in front of the dipper. [1]
(d) (i) A (or C) is a point ofconstnwtive interl'erence. [!]
Dis a point of destr:uctive interference. ---e----a
[!]
[1]
(ii) No. [1]
A trough can also be fonned at points of constructive interference. [2]
9. (a) Thecorkwillmoveupanddown. [!]

7. (a) A = 0.4m [!]
(b) (i) It is called interference. [!]
(b) Both P and Q are at rest at this instant. [2]
(ri) PathdifferenceatP = S2P - S1P
(o) A A ""7.8-6.0 = I.8tm [1]
---------- --------- N ----------N [2]
= !fA [!]
A Since destructive interference occuni atP, the amplitude ofVI'bration would decrease (OR become zero). [IJ
(d) Disp!acemertt
< Q and P are in opposite phase> [!]
}C)CY ) Time < Amplitude of Q less than that ofP > [!] 10. ( a) V =-
=�
[!]
(e) AnyTWOofthefollowing: [2]

* Waves in air are travellingwaves but waves on string are stationarywaves
=5mS-1 [!]
(b)
* Waves in air are longitudinal waves but waves on string are transverse wave
* Waves in air and waves on string have <li.fferentwavelengtbs (or speeds)
J
8. (a) Wavelength = 0.02 m [1]
Frequency = 2'... = � = 20 Hz [2] ea

A 0.02
< wavelength shorter at right hand side > [1]
(b) To prevent waterwaves from bouncing back at the edges of the tank. [2]
< correct pattem > [1]
OR
To absorb the water waves. (2] (c) Refraction [1]
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA2-QS /06 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA2-QS/07
11. (a) (i) diffraction and [!] 14. (a) (i) Amplitude = 0.4 cm [!]
refraction [!]
(ii) T = 0.4 s
(il) wavelength in Q is smaller than that in P [!]
/°"- .!_ = 1.._ = 2.5Hz [!]
speed in Q is smaller than that in P [!] T 0.4
V = f;\, [l]
(b) Add an obstacle into the ripple tank. [!]
= (2.5)(0.1) = 0.25ms-1 <accept 25cms-1 > [!]
vibrator OR
V = d [!]
[!]
= -2:! [!]
0.4
deep region P shallow region Q = 0.25 I!ls""1 [!]
(iii) Displacement
12. (a) transverse wave [!]
(b) As the water wave travels to the pool deck, the water particles only move up and down. [!]
Therefore, the water wave cannot push the box to the pool deck. [!]
(c) The wavelength decreases as the wave travels to the shallow region. [!]
As the frequency remaiz:zs unchanged, [!]
the velocity of the water wave decreases as the depth decreases. [!] <zero displacementatA..X> [!]
< 1.5 waves drawn correctly> [!]
(b) Path difference = 25 - 15 [!]

13. (a) (i) /2 = _9_ = 4 cm [!]
2.25 =10cm=1� [!]
(ii) T= 7- 3=0.Ss [!]

Constructive interference occurs at X [!]
s
f= .!_ = l.25Hz [!]
T
\ 1s. (a) AnyTWOofthefollowings: (l+l]
(ill) V = jJ. = (1.25) (4) = 5 CID S-1 [!] * earthquakes
d =vt=(5)x(3) * landslides
*
[!]
._ 15cm [!] volcanic eruptions
(b) (Q Q [!] (b) v = fga = ..f9.81x4000 = 198ms-1 [!]

(it1 s [!]
(c) (i) The tsunamis undergo diffraction and get around island Q. [l]
(o) p R
(il.1 Any ONE of the following reason : [!]
* The height of the tsunami grows as it travels near to the coasl
T < correct waveform> [!]
* The height of the tsunami is small in open sea.
< correct position of S> [!]
* The tsunami may cause serious damage near the shore.
So, the captain's decision is correct. [!]
16. (a) (i) Diffraction
(ii) V = j,l = (25) X (0.8)

= 20 cms-1
[I)
[I)
[IJ
18. {a) (i) V = f J,,
, ..
= 20 cm s- 1 < accept 0.2 m s-1 >
[I]
[I]
(iii) The wavelength of the water wave decreases. [!) (ii) Yis moving upwards [I]
The degree of diffraction decreases. [I]
(ili) displacement
(b) PathdifferenceatR = 2.0cm = 2.5,t [!]
Destructive interference occurs at R. [I]
Amplitude of the water wave atR decreases when another dipper is placed at Q. [I]
17. (a) (i)
< Two waves drawn> [!]

< All the shapes are correct> [!]
(b) (;) The water waves from A and B meeting at Qare in opposite Jitase. [1]
OR
[!)
The path difference at Q is equal to 1.5 ,t [!]
Thus, destructive inter&tence occurs to form a to.inimum. [IJ
(h) Path difference at Q = 1.5 A = 3 cm [1]

Wavelength : /4 = 2 cm [1]
(ili) amplitude
[1]
0 p
(ii) L1 and L;, will be :further away from L. [1] < a line (curve or stra ight line) gradually decreases in amplitude> [I]
(b) water level
[I]
(c) The path difference at Q is 3.5 A. ( QS1 =4 ,l and QS2 =7.5 A) [1]
Thus, destructive interference occurs at Q. [!]
(a) (l) 0.06
19. waveleogtb A=
7-1
•0.01 m(• l an) 1A
(ii) speed v-fl. • LO x 0.01

=0.1 ms-' (�_LOcm•-1) IWIA
(b) (i) lrequem:y- 10 & IA
(b) wHowRglonP deep ,ogian Q

6Qtt
(!ii) Ra£ractjon. lA
It is due to die cbanp, in. wavell!llglhs f-...... sp<iOds in !A
di11m:ntmedia/ dc,plbs.
2
Hong Kong Diploma of Secondary Education Examination DSE Physics - Secti.on C : M.C. PC-WA3-M/01
Physics - Compulsory part (!lb-{f--tl� ¾) WA3 : Reflection and Refraction of Light
Section A-Heat and Gases (#.i::ft>�fflt)
1. Temperature, Heat and Internal energy (ill.£ • #..:f<r P'1 fl!s)
2. Transfer Processes (#.#$.i&$1) Use the following data wherever necessary :
3. ChangeofState C*.@#.li!tl/l)
4. GeneralGasLaw (f-cl&.iUt'.it.¢) Speed of light in vacuum
5. Kinetic Theory (:SrCfiU7'ft)
Section B - Force and Motion U1� �t&)
1. Position an dMovement (1.tr.Jtifr,$1!1;) Part A : BKCE enmination questions
2. Newton'sLaws (4tlPt.fit)
3. Moment ofForce (:iJ#e..) I. < HKCE 1980 Paper TI- 16 >
4. Work,EnergyandPower(-/t,j; - �:il!:'f";</J$)
5. Momentum (�ii:)
6. ProjectileMotion (!k!.illtl&:ili)
7. Circ ularMotion(!llJ��ilJ)
8. Gravitation ( �J jJ)
Section C- Wave Motion (iltf0)
L WavePropagation (i$..#J.#li!!)
2. WavePhenomena(i$..1Ji;JJ1.�)
3. Reflection andRefractionofLight(.it,#J.5lM-5UJrM)
4. Le nses (i!.tt:) A light ray passes through a spherical air bubble in water. Which of the following represents the pathofthe emergent ray ?
5. Wave Nature ofLight (Jeiroit�!/.H1.) A, p
6. Sound(�¾)
B. Q
Section D - Electricity and Magnetism ( 'll!;::ft>--ii)
1. Electrostatics (i1f ii!>�) C. R
2. ElectricCircuits(1!t4) D. S
3. DomesticEel ctricity(*/b.lli�)
4. MagneticField(.i;t�)
5. Electromagnetic Induction ('tZit�.&i,) 2. < HKCE 1980 Paper TI· 28 >
6. Alternating Current ( �))jj_ 1lt)
A fixed object is placed in front ofa plane mirror. Ifthe mirror is moved 0.10 m away from the fixedobject, how far will the
Section E-Radioactivity and Nuclear Energy (ti:tMJJl..t..:fu*-t.�t) image move?
1. Ra diation and Radioactivity(-MM,ft,tt.M-!J!.&) A o.05m
2. AtomicModel(�T:titt!)
3. NuclearEnergy(#ills) B. 0.10m
C. 0.20m
Physics - Elective part (Jl!if<f! �'-) D. 0.40m
Elective 1 -Astronomy and Space Science (�5C.4':-:ful1c*#�)
1. The universe seen in different scales (.:f lliJ �r.'HU't""f flJ �ii i!Q,tt) 3. < HKCE 1980 Paper n - 17 >
2. Astronomythroughhistory(��*Al.l!.)
3. Orbital motions under gravity(ilih""f�$).,t�ffi) V/henlight enters from one medium into another, which of the following will be changed?
4. Stars and the universe (1.f!l:f,,�';li) (I) The frequency of the light
Elective 2-Atomic World (.ffi: "T''l!t-�) (2) Thewavelengthof the light
1. Rutherford's atomic model C.z.tll'filtf."T'fU�) (3) The vdocityofthe light
2. Photoelectriceffect (;t.'lltilt.11)
3. Bohr's atomic model ofhydrogen {1.!t./:il �U-'f--fl:r.!) A. (!) only
4. Particlesor waves (.1·.,it-:;.,.11.it.) B. {3)only
C. (!) & (2) only
5. Probing into nanoscale <ni-i:it#i*i!t".ff..)
D. (2) & (3) only
Elective 3 -Energy and Use ofEnergy (AE.:i::fullsi,ffi.�1.t/ff)
L Electricity at home (�,Ul 'If!:)
2. Energyefficiencyin building (�?MMtaf.!li-$-) 4. < HK.CE 1980 Paper 11- 18 >
3. Energyefficiency in transportation (�4t'IPS �i!ltiltlf) A poi nt light source is placed in a liquid. Rays from the source leave the liqui d �: through� circular area of diameter
4. Nonfirenewableenergysources (.:f";J".i!j-1",J'tiJl<) 24 cm. The refractive index of the liquid is 1.25. Thedepthof the sourcebelowthe liquid surface ts
5. Renewable energy sources (-I".i!j.1",ilti!lt) A. 9cm
Elective 4 - Medical Physics ( Y.!¥=4h1£$) B. 15 cm
1. Maki ng senseof the eye (!!RIIS� 'g') C. 16cm
2. Makingsenseoftheear(.JFIJS�"g) D. 18 cm
3. Medical imaging using non�ionizing a r diation ( �f 11!:it;Jt� lrl" �*:W�$)
4. Medical imaging using ionizing radiation (i[f;m/!#,JJt.lJ},!J!,�1!P:,!J,)
WA3 : Reflection and Refraction of Light WA3 : Reflection and Refraction of Light
<BKCE 1982 Paper n- 21 >
p ,. < BKCE 1985 Paper Il -18 >
A ray oflightl passes from a liquid L into air makes an angle of In the diagram shown, a light ray passes from medium Y to
incidence of42°. Ifthe refractive index ofthe liquidL is 135, Q medium X and emerges to medium Y again_ The refractive
the most probable emergent ray oflight is index of medium Xis smaller than that of medium Y. y
A. p R Which of the following represents the path ofthe emergent
B. Q liquid ,ay? X
C. R A. p
D. S B. Q
I
s C. R
y
D. S
6. < HKCE 1983 Paper Il-18 >
Which ofthe following statements about the properties oflight is/are correct? 10. <BKCE 1987 Paper 11-18>
(1) The speed oflight in vacuum is independent of its wavelength.
(2) The wavelength oflight will change when it enters a less dense medium. A ray oflight passes :from air into a glass block Which ofthe fullowing :ray diagrams is/are correct ?
(Given that the critical angle of glass is 42°.)
w �···· w
(3) The frequency oflight will change when it enters a less dense medium.
A. (1) only
(3)
L$._- -·
B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only
"60°
7. < HKCE 1983 Paper ll - 16 > 60• 60°

p
A. (2) only B. (3) only C. (2) & (3) only D. (1). (2) & (3)
Q
11. <HKCE 1988 Paper II-·19 >

Which of the following best descn"bes a ray oflight travelling from water to air?
.
-----+.==-----
B ili
A ,i, i
w
water
In the diagram, PQR represents the path of a ray oflight incident on a semi-citcular glass slab. Q is the centre of the slab.
Which of the directions W, .x; Yor Z correctly indicates the subsequent path ofthe refracted ray ?
A. w
B. X
C. y C. D.
D. Z
"'
8. < HK.CE 1984 Paper II -19 >
•P
•Q 12. < HK.CE 1992 Paper n- 16 >

The refractive indices ofwater and glass are l.33 and 1.5 respedively. In which of the following cases will total internal
reflection occur ?
•s (1) (2) (3)
inci<ientray incidont:ray incident ray
�
wator wat,;
As shown in the diagram, the apparent position of the aeroplane seen by the diver at the bottom ofthe small pond is at
A. p
B. Q � �
"' � gw
C. R
D. S A. (2) only B. (1) & (3) only C. (2) & (3) only D. (1). (2) & (3)
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WA3-M/04 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA3-M/05
13. < HKCE 1993 Paper Il - 11 > 18. <BKCE1996Paperll-14>
.:JI\ 1)/_.
Which o f th e following phenomena is/are caused by refraction oflight? A ray of red light travels in air and strikes a triangular glass prism at an angle ofincidence 45°. The critical angle of red light
(1) A swimming pool appears shal lower than it really is. for the glass is 42°. Whichof the following diagrams best shows the pathof the ray?
(2) A metre rul e appears b ent when dipped in water. A. B. C. D.
(3) A spectrum is formed when white light passes through a prism.
A. (3) only ,; ,,.� ,; : ,,,,./\
B. (!) & (2) only
C. (2) & (3) only
D. (!), (2) & (3)
� � � �
14. < HKCE 1993 Paper ll - 13 >
19. < BKCE 1997 Paper ll-15 >
The diagram shows a light ray travel ling from liquid to air.
Find the refractive indexof the liquid. Which of the following phenomena involve{s) total internal reflection of light?
A. 0.71 Arr (1) The sparkling ofadiamond.
B. 1.33 (2) Theformationofamirage.
Liquid (3) A ruler appearing bent when dipped in water.
C. 1.41
D. 1.50 A. (2) only
B. (!) & (2) on ly
C. (!) & (3) only
15. < HKCE 1994 Paper n -13 > D. (!), (2) & (3)
Whichof the following devices involve(s) tot.al internal reflection of light as they work?
(1) Optical fibres 20. < HKCE 1998 Paper Il- 18 >
(2) A prismatic periscope Which of the following phenomena is/are caused by the refraction of light ?
(3) A plane mirror (1) Ifa man who is spear-fishing aims his spear at where the fish appears to be, he 'Will miss it
A. (2) only (2) A spectrum is formed when white l ight passes through a prism.
B. (I) & (2) only
(3) A light ray is transmitted through a curved glass fibre .
C. {1) & (3) only
·�
A. (I) only
D. (!), (2) & (3)
B. (I) & (2) only
"6
C. (2) & (3) only
16. < HKCE 1994 Paper 11-14 > D. (!), (2) & (3)
A ray of light travels in air and strikes a semi-circular glass block at an angle of incidence 42°. The critical angle of the glass
is 42°. Which of the follo'w:ing diagrams best shows the subsequent path(s) ofthe ray? 21. < BKCE 1998 Paper Il - 16>
Gli!Ssblock
�--+--
·�
�---�
6
Aircavity
A beam consistingof red and violet light travels in a glass block with an air cavity. The cavity is in 1he shape of a prism as
c. shown above, Which ofthefollowingdiagrams best shows the subsequent pathof the beam?
A B.
�-----,
"'
"'
violet
17. < HK.CE1996 Paper II-17 >

A rayoflight travelling in air enters a semi-circular glass block as shown. Different values C. D.
,.,
of the angle of incidence6 and the correspon ding values of the an gle of refraction (jl are violet
measured. Which ofthe belo w expressions represents the refractive index of the glass?
A. the slope of the graphofsin6 against sin (jl
B. the sl ope of the graphofsin qi against sin 6
C. the slope ofthe graph of6 against qi
D. the sl ope ofthe graph of$ against 6
""
violet
22. <BKCE1999Paperll-13> 25. < HKCE2002 Paper Il -14 >
r 1]----·�·t��
A ray of light travels in air and strikes a rectangular glass block at an angle of incidence 50°. The critical angle of the glass is A ray oflight travels in air and strikes a glass block as shown above. Which oftbe following diagraJns best shows the path of
the ray?
A R
C. D. c. D.
23. < HKCE 2000 Paper II - 18 > 26, < BKCE 2003 Paper ll-13 >
�!Obj,ot.
� � Ob,.,,,,,•,,y,
A student uses two triangular prisms to construct a periscope as shown above. Which of the following shows the image of the A ray oflight travels in air and strikes a glass prism as shown above. Which ofthe following diagrams best shows the path of
object as seen by the observer? the ray?
A B.
t
A R Q D
Q D.
A ray oflight enters a glass prism and travels along the path as shown above. Find the refractive index of the glass.
A. 1.07
B. 1.37
c. 1.47
D. 1.50
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAJ-M/08 DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WAJ-M/09
27. < HKCE 2004 Paper II - 14 > 31. <HKCE2006Paperll-32>
A light ray enters nonnally from the air into a right-angled prism and
is totally intemally reflected at face .AB as shown below. Based on this A
optical phenomenon, 'MU.ch of the following is/are the possible value(s)
45 °
for the refractive index of the material of the prism?
(!) 1.3 5
(2) 1.45
(3) 1.55
A (I) only CL..--4-----'B
B. (3) only
c. (!) & (2) only
The photograph shows the image ofa tree fonned by the surface of a pool ofcalm water. Which of the following phenomena D. (2) & (3) only
explains the formation ofthe image ?
A. reflection
B. total internal reflection 32. < HKCE 2007 Paper II-11 >
C. refraction
I
D. diffraction plane p Q
mirro,
28. <HKCE2004Paperll-l3> R s
i, '
M""""
•
Eri
c
eye '1_
2m Im
"
A pencil is placed in front of a vertical plane mirror as shown in the figure above . Which of the following shows the cottect
PEE& t
position of the image?
a � n
lijl�t
A
p�H;lit
Eric stands 1 min front of a plane mirror. Martha stands 2 m behind Eric as shown above. Find the distance between Eric
and the image of Martha formed by the mirror.
A 2m
PSiE=t
J:ftl±t
B. 3m
C. 4m
D. 6m Rttm3S R�S R�S
29. < HKCE 2005 Paper II-10 >

33. < HI(CE 2007 Paper ll • 35 >
John wants to estunate the speed of a cloud in the following experiment The cloud is moving horizontally at a height of
3000 m above the ground. He looks at the image of the cloud in a minor of 0.6 m wide placed on the horizontal ground
!,. 1.5 m below his eye level. He .finds that the image of the cloud takes 20 s to move across the mirror.
plane mirror __..-
The diagram shows the image of a clock formed in a plane mirror. What is the time displayed by the clock at this instant?
·---�-- <�-------------------
cloud '-�
A 3:58 3000m I
B. 4:02
c. 7:58 I.Sm
D. 8:02
mirror of0.6m wide
30. < HK.CE 2006 Paper JI -19>

Which ofthe following surfaces produce diffuse reflection when parallel light rays fall on them? Not drawn in scale
(1) a blackboard in the classroom
(2) a polished metal surface
(3) a page in this question book What is the approximate speed of the cloud?
A (!) & (2) only A. 0.03 m s-1
B. 0) & (3) only B. 0.06mc1
C. (2) & (3) only C. 60ms· 1
D. (!), (2 ) & (3) D. 150m:r1
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA3-M/10 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA3-M/ll
34. < HKCE 2007 Paper n - 13 > 37. <BKCE2008Paperll-17>
w A ray oflight is traveling from glass to air as shown in the figure.
Which of the follo�g ratios is the refractive index of glass?
A. sin0
lightray----'(��:t!�s+ ==-->-r sin¢ glus
<::: B. sin¢
sin0
0
z °
c. sin(90 -0)
sin(90° -¢)
Alight ray is incident from water onto an air bubble as shown above. Which light ray best represents the emergent ray?
A. w D. sin(90"-¢)
B. X sin.(90° -8)
C. y
D. Z
38. < HKCE2008 Paper 11 - 38 >
Which of following statements about total intemal. reflection is/are correct?
35. <BKCE 2007 Paper II� 14 > (1) The angle of incidence is less than the critical angle.
(2) Both reflected and refracted rays appear.
Figure (a) shows a light ray travelling from air into mediumX The angle of incidence is 50° and the angle of refraction is r. (3) The ray is travelling from an optically denser medium to an optically less dense medium.
Another light ray travelling from mediumXto air is shown in Figure (b). The angle of incidence is 35° and the angle of A. (1) only
refraction is also equal to r. What is angle r ? B. (3) only
'' '' c. (1) & (2) only
50°'
,.;,
': D. (2) & (3) only
1 39. <llKCE2008Papcrll-16> p
mediUtnX medirunX
!35 A light ray lltldergoes reflection and refraction at an air-glass boundary
'" as shown. PQ is perpendicular to RS. OX, OY and OZ are the pa.tbs of
the light rays. Wwch of the following deductions is/are correct ?
Figure (a) Figure(b) (1) OXisthepathoftheincidentray.
A. 26.1° (2) RS is the mI-glassbottndary.

B. 41.5° (3) The lightray travels :f:ronl glilss to arr.
C. 425° A. (1) only
D. 48.5° B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only Q
D. (2) & (3) only
36. < HK.CE 2008 Paper n � 13 >
wall p
40. < HKCE 2009 :Paper 11- 34 >
·I 'f 3m
lm
i r,m
4m
y z
X, Y and Z are three 45° - 90° - 45° ttiangular prisms made of different transparentmaterials. A ray incident normally at
one face is found to undergo refraction and reflection in each prism as shown in the figures above. Which of the following is
In the figure, a plan.e mirror MN ofheight his mounted inan adjustable vertical position on a vertical wall. Eis an observer's the correct order of the refractive indices of the prisms?
eye which is 1 m from the wall and 1.5 m above the ground. PQ is a vertical post of height 3 m and is 4 m behind the
observer. Looking into the mim:rr the observer can see the whole image of the post. Wbat is the minu:num value of h? A. X> Y> Z
A. O.Sm B. X>Z> Y
B. 0.6m
C. 1.Sm C. Y>Z>X
D. 2.0m D. Z> Y>X
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WA3-M/12 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA3-M/13
41. <BKCE2009Paperll-15>
46. < BK.CE 2011 Paper II- 14 >
x,\
vacuum �
\
bud
glass
Two coloured lights,X and Y, travel from vacuum to glass. They undergo refraction and travel along the same path in glass.
Which of the following descriptions about the two coloured lights is correct?
A. Glass has a greater refractive index for XandXtravels with the same speed as Yin vacuum.
B. Glass has a greater refractive index forXandXtravels slower than Yin vacuum. clear image
C. Glass has a smaller refractive index for XandXtravels with the same speed as Yin vacuum. ofthebird
D. Glass has a smaller refractive index for XandXtravels faster fuan. Yin vacuum.
42. <RKCE 2010 Paper II-13 >

A clear image ofa bird is formed by a calm water sur.tace as shown in the above figure. Which of the following statements
A student performs an experiment to find the refractive index of a material and the result is shown below. Which of the about the image is/are correct?
following set of data is likely to be wrong ?
(1) The imageisreal.
p Q R s (2) A clear image is formed as regular reflection occurs.
I Angle ofincidence 40° soo (3) Ifthe hlrd is closer to the water surface, the size of the image increases.
A. p
I Azlgle ofrefraction 22 ° A
B.
(I) only
(2) only
B. Q C. (I) & (3) only
C. R D. (2)& (3) only
D. S
47. < .HKCE 2011Paper II- 39 >
V
43. < HKCE 2010 Paper Il- 38 >
A ray of light enters a transparettt rectangular block from air and emerges. Which of the following ray diagrams is/are
A ray of light enters a transparent rectangular block and travels along the path
impossible ? The dotted lines represent nonnal to the surfaces..
as shO'Ml in the figure above. Find angle 0.
A. 33° (I) (2)
B. 57"
C. 59°
D. 75°
44. <HKCE 2011 Paper Il - 38 >

Telecommunication companies nowadays use optical fibres to transmit data. What are the advantages of using optical fibres
over copper wires in transmitting data ?
(1) Less data Joss in the transmission.
(2) Data can be transmitted at a higher rate.
(3) For the same data transmission rate, optical fibres take up less space.
A. (!)& (2) only (3)
B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only
D. (!), (2) & (3)
45. < HKCE 2011 Paper ll-15 >

When a light ray travels from.air to glass, which ofthe following descriptions about the changes of the speed, the frequency
and the wavelength of the ray is correct ?
Speed Frequency Wavelength
A. remains unchanged increases decreases A. (1) only
B.
C.
D.
"""°""
remains unchanged
increases
decreases
remains unchanged
remains unchanged
increases
decreases
increases
B.
C.
(3Jonly
(I) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only
Part B : BKAL examination questions 52. < HK.AL 2003 Paper IIA- 15 >
48. < HKAL 1994 Paper IlA - 15 >

The speed oflight in a transparent material is 1.6 x 1oa m s-1. Find the critical angle for that material.
A. 28.1 °
B. 32.2°
c. 41.8°
D. 48.0 °
total in.temal reflection at the

49. <llKAL 1995 PaperllA.-13 > X and y are two parallel boundaries separating media (1), (2) and (3). A light ray undergoes order.
descending
boundary X and then refracts at Y as shown. Arrange the speeds oflight in the three mediain
A. (1) > (2)>(3)
B. (I)> (3)>(2)
C. (2) > (3 )> (I)
X D. (3)>(1)>(2)
A beam of.light travels from amediumXto air. When the incident angle 0varies from 0° to 90°, the light intensity of the 53. <BKAL2006PaperllA;9>
_ _ statements is/are correct?
..refracted ray vanes as shown m the graph. What is the ratio of the speed oflight in air to that in medium X? The refractive indices of water and glass are 1.33 and 1.50 respectively. Which of the following
··A. 1:2 (1) Light travels fuster in water than :in glass.
B. 1: 3
c. 2: 1 (2) The frequency of light is reduced when it travels from water to glass.
D. 2:3 (3) Light bends away from the normal when it travels from water to glass.
SO. < HKAL1996 Paper 11A - 12> ( A. (I) only

B. (3) only
When a beam oflight travels from glass to air, the em.etgent light in air shows an increase in C. (1) & (2) only
(I) frequency. D. (2) & (3) only
(2) speed.
(3) wavelength.
54. < BK.AL 2007 Paper llA- 9 >
A. (1) onl y withln a circle of radius r.
B. (3) only A diver at a depth �f d below the water sutfi.ce looks up and finds that the sky appears to be
Which of the correctly gives the expressio n for the critical angle of water 7
'
C. (1)&(2)only
D. (2) & (3) only
A. tanc =
d
B. Sin C =
'
51. <HKAL 1997 Paper IIA-13 > d
m
t. "'" . d'
d
D. sine
'
=
55. < HKAL 2013 Paper llA- 15>

p atch of radius 1.7 mis
A light ray passes through three media ofrefractive indexes ni, n1 and 113 respectively as shown. The boundaries between the A point source of light is situated at the bottom of a swimming pool It is found that a cll"cular
three media are parallel. Which ofthe following relations for n1 ,n1 and 113 is correct? illuminated on the water �e. Find the depthofwater in the pool.
A. n1>m>nz Given: refractive index of water = 1.33
B. n3>nt>111 A. 12ro
C. n1>ni>n3 B. Um
D. nz>nt>1!3 .c. 1.4m
D. 1.5m
WA3 : Reflection and Refraction of Light
Part C : HKDSE examination questions

PC-WA3-M/16
I
59. <HKDSE 2013 Paper IA-20 >
PC-W
A3-M
/1 7 1 1
56. <HKDSE Sample Paper IA-15 >

A ray of light is travelling from a transparent medium X to air making
an angle of 40 ° with the boundary plane as shown. If the angle
I c,,"
between the refracted ray in air and the reflected ray in medium.Xis 70°, ,.,.. ·.. '{,.. air
fin..d the refractive index ofmediumX <"-<,,x,,{>,:,.-;\,\
sin40°
A.
sin30°
p lane mirror___... sin30
°
B.
sin40 °
The diagram shows the image ofa clock forn;;.ed in a plane minor. What is the time displayed by the sin60°
clock? C.
A. 3:58 sin50°
B. 4:02 sin SO"
C. 7:58 D.
sin60°
D. 8:02
60. <HKDSE 2013 Paper IA - 21 >

57. <HKDSEPracticePaperIA-20>
White light can be resolved into its component colours by using a glass prism. Which of the following statements is/are
correct?
(I) The refractive in.dices of glass for different component colours are not the same.
mediuml (2) Red light travels fuster than violet light in avacuum.
(3) The frequencies ofall the component colours are reduced when entering the prism.
medium2
A. (1) onl y
B. (3) only
medium3 C. (!) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only
As shown in the figuze, a ray oflight travels from medium 1 to medium 2, and then enters
medium 3. The boundaries are
parallel to each other. Arrange the speed of light, c, in the three media in ascending order.
61. < BKDSE 2014 Paper IA - 15 >
A. CJ<ct<c1
B. c;<c1<ct
C. ct<es<c1
D. ct<ci<c;
II
58. < HKDSE 2012 Paper IA-17>

m
The figure shows the path of a light ray trav�lling from medium I to m edium m separated by parallel boundaries.
. Arrange in ascending order the speed of light in the respective media.
A. l<ID<II
B. II<ID<I
c;:. ill<I�Il
D� ID<Il<I
air mediumX I air 62. < BKl>SE 2016 Paper IA- 20 >
A certain monochromatic light passes through mediumXas shown above. What is the refractive Ab� ofwhite light is· separated into different colours after entering a glass prism because lights of different colours
index ofmediumX?
�A. 1.25 A. are diffracted to different extents by the prism.
ND u, B. �dergo total internal reflection at-different angles illside the prism.
C. 1.50
C .. · travel at different speeds in vacuum.
D. 1.65
D. travel at different speeds in glass.
PC-WA3-M/18 E ysics - Section PC-WA3-MS/01
WA3 : Reflection and Refraction of Light WA3 : Reflection and Refraction ofLlght
63. < HKDSE 2016 Paper JA-17 >

A parallel-sided glass sheet sep.arates water_ from air. A ray of light in �ter_ --------------------------
is incident at an angle 0 on the 'glass sheet and :finally emerges into air alorig M.C. Answers
�t�=�=�=�=�= �:�=�{!f=Y§
the glass•air interface as shown. Find B.
Given: refractive index of water is 1.33. 1. A 11. C 21. D 31. D 41. A
A. 412" 12. A 22. D 32. D 42. B
2. C
B. 48.8" 33. C 43. A
3. D 13. D 23. A
C. 53.1"
A 14. C 24. C 34. A 44. D
D. It �ends on the refractive index of glass. 4.
5. B 15. B 25. D 35. B 45. C
64. < HKDSE 2018 Paper IA-17 > 46. B
6. C 16. D 26. D 36. A
hl the figure �ove, XO_is a light �y incident on the glass.-air_boundary
27. A 37. D 47. B
p�e PQ. Which oftbe following gives �e refractive index of glass? 7. B 17. A
A. - sin S6
°
18. D 28. C 38. B 48. B
'
8. A
-
sin 44� 9. C 19. B 29. A 39. B 49. C
B.
20. B 30. B 40. B 50. D
JO. C
c. sin 56°
D. sin 46" 51. B 61. C

52. B 62. D
53. A 63. B
6S. < HKDSE 2018 P3per IA - 20 >
The figure shows the image seen when a plane mirro� is placed in front of a cardbo!l.l'd with a �sign on its �nt surface. 54. A 64. D
55. D 65. D
56. A 66. B
57. D 67. C
58. B 68. A
baek of Ci!Tdbaard 59. C

plane mirror 60. A
Which diagram below shows 1he design on the cardboard 'I

A. B. 'M.C. Solution
A
Normal is the line passing through the contact point and the centre of sphere.
=> the UPfer light ray is correct
From water to air: denser medium to less dense medium ⇒ bend a�y from nonnal
From air to water less dense medium to denser medium => bend towards normal ::::> ray Pis correct
C. D.
= Objee;t distance increases by 0.10 m and im age distance increases�y 0.10 m

2.
Mirror is moved o.10 m away
⇒ Distance between obj�t and image increases by 0.20 m
⇒ 1mas�·lll:OVeS by 0.20 Dl (for a :fixed object)
66• <HKDSE 2019 Paper IA-17> 6S. <HKDSE 2020 Paper IA-16>
Which graph below correctly shows the

A tr.mm,rse wave propaga!OS along a sttcn:hed suing.
variation ofthe speed vofthewave with its li-cqucncy/?
B.
A V
V
o l--------1
C. D. V
V
o L-----/
OJL._____
J
Monochromatic light traveJs With the same in(:ident angle .from media
% and Yrespectively to another
medium z as shown.
The tom:sponding "1'racted ray,

in Z m aJcc angl<s a and ft
a> fJ). Which medium, Xor Y, has respectively with the bounda,y plane
• - refraclive index ? I (with
travel - ? n which medium, xor Y, does light
medium with a
medJu1n fn which
greater refractive lndtt light travels faster
A. X
B.
C.
D. X
y
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA3-MS/02 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA3-MS/03
3. D
10. C
• (1) Frequency remam.8 unchanged during the refraction ofligbt from one medium into another. • angle between incident ray and normal "' 48° :. i > C
(1)
✓ (2) Wavelength lllUSt change during the refraction. ⇒ total internal reflection occurs :. no refracted ray
✓ (3) Since velocity depends on mediwn, velocity must change when light travels from one medium to another. Incident angle: i = 45 ° :. i > => total internal reflection occurs
✓ (2) c
✓ (3) Incident angle: i == 60 ° :. i > c ⇒ total internal reflection occurs

4. A
. 1 12on
smc = -- ;. C '= 53.1 ° 11. C
1.25
• A refracted angle * reflected angle
""(53.1 � = ¥ :. d,a,:9cm • There must be a reflected ray.
B
✓ c. incident angle = reflected angle and refracted ray bends away from no.r.ttial
5. B
• D There exists no top left light ray.
sine = _l_ .-. c = 48°

1.35 12. A
i = 42" ⇒ i < c •·. total internal reflection does not occur

• (1) Glass is a optically dense medium than air, thus total intemal reflection would never occur.
✓ From water to air, light travels from denser to less dense medium..
Liquid➔ air ⇒ denser medium to less dense medium ⇒ light ray bends away from nor.ma! (2)
For water, sin c"" _ l_, critical angle c = 48.8°, thus, i > c, total internal reflection occum.
:. Ray Q is the correct emergent light ray under refraction 1.33
• (3) Glass is a denser medium than water as its refractive index. is greater,
6. C thus total internal reflection would never occur.
✓ (1) The speed of light in vacuum is a Ulli.versal constant, not affected by any factors.
✓ (2) When light enters a less dense medium, e.g. from glass to air, the wavelength must increase. 13. D
• (3) Frequency must be unchanged when light enters a less dense medium.
✓ (1) due to refraction of light ray from water to air bends away from normal
✓ (2) due to refraction oflight ray from water to air bends away from normal
7. B ✓ (3) due to refraction of different colours oflight having different refractive index in glass
Incident ray passes through centre of circle incident ray lies on the nonnal
⇒ i=O" .·. r=0° 14. C
⇒ emerged ray does not change direction from glass 1D air = sin0.i, = �° = 1.41
n sin t;6 sin 30
8. A
15. B
The observer is in water
✓ (1) Optical fibres make use of total internal.reflection for trattsmission of signal without loss of energy
apparent height of the aeroplane is greater than the real height due to refraction
✓ (Z) A prismatic periscope uses two prisms to reflect light.
image of aeroplane should be above the object, thus it appears at the positionP
light rays under total internal reflection so that no multiple images are formed
9. C
• (3) Plane :mirror :makes use of reflection, but not total internal reflection.
From Y to X: optical denser medium to less dense medium

16. D
⇒ bend away from normal => the right ray is correct
From air to glass ⇒ from less dense medium to denser medium
FromX to Y: optical less dense medium to denser xnediwn ⇒ refracted ray bends towards the normal
⇒ bend towards nonnal ⇒ ray R is correct
Some ofthe incident ray undergoes reflection to give the-reflected ray
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA3-MS/05
17. A 24.
sin9a1r sin0 Angle b� edge of the glass block and incident light = 47°
n=: =
sin9...-, sinip .·. i = 90°-47 °= 43 °
is the critical angle of glass
As the emergent angle is 90°, the incident angle 43
°
:. slope ofthe graph of sin 9 against Sll1 qi = refractive index of the glass n
1
n=--=L47
18. D sin43 °
Air➔ glass: less dense to denser⇒ bend towards ncnnal ⇒ either A or Dis correct
25 .
GJass➔air: denser to less dense⇒ bend a111(ayfrmnnonna1 ⇒Dis correct
air - glass, more optically denser, the ray will bend tow'ZJds nOl'llllil.
gl.;!ss - air, optically less dense, the ray will bend away from normal
t
19. B
✓ (1) Diamond cutting ntakes use of total intemal reflection to give sp-;11'.kling effect
26. D
✓ (2) Mirage occurs when light in 3:ll' undergoing total internal reflection.
,
X
(3) The ruler that seems bent involves refraction only
.
.
20 . B
'
When light travels from.air into glass, it bends towards the non:nal.
✓ (1) Due to refraction of light, the actual pasition of the fish is different from the image of the fish
When light travels from glass to air, it bends away from the noonal.
✓ (2) Different colours oflight undergo different degree of refraction to give the spectrum
X A glass fibre makes use of total internal. reflection to transmit the light ray .
(3) 27.
The pool of calm water acts as a plane mirror to giVC the image.
21. D
Direction of travel 28.

Images of Martha and Eric are at the same distance behind the miIIOr as the objects.
(1) Enterintoaircavity ⇒ denser➔lessdense ⇒ bendsawayfromnormal
Thus, image ofMartha is at 3 m behind the min:or.
(2) Leave the air cavity ⇒ less dense➔ denser ⇒ bends towards the normal
DistancebetweenEricandimageofMartha = 1 +3 = 4m
In addition, red light should have the least deviation.
29. A
22. D
Air➔ glass : The Ii�t bends towaids the nonnal.
Glass ➔ air : The light bends away from nOIJI1al.
image object
·c,: objoct
23. A
Since the image formed by a plane mirror is late,:ally inverted, the object should be as shown in the figure.
Tims the actual time is 3:58.
r===== ================== === -.

30. B
✓ The blackboard has rOUgb. sw:face and thus gives diffuse reflection.
(1)
Image Observer's eye
y X
A polished metal SJlrPl,ce has very smooth surface and thus gives regul� reflection, not diffuse reflection.
(2)
As sh.own inthe :figure, the image observed by the eye is inverted. The paper surface of a page in this book is rough and thus gives diffuse reflection.
✓ (3)
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. Solu1ion PC-WA3-MS/07
31. D 35 .
Sincethe incident angle is 45°, as total internal reflection oceun, the incident angle must be greater than the critical angle,
:. i > C ;_ 45° > C C < 45°
By sin c = .!.n , critical angle ofdifferentmateriB1s can be found. :. r = 41.5 °
(I) Arefractive index of 135 gives a critical angle of 47.8° , that is greater than 45°_
✓ 36. A
(2) Arefractive index of 1.45 gives a critical angle of 43. 6°, that is smaller than 45°. p
✓ (3) A refractive index. of 1.55 gives a .critical angle of 40 .2° , that is smaller than 45".
32. D 3m
plano p Q
mirror
R s Q
4m
Consider the image at the same distance behind the mirror.
The image height is 3 m and the iznage distance is 5 m.
The image formedby a plane minoris virtual, erect and same size. By similar triangles, � = _l_ h = O. Sm.
3 1+5
33. C
d
Byuse ofthe two similar triangles, 37. D
°
3001.5 sin0m sin(9O -?)
d
n := =
0.6 = 15 sin061on sin(9O° -0)
3000m
:. d = 1200.6 .,. 1200 m
l.Sm
38. B
Speed ofthe cloud:
3001.Sm The angle of incidence should be greater 1han the critical angle for total internal reflection to occur.
(1)
V ""!!.."" �::: 6Qro,s-
l
No refracted ray appears iftotal internal reflection occurs.
c::::::,
20 (2)
im,g, ofthed
�✓//'
·'
✓ Total internal. reflection occurs only if the ray travels from an optically denser rnedi\lD:l
d (3)
to an optically less dense medium.
34. A 39. B p
(l) OZ should be the incident ray 'With incident angle
of30 ° . y
• (2) PQ should be the air�gla$s boundary.
so•
(3) The ligbt ray travels from glass to ajr as shown, R
OXis the refracted ray and OYis the reflected ray.
z
The lightbends away fromthe normal from water to air. glass
The light thenbends towards the nomial from airto water.
DSE Physics - Section C : M. C. Solution A
PC -W 3-MS/08 DSE Physics - Section C : MC. Solution PC-WA3-MS/09
40 B
. C
45.
InX, total internal reflection occurs at the incident angle of 45", thus i > c, the critical angle is less than 45° WMn light travels from air to glass, speed decreases, frequency� unchanged, and wavelength decreases .
In Y, total intenutlreflection does not occur at the incident angle of 45°, thus i < c, the critical angle is greater than 45"
InZ, total intetna1 reflectionjustoccurs at the incident angle of 45°, thus the critical angle is 45"
. 46. B
The critical im.gles are in the order of Y > Z > X
• (l)
The image is virtual since the calm water surf.lee acts as a plane ll'linor that can only give virtual :image.
By n - 1 I sin c the greater the critical angle, the smaller is the refractive index.
, If the water surface is calm, then regular teflecti.on occurs to give a clear image.
✓ (2)
Thus, the :refractive indices· are inthe order of X > Z > Y.
• (3)
The size of the izna.ge must be always same as the object, and is not affected by the object distance.
4 1. A
47. B
✓ This is possible as the critical angle is 50°, the refracted angle is 40 when light enters the bled..
°
(])
✓ This is possible as the refracted angle is 4S° when light enters the block,
(2)
the incident angle is also 45 when light leaves the block.
°
• (3)
This is impossible as the critical angle is 40°, but the refracted angle is 50 when light enters the block.
°
As shownin the figure both of the rays have the s�e refracted angle but the incident angle ofXis greater than that of Y.
,
By n - sin i I sin r greater incident angle i give s greater refractive index n, thusXhas greater refractive index in glass .
, 48. B
SincebothX and Yare electromagnetic waves they must have the same speed invacuum.
, (3xlo') n = I.875
n: 2'.!..
v. (l.6xl08)
42
. B
= 0 . 875) = -. l_ = 32.2"
p Q R s n
sine sm,
C
,.,,
sin i 0.342 0. 643 0. 866 0.985
0. 242 0 . 375 0. 616 0. 695

49. C
sini/sinr 1.41 1.71 1.41 1.42
Intensity ofrefracted beam drops to zero when 0= 30°, thus the critical angle c ""- 30°
In refraction, the ratio of sin iI sin r should be approximately constan.t.
1
Refraot.ivei:ndexofthemediumX: nx = -.-1- = - -- = 2
.
The data of Q gives a difletentr:atio thus it should be wrong. smc sm30"
,
Refractive index can be defined as the ratio of speed of light in air to that in the medium.
43. A
From the figure, critical angle cis 50°.
By n ac _l_ - _ l_ = 1.305
sine sin50° 40°
50. D
Whenlightray enters the b!o� from air
, Frequency:rernains uuchanged when ligb:.t travels from glass to air.
(])
incident angle is i and refracted angle is 40 ° .
✓ (2) Light travels with a greater speed in rul'.fuan in glass.
B y n ac
sini
:. (1305)
= sint
sinr sin40° ✓ Wavelength must increase \WlCil light travels from glass to air, as /4 cc v during refraction.
(3)
:. 0= 90° - 57° = 33°
SJ. B
44 . D
By nisin01 ::nisin02 =n3 sin0
✓
3
(]) Since total intenlal reflection occw;s along the optical fibre, less data is lostin transttrission.
1
✓ n oc - -
(2) Light waves can cany more data than radio waves, thus data can be transmitted at ahighen:ate.
sin0
✓ (3) Optical fibres are thinner than copperwires, thus they take up less space .
02 > 0i>0ic⇒ n3 > 11 i>n2
52. B
Since totalintemalrefl.ection occurs when light travels from (2) to (1), there 57. D
is no refraction in medium (1),
thus, sin 0i > 1. During refraction, speed v oc sin 0
As0i<(A<0;
From the figure, 0,; > 0i medium 1
c2<c1<c,
.-. sin 0i > sin 0,; > sin 0z
OR medium2
A:svocsin0
;. Vt > "3 > l'2 By nisin01 = n;sin0i = msin0,;
medium3
Asfh.<Bi.<0;
53. A Thus, nz > ni > n3
✓ Since the speed of light in medium: c oc cz<ci<c;

(1) Since v oc .!. , water has smaller refractive index, thus speed oflight in water is faster. n
n
(2) When light travels from one medium to another mediulll during refraction. frequency is unchanged.
58. B
(3) Since sin0 o::: .!. , glass has greater refractive index, thus angle ofrefraction in glass is smaller, Wavelength in air = 4units
Wavelength in themediumX = 3 units
light shouldbend towards the normal from water to glass.
Refractive index : n = A.i, = ± = 133
54. A Ax 3
59. C
Incidentangleintbe mediumX = 90° -40° = 50°
By Law of reflection, reflected angle = incident angle
This is the fish.eye's view, which is a daily life examples of total intemaI reflection. Reflected angle in roediumX = 50°
The semi�vertical angle is the critical angle.
Refractedangleinair = 180 ° -70° -50° = 60°
Thus, tan c = !... . Refractive index of mcdiumX :
sin0.ir = �
n=
sin0x sin5O°
55. D
sine=.!..= _l _ :. C = 48.8°
n 1.33 60. A
✓ (1) Different colours of light have different speeds in glass,
tanc = !.. .-. tan48.8° = (l.?) d= 1.5m thus the:refractive indices of glass for different colours are different
d
(2) In vacuum, all colours travel with the same speed.
56. A (3) The freq_uencies remain \lilChanged during the refraction when light travels from air to glass.
61. C
In the graph, draw the normal lines. I
Make down the angles as shown..
image object From the graph, Il
Since the image fon:ned by a plane mirror is erect but laterally inverted, the object should be as shown in the figure. �<0i<&
Thus the actual time is 3:58.

As sinBocv m
;. V3 < VJ < V'/;
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. Solution PC-WA3-MS/12 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA3-Q/Ol
62, D
Different coloUIS have different speeds in glass, Use the following data wherever necessary:
thus different colours have different refractive index in glass Speed of light in vacuum
and undergo different degrees ofrefraction
to split (disperse) into a visible light spectrum.
63, B J. < HKCE 1988 Paper I 6 > w
By nw sin 8.., = ng sin 81 - n. sin S..
(133) sin 8 = (1) sin90" < refractive index of air is equal to 1 >
0 = 48.8"
64. D
The :figure above shows a ray of light entering a semi-circular plastic block in direction AO and is-refracted into the air along
Refractivemdex: OE, Part of the light is then reflected along OB. A set of readings for different angles Band ¢ are measured. The results are
tabulated as follows
sin{90"-44° ) sin46°
sin(90" -56° ) =� B 10• 15° 20• 2 5' 30•
¢ 16.1 ° 24.50 33.2° 425° 53.1"

65, D
Since the image formed by a plane mirror must be erect and laterally inverted, (a) (i) Plot the graph of sin ¢ (vertical axis) against si.n B(borizontal axis) on a piece of graph paper using a scale of 1 cm
to 0.05. (5 marks)
the object should be the one shown in option D.
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA3-Q /02 PC-WA3-Q I 03
1. (•) (;,) Find the slope of the graph and state its physical meaning.
(3 marks) 2- (d) What happens if the ray reaches C with llil angle of incidence greater than 39° 'I (1 matk}
(iii) Calculate the critical angle of the plastic. (e) A periscope consists oftwo right-angled prisms.
(2m,,ks)
(i) Draw a ray diagram to show how the periscope works.
(b) Briefly describe the change in brightness of

the refracted ray OE and
(ilJ the reflected ray OB, as angle 0is gradually increased from °
0 to nearly 90°.
(3 m,,ks)
(ii) State one advantage ofusingright•angledprisms over plane mirrots. (1 mark)

(c) Descnl,e briefly ONE application of total internal reflection in everyday life.
(2 marks)
3. < HKCE 1993 l'aper 1- 3 >

2- < l:IKCE 1991 Paper I- 3 > Thm glass fibres can be used as a light guide.
(3 marks)
Ac_,,/
(a) Explain, with the aid ofa diagram. bow a light ray is transttritted along a curved glass fibre.
A
•::v\
(b) State one application oflight guides. (1 mark}
The figure above shows a ray ofred light entering a semi-cir
cular glass block in the direction AC. The angle of incidenc
C is 30°. The critical angle of red light for the glass block e at
is 39".
(a) How would the frequency, wavelength and speed ofthe ray be
affected when it enters the glass block? (3 marks)
4. <HKCE 1993 J>aperl-3 >

A
(b) 'When the ray reaches C, it splits into two. On the above figure, sketch the
two rays.
(3 m,,ks)
(,) c,Jou!,t,
(i ) the refractive index of the glass block, and
(2m,,ks) A flight travelling in the direction AO in air enters a semi-circular glass block as shown in the figure abov':. The ray is
re:?ct:d along OB in the g1asS block. Different values of� angl� of incidence e are used and the corresponding values of
the angle of refraction� are measured. The following result is obtained:
(il) the angle of refraction of the ray on leaving the glass block.
(2m,,ks) 1 5• 20° 25° 30° 35 ° 40'
9.0° 12.9° 16S 19.QO 22.3� 25.1 °

(a) Using a scale of 1 cm to 0.05, plot the graph of sin
0 (vertical axis) against sin� (horizontal axis) on graph paper.
5. <HKCE1995Paperl-3>
r--
(5 =rl<s) A boy 1.5 m tall stands a few metres in front of a plane mirror--!1J which is hung on a vertical walL!f1�
.,, e ---,--,---,---r ---r---,-------,
boy's eyes are L4 m
above the ground. He can see all ofhimself in the mil:ror. In F1gwe 1, PQ represents the boy andE is his eyes.
Figure 1
Figure2
(a) State three properties of the boy's iniage as formed by the mirror.
(b) Find the slope ofthe graph and state its physical meruring. (b) InFigurel,draw
(1) tbeimageoftheboyfonned bythe:mhror,
(2) the paths of two rays, one from P and one from Q, to show how the rays reach his eyes.
(c) Using (b), or otherwise, :find the minimum length of the mirror AB for the boy to see all ofhimself
(c) A student predicts that total intero.al reflection will
occur when e =45c. Is he right or wrong ? Explain briefly.
(3 marks)
(d) Tfthe boy moves a few steps towards the miitor and the length of the mirror is equal to that found in part (c), can the boy
still see all ofbimself in the mirror ? In Figure 2, draw a ray diagram to illustrate your answer. (3 marks)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA3-Q/07
(5 marks)
6. < HK.CE 1995 Paper I- 5 > 7. (a) (ii) Using a scale ofl cm to 0.1, plot a graph of sin 8 against sin� on graph paper.
-
Diver's eye
3m
A diver stays at a depth of 3 m under water in a lake. When the diver looks upwards, the scene above the water surface is
compressed into a circular patch of radius r at the water $Url'ace as shown in the above figure. The refractive index ofwater is
133.
(a) Calculate
(i) the critical angle ofth.ewater,
{ii) the radius r. (2marks)
(3 marl<,)
(iliJ Using the graph in (ii), find the critical angle of the glass.
(b) A fishcanan stands beside the lake as shown in the above figure. Can the diver see the :fisberma.ri ? Draw a ray diagram
in the above figure to illustrate your answer. (2 marks)
(iv) If the glass block is replaced with a Perspex block with a smaller refractive index, on the same graph in (ii), draw
the graph of sin a against sin 4> you expect to obtain. (2 marks)
7. < HKCE 2001 Paper I- 7 >
(a) (b) Given that the refractive index of diamond is 2.4 and the refractive index ofglass is about 1.6, explain why a diamond
sparkles D10re than a piece of glass of similar shape.
[Hint: You may consider the paths ofrays entering the diamond and the glass from the top (see Figure 2).]
A ray of light travelling in air in the direction PO enters a semi"¢irlmlar glass block as shown in Figure 1 above. The ray
travels along the llirection OQ inside the block. Different values of the angle of incidence a and the corresponding
values ofq>. the angle between OQ and the normal. are measured. The following results are obtained: (3 marks)
0 0 15° 30• 45° 60°
I 0 9.50 19.0 °
27.0° 34.QO
(i) Name the wave phenomenon shown in the above figure.

8. < HKCE 2002 Paper I-1 > 10. <HKCE2003Paperl-2>

(a) A plane mirror can be used as a rear-view driving mirror. State one advantage and one disadvantage of using the plane (a) A rayoflight travels from water to air with an angle ofincidence 30°. The refractive index of water is 1.33.
mirror as a driving mirror. (2 marks)
(i) Find the angle ofrefraction ofthe ray in air.
(b)
(ii) Find the critical angle ofwater.

The Figure above shows an ambulance. Explam why the word AMBULANCE is printed in the form as shown in the
:figur_e. (2 marks)
9. < HKCE 2002 Paper I-1 >
ray- (b)
The figure above shows the structure ofpart of a pair ofbinocular.,, which consists oftvvo triangular prisms.
(a) In the figure below, complete the path of the ray. (1 mmk)
ray--+
(b) Give one advantage of using triangular pr.isms over plane .mirrors :in making bin�.
Peter places a coin in an empty cup. As shown in the above Figure, he cannot see the coin. After pouring some water
into the cup, he finds that be can see the coin without changing the position of the cup or his eyes. In the above Figure,
draw a ray diagram to illustrate how Peter can see the coin. (2 madcs)
W.A3 : Reflection and Refraction of Light W.A3 : Reflection and Refraction of Light
11. < HKCE 2004 Paper I-1 >
U. <HKCEZOOSPaperI-10>
Optical fibres are widely used in telephone communication. The voice signals are transmitted in the form of light through
optical fibres.
(a) Figure 1 shows a light ray travelling towards an optical fibre.
(i) In Figure 1, sketch the subsequent path of the ray.
Figure 1 show a set-up used to study the relatiODShip between the angle of incidence a and the angle of refraction f3 of a ray
oflighttravelling from air into a semi-circular glass block. Figure 2 shows a graph of sin a against sin p. (ii) Name the wave phenomenon that occurs as the ray travels inside the fibre. (1 nuuk)
(b} State two advantages ofusing optical fibres over copper wires in telephone communication.
13. < BKCE 2007 Paper I - 5 >

The Figure below shows a playground after raining. Images can be seen on the calm water surface of the wet ground.
(a) Explain why images can be seen on the calm water surface.
(a) Find the slope ofth.c graph in Figure 2 and state its physical meaning.
(b) The Figure below shows an object AB above the water surfacePQ.
(b) Philip predicts that if ais increased to 50", total internal reflection will occur. Explain whether he is correct or not.
(2m,,k,)
In the Figure,
(i) draw the reflected rays of the incident rays x andy;
(ii) hence, draw the image of AB. (4m ,,ks)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA3 -Q/12 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC -WA3-Q/13
14. < HKCE 2008 Paper I-10 >
15- < HKCE 2011 Paper 1- 4 >
A teacher performs an experiment by directing a red light beam from air nonnally to the straight edge ofa semi-circular glass Figure (a) shows a blue light ray
block with centre O (see Figure 1). The refractive index of glass is 1.48. It is known that the refractive index of glass is different for light of different wavelengths.
passing through a glass prism. Some angles are measured as shown.
semi-circular glass block

..
36 "
Figure! .......
..
blue light ray
glass prism
red light beam Figure (a)
(,) Find the critical angle of the glass block. (2 """")

(a) Detenninc the refractive index of glass for blue light. (2m""')
(b ) If0>:c45 °,
{i) describe and explain what happens when the light beam hits point.X. (2 marks)
(tl) complete the path of the light beam in Figure l until it finally emerges from the glass block to the air. (2 marlcs)
It js known that the refractive index of glass for red light is smaller than that for blue light.
(,) If the light beam travels lll the same direction but with a shorter distance from 0, with 0 < 40 , sketch the path of t he
°
refracted beam at Y and mark the angle of refraction as r in Figure 2. (2 """") (b) Now the blue light ray is replaced by a red light ray as shown in Figure (b). The dotted line ( - · - · - · - )(2s1:n e
°:s �
ori� path of the blue light ray. Sketch the path of the red light ray in Figure (b).
-
semi-circular glass block
Figure2
red light ray
glass prism
red light beam

PC-WA3-Q /15
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA3-Q/14 DSE Physics - Section C : Question
WA3 : Reflection and Refraction of Llght WA3 : Reflection and Refraction of Llght
Part B : BKDSE examination questions 17. <HKDSE2014PaperIB•5>

A __;cQ __---iC
16. <HKDSE PracticePaperm • 6 >
The Figure below shows the following apparatus p
A low voltage power supply, a ray box with a single slit, a full scale protractor and a semi-circular glass block.
A. A ray of red light

of glass block ABC. ABC is a quarter circle
with its centre at
The Figure above shows the cross-section the face AC at Q as shown.
face AB and the refrac ted ray strikes
is incident at P on
(2nwks)
for red light.
(a) Calculate the refractive index of the glass
(2 marks)
(b) Explain why the ray is totally reflected when it strikes the face AC at Q.
Descnbe bow to use the above apparatus to measure the critical angle of the semi-circular glass block (Snwks)
(2 marks)
(c) In the Figure, sketch the subsequent path of the ray until it :finally emerges from the block to the air.
A __;:Q __---;C
54•
p
(1 mark)
(d) If the incident ray is a ray of white light. what can be observed when it finally emerges from the block?
p between 01, 04 and refractive index n1, n4. For total internal
18. <HKDSE2015PaperIB�6> (b) (;) Referring to Figure 2, deduce the relationshi ° ing value of 0i if n1 "" 1.000261
reflection justto occur at R, 04 can be taken as 90 . Hence, find the correspond (3 marks)
Read the following description about a mirage and answer the questions that follow. and 114 "' 1.000221.
A.mirage �soften seen on highways during hot summers. Pools of water seem to cover the roadway far ahead.
?1stant O�Je�ts appear to be refiecte� by the surface of the 'water'. The ph enomenon is caused by the difference
m refractive index between the hot arr near the road surface and the cool er air above it. The refractive index of
cool_air is gr�r than that of hot air, but_the differences are so small thatthe subsequent deviations of light rays
are tiny. Sufficiently large temperature difference between the hot air near the road surface and the above cooler
air o ver a short height (ie. high temperature gradient) and light rays travelling along sufficient long path lengths
are required to form a mirage.
(ii) FindL in Figure 1 ifh = I.Sm. (Note: a+ 0i = 90° inFigure2.)
(c) A thirsty traveller in a vast desert sees sunilar nrirages such that a 'water source' appears at W which is distance L away
like the one in Figure 1. Ifhe walks a distanceL towards the 'water source', how far would the 'water source' appear to
him 'I Explain your answer. (2 marks)
The Figure above shows the mirage seen on a highway. This photo wastaken with a telephoto lens which gives
the perception that the viewer is very close to the car ahead .
a light ray from distant objects

observer
[1--=--. 1
R
I
-
h --- ------- ;IL_ )(
-
L - ------- --- ----
- --
- 19. <HKDSE2017 Paperm- 7>
- - and the angle of incidence is 0. The light ray
(a) A light ray enters a rectangular plastic blockABCD from air atpointE,
Figure 1 -- -- ---- --
- plastic is 1.36.
emerges along face BC as shown in Figure (a). The refractive index of the
Figure 1 and 2 illustrate the principle of .th.e phenomenon. � of different temperature is simplified to several layers
.
and modeled as parallel slabs as sho� � Figure (b): The bending of th � light ray from distant objectsis much exaggerated. B,------7"---s----,-C-
0i, 0i, BJ and 84 denote the angles ofmmdence at vanous boundaries of rur layers.
/Diagram NOT drawn to scale / E

Figure (a)
A�--------------D
hot air
Figure 2 (i) Find the critical angle ofthe plastic.
(a) State ONE essential condition for a mir:age to be observed. (1 mark)

DSE Physics • Section C : Question PC-WA3-Q/18 DSB Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA3-QS/01
19. (a) (tl) Find the value of 8. HKBAA.'s Marld:ng Scheme is prepued for the markers' reference. It� n�be regarded as a :iet of model �ers.
(3 marl<s) Students and tcac:hers who are not involved in the marking process ate adVlSed to interpLet the Mai:kin& Scheme with care.
Question Solution
1. (a) (i)
(iii) If the light ray enters the plastic block at point E with an angle of incidence larger than
8, sketch the path of the 0.34 0.42 0.5
l ight ray in Figure (a). sin 8 0.17 0.26
(2 marl<s)
sin¢ 0.28 Q.41 0.55 0.68 0.80
(b) A student designs a periscope using two plastic prisms, the refractive index. of the plastic is 1.36. As shown in
Figure {b), an object is placed in front of the periscope.
450 Ai1
object
Figure (b)
observer
4 - ,r
45 °
(;j Complete the path ofthe light ray from the object in Figure (b), and explain why the periscope
fails to worlc.
(3 nwks)
(u) 'What can be used to replace the two plastic prisms so that the periscope can work.properly? (lmarlc) sine
< Correct label of axis> [!]

< Correct scale> [!]
< Correct points> (1/2 mark each, up to maximum of2 marks) [2]
< Straight line> [!]
(ii) Slope = � [!]

0.5
"" 1.6 < from 1.58 to 1.66 is accepted> [!]
The slope is equal to the refractive index of the plastic. [!]
2. (d) Total internal reflection occurs [!]

l. (a ) (iii) sine=_!_=_!_
n 1.62
:. C = 38.1° <from36.5"to39.7°isaccepted> (,) 0)
(b) (i) Brightness of OE gradually decreases and [!]

�
the brightness becomes zero after 0 =c [!]
(ii) Brightness of OB gradually increases

and then becomes very bright after 0= c [1]
(c) Optical fibres [!]

used in telecommunication [!]
OR 1-;:: .
Endoscope [1]
< Correct position ofprisms> [I]
to examine the intemal organs ofpatient [1]
< Correct orientation ofprisms > [1]
< Correct light ray> [I]

2. (a) The frequency remains unchanged. [1]
(ii) Any ONE ofthe following: [!]
The speed ofthe ray decreases.
The wavelength of the ray decreases.
[1] * Prisms do not have multiple reflections.
[!] * Prisms do not give multiple images.
(b) * The image will be clearer.
* The image will be brighter.
3. (a)
[2]
< reflected ray drawn comet > [1]

< refracted ray drawn > [I]
< refracted ray bent away from nonnal > [I] < light ray travels from end to the other end> [1]
1 < a few total internal reflection occurs > (!]

(c) (i) na--a-- 1
[!]
sin c sin 39 °
The ray travels along the glass fibre by total intemal. reflection. [!]
:. n = 1.59 [!]
(b) AnyONE ofthefollowing [!]
sin 8 = 1.5 9
(ii)
sin 30°
[I] * Telecommunications
:. B =52.7" [!]
* Endoscope for internal examination of patients
DSB Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA3 - QS / 04 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA3-QS/05
...
...
4. (a)
4. (o) He is wrong [1]
0.26 0.34 0.42 a.so 0.57 0.64 because total internal reflection would not haPPen [1]
0.16 0.22 0.28 0.33 0.38 0.42 when light travels from air to glass (OR from a less dense medium to a denser medium) [1]
[1] <OR>
He is wrong [1]
because total internal reflection can only occur [1]
when light travels from a denser medium to a less dense medium [1]
0.6 -rr r
s. (a) Any THREE of the following : [2]
0.5 * virtual
* """"
* same size as the object
0.4 * laterally inverted
* image distance is equal to the object distance
0.3
0.2
0.1
...l...l
0 0.1 0.2 sin¢

0.3 0.4 0.5
< Correct labelled axes >

[1]
< Correct scale>
[lj < Position of image correct> [1]
< Correct points >
[1] < Height of image correct> [1]
< Straight lines >
[1] < Ray from P correctly reflected> [1]
(b ) Sl
op, • 0.64 < Ray from Q cotrect.ly reflected> [1]
0.42 [1]
(c) From the above diagram,
"" 1.52 < from 1.48 to 1.56 is acceptable>
[1]
ntlni:mUm length of mirror distance between points X and Y
The slope represents the refractive index of glass.
[1] 0.75m (±0.03m) [2]
5. (d) Yes, the boy can still see all of himself: [I] 7. (a) (i) refraction [Il
sin0 "
Figure2 0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
< Ray from P conectly reflected from P'> 0.3

[I]
< Ray from Q correctly reflected from Q' > [I] 02
:F=========. =.=.::i:,:. ==�·mn•

0.1
6. 1
(a) (i) sine = ..!_ [I]
n 1.33
C = 48.8° [I] < 2 axes labeled cor:rectly > [!]
<Correct scale> [!]
(u) tanc =
d <Correct points > [ 2]
tan48.8° = i [I]
<A best straight line through the origin> [!]
r = 3.43 m <accept 3.42m> [I] (llJ.)Slope oftheline = n = 0-62-0 =155 <acceptl.52tol.58> [!]
0.40-0
(b) As shown in the diagram below, the diver can see the fisbennan. [I] sine = l = _I_
n 1.55
:. c = 40.2° <accept 39° to41°> [I]
(iv) Graphdrawnonpart(u)
3m
<A straight line through the origin. > [I]
<Slope of the line should be stnallertban that in (ll) but must be greater than 1 > /, [!]
(b) As the refractive index of dian:tond is larger'lhan that of glass,

< a ray should be drawn.from the body of the fisherman into the diver's eye> [I] the critical angle of diamond is smaller than.that of glass. [!]
( Note that the light ray should not be along the circularpath) Therefore, more light would have total internal reflection inside the diatnond than inside the glass. [I]
( No mark is given if the arrow is in the reverse direction)
So more light would leave the upper surface and .make dia!llOnd more sparkling. [I]
8. (a) Advantage: the plane minor can give same size images. [1] 12. (a) (i)
Disadvantage : the plane minor has multiple reflection that makes the image not clear. [1]
(b) The drivers of cars in front can see the word "AMBULANCE" in the right way [1]
through the rear-view driving mirror. [1] < reflected angle= incident angle during internal reflection> [1]
< all correct> [1]
(ll) total internal reflection [l]
9. (a) [1]
(b) AnyTWOofthefollowings: [2]
* Optical fibres can transmit the signal$ with little loss than copper wires.
* Optical fibres can catty more infonnati.on than copper wires.
* Optical fibres are much lighter and thinner than copper wires.
(b) Advantage: (any ONE of the following) [1]

* Using prisms can prevent multiple reflection. (OR prevent formation ofmultiple images) 13. (a) The calm water surface gives a smooth reflecting surface. [1]
* The image fonned is clearer. {OR brighter) Regular reflection occurs at the v.rater wface. [1]
10. (a) (i) By n = sin0,ir [l]

sine,..,,.,
•. (133) = sin8;,.
.• eoir = 41.1°
sin300
(ii) sine"" .!.'fl = _l1.33_ [1]

:. C = 48.8° [1]
(b) ,?fli/. Peter's eye
/ [2]
< Reflected ray ofx drawn correctly> [l]
< Reflected ray ofy drawn correctly> [1]
< Dotted lines extended cor.rectly > [l]
< Im.age drawn correctly > [1]
= 0.62 14. (a) n•- [1]

11. (a) slope [1] sinc
0.4
1
= 1.55 (1.50 to 1.60 are acceptable) [l] .. 1.48 = --
sinc
The slope is the refractive index. oftbe glass. [l] C ""42.5° [1]
(b) He is not correct. [1] (b) (i) The angle ofincident B (45°) is greater than the critical angle., [1]
Total intema1 reflection will not occur when light travels from a less dense medium to a denser medium. [1] thus, total inteJ:nal reflection occurs at X [1]
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA3-QS/10 . DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA3-QS/11
14. (b) (u) 16. Connect the ray box to the power supply(and switch it on). [1]
Put the serniMcircular glass block onto the protractor.
The centre ofthe iremi-circular glass block should coincide with the centre of the paper protractor. [lJ
Direct a light ray into the glass block through the curved side towards its centre. [lJ
Vary the incident angle in the glass block until the refracted ray is parallel to the straight edge ofthe glass block. [1]
Read the incident angle from the protractor and the critical angle of the glass block can be obtained. [1]
< accept using diagrams>
17. (a) n,. = sin0..,

sin01
red light beam
= sin(90° -30 ° ) [1]
< total inteznal reflection drawn atX> [1] sin(90° -54 ° )
< all rays are correct> [1] = 1.47 [1]
(o) (b) Slllc = _!_ = _l_

ni 1.47
:. c = 42.9° <accept 42.7 ° > [1]

At Q, the incident angle i = 54°
Since the incident angle i > critical angle c, total internal reflection occurs at Q. (1]
(,)
C
red light beam
< refracted ray comes out from Y and bends away from the normal> [1] < the ray is totally reflected at Y, with reflected angle ,a: incident angle> [1]
< angle r marked correctly> [1] < the ray bends away from normal (dotted line) at the curved surface (no dotted line drawn is accepted)> VJ
(d) The white light dispersed into a spectrum. [1]

°
IS. (a) n = sini = sin60 [1]
OR
sinr SUl.36"
The white light splits into different colours. [1]
= 1.47 [1]
( b)
[2] 18. (a) A:11.y ONE ofthe following: [l]
* Total inteni.al reflection occurs.
* High temperature gcadient near the road surface.
* Light rays travel sufficient long path lengths.
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA3-QS/12 Hong Kong Diploma of Secondary Edncation Examination
WA3 : Reflection and Refraction of Light Physics - Compulsory part (!i&f�¾)
Section A- Heat and Gases (?.Mo lltft)
1. Temperature, Heat and Internal energy (�gt • ;lM� f"l flt)
18. (b) (i) ni sin 6\ = m. sin 0.z = n3 sin 0; = 714 sin 04 [!] 2. Transfer Processes (#i�f,Ji&ff.)
:. msin6\ = n.;sin� 3. Change of State ($l!htro.tl/t)
4. General Gas Law ( .\h&1ffiJIJt,t#)
:. (1.000261) sin 6\ = (1.000221) sin 90° 5. KineticTheoxy (�-1-iE1fi�)
:. 6\ = 89.5° < accept 89.488° > [!] Section B- Force and Motion (:h:fal!.1\ii)
1. Position and Movement (1l1Jl.:li>5i!J)
(it ") a:= 90 - 6\ = 90 - 89.5 = 0.5
° ° ° °
<OR 0.512 > °
2. Newton'sLaws(lj=-tJi:-t.#)
3. MomentofForce(/J;l:E.)
!!.=tanl'.l [!] 4. Work,EnergyandPower(#;JJ' lfuiU�;IJ$)
5. Momentum(il.dl:)
L
(1.5) = tan 0.5" :. L = 172m 6. ProjectileMotion (,t!Mllt;J;.:tl.T)
[!]
7. CircularMotion(lBlffl.il�)
<accept 167.7m to 172.0m>
L
8. Gravitation ( 3171)
(c) The water source still appears the same distance away [!] Section C - Wave Motion (ilt!½)
because the image is caused by the reflection of light of distant objects at the same angle. 1. Wave Propagation (i&'..119:fftill.)
[!] 2. Wave Phenomena (iei.ilJJJ!.�)
3. Reflection and Refraction of Light (_;le, M &.M A-'llf ,tt)
4. Lenses (;Ail;)
5. Wave Nature ofLight (1c.lrtri8i.�l!#ti)
19. (a) (i) sin C = .!. = _!_ 6. Sound(�%)
n 1.36
[!]
Section D- Electricity and Magnetism ( ill:>f"�)
.". = 47.3° [!] 1. Electrostatics(i!'-1ll:�)
2. Electric Circuits ( 'llt3'-)
C
(11) Angle ofrefractionatE: r = 90 ° - 473 ° = 42.7" 3. Domestic Electricity (�)! ffl 11!:)
4. MagneticField(.r,:1,:�)
[!]
By (1.36) = �° [!] 5. Electromagneticinduction(1l!:Zltl!x.4-)
sin.42.7
1
6. AltematingCumnt (:i::E.):i.ilt)
0 = 67.3 ° <accept 62.7° > [!] Section E - Radioactivity and Nuclear Energy (1.t>\1t m t..:f":#£ �)
1. Radiation and.Radioactivity (.fiiM'f"'tt.AtJJtt.)
(fu) 2. AtomicModel(.lffi-'f-:m!t!)
C 3. Nuclear Energy($:ill;.)
Physics -Elective part OlHw•f1l-)

< correct refraction at E > [!] Elective 1 -Astronomy and Space Science (J;.31:.�:f",IJi'i.J;.;f'I-�)
i 1. The universe seen in different scales (;f: f.J t&r.'Hl&:.TilSI � 'iii ilii tt)
2. Astronom y through history (k��irtr-ft-A!t)
< correct refraction at BC> [!] 3. Orbital motions under gravity ( 1th T61J$!.it.:il.flJ)
4. Stars and the universe (•ii..£:if,:, '!"'iii)
Elective 2-Atomic World (Jfi.'T"-llt-W--)
D 1. Rutherford's atomic model (.11&-�.!i-'f-��)
2. P hotoelectric effect (,I:, 1ttt..f.)
1 3. Bohr's atomic model of hydrogen (lt la 6IJ il.W."T��)
' 4. Particles orwaves($."T"�i&'..)
(b) (i) ! 5. Pr obing into nanoscale(;t.J:\Ul!*-tf"-l'r-)
1�,
Elective 3 -Energy and Use of Energy Cif@.-l:;f,,�6i.W,e<J�m)
[!] l. Electricity at home (�,% ffl 1!!:)
45'�
oblect 2. Energy efficiency in building (,!�el) ��W.td:.$ )
3. Energy efficiency in transportation (;Ult:r: /m1J�i.!f.tt.$)
4. Non-renewable energy sources ( ;f: if..pj.i. � l;!f.)
The angle of incidence of the light ray from the object is less than the critical angle of the plastic prism. [!] 5. Renewa ble energy sources (if .jlj.i.if6i&)
Total internal reflection will not occur. [!] Elective 4- Medical Physics ( U,$-ih.i!.�)
1. Making sense ofthe eye (i!tir,J� 'i)
(ii) Glass prism OR Plane mirror 2. Making sense ofthe ear(.lf-ir,J� 'it)
3. Medical imaging using non-ionizing radiation (!/�il);!lllt#M U$-M-1».$-)
[!]
4. Medical imaging using ionizing radiation ( 'Ql:"1t�M I- *-if-H�*)
I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA4 :Lenses
Use the following data wherever necessary :

PC-WA4-M/Ol
I I 4.
WA4 :Lenses
< HKCE 1982Paper II 24 > R

PC-WA
4-M/
02 1 1
F
Speed of light in vacuum
1
I
The following list of formulae may be found useful :

p Q R S
1
A real image ofan object is formed atlby a lens placed at L. If the focus of the lens is at F, the object must have been
Equation for a single lens placed near to
A. p
B. Q
C. R
D. S
5. < HKCE 1982 Paper II R 19 >
I. < BKCE 1980 Paper Il - 26 >
A convex lens is used to form an image of a bright object on a screen. The effect of covering the top half of the lens with a
card is to
A remove the top half of the image. F
B. reID.ove the bottom half of the image.
C. make the image smaller.
D, make the image dimmer. A ray of light is incident at a concave lens. F is the foCUS of the lens. Which of the following diagrams correctly shows the
path of the emergent ray?
B.
F F
C. D.
A ray of light falls on a convex lens as shown in the figure. Fis the principal focus of the lens. Which of the following
represents the path of the emergent ray?
A. p F F
B. Q
C. R
D. S
6. <HKCE1983PaperIIR17>
3. < HKCE 1982 Pap er n - 25 > screen
p
famp
L screen
A lens gives a sharp image of the lamp at P as shown in the figure above. Which of the following methods could give a shrup
A convex lens Lis placed between a screen and a lamp. A sharp image is formed on the screen as shown in the above figure.
image of the :filament on the screen?
Which of the following statements concerning the image are correct ?
(1) Move the screen towards the lens.
(1) The image is larger than the object
(2) The image is real (2) Move the lamp closer to the lens.
(3) The image is inverted. (3) Replacing the lens by another lens of longer focal length.
A. (1) & (2) only A. (1) only
B. (!) & (3) only B. (!) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only C. (2).& (3) only
D. (!), (2) & (3) D. (!), (2) & (3)
l DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/ 03 I I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA4: Lenses
PC-WA4-M/0411
7. <HK.CE 1983 Paperll-19> 10. < HKCE 1984 Paper ll -14 >
Which of the following statements concerning the properties of virtual images formed by a lens is/are correct 'J
X y
{l) Vutual images can be seen by the naked eye.
(2) Virtual images can be formed on a screen.
(3) Vutual images can be photographed with a camera.
A. (1) only .
B. (3) onl y
C. (!) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) only
As shown in the diagram, a narrow parallel beam oflight is converted to a wider parallel beam by placing two lenses X llll.d Y
in the positions shown. Which of the combinations below when correctly chosen and installed could produce the effect
8. < HKCE 1983 Paper II- 20 > required?
An object is placed 20 cm in front of a converging lens of focal length 30 cm. Which of the following statements about its LensX LensY
image is/are correct?
(!) convex concave
(1) The image is real.
(2) concave concave
(2) The image is magnified.
(3) concave conv�
(3) The image is erect.
A. (2) only
A. (2) o nly
B. (3) only
B. (!) & (3) only
C. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) only
D. (!), (2) & (3)
9, <BKCE 1984 Paper II- 18> 11. < HKCE 1985 Paper 11-17 >
..''
i
Which of the following will produce a diminished image of an object O ? (fis the focal length)
''
1
0
A I 0 B C D
In the above figure, the image I of an object placed at O is produced by a single lens. If the magnification is 2, what kind of
f f lens has been used and where must it have beenplaced?
B. A a concave lens placed at A
!
B. aconcavelensplacedatB
C. a convex lensp lacedat C
D. a convex lens placed at D
\
0
i
f f
12. < HKCE 1986 Paper 11-11 >
c.
1
0
I
A B
I !
O
I
C D
i
f f
D. In the diagram shown, the image !isproduced by a lens. The object is placed at O. What is the nature and position of this
!
lens?
A concaveandplaced atA
0 B. convexandplaced atB
C. concave and placed at C
f f
D. convex and placed at D
I
13.
WA4:Lenses
< HKCE 1986 Paper Il-12 >

PC-WA
4-M/
051
1
I
16.
WA4 :Lenses
<BKCE 1987 Pa per ll-19 >

PC-WA4-M 061
/ 1
Which of the following ray diagrams correctly show(s) the paths of light rays through the lens ?
(1)
'
D' C' F' F C D
An object is placed in front of a convex lens L in the region D'C ', as sh.own. in the diagram. If Fis the focus of the lens,
(2) where should the image lie ?
A betweenC'andF'
B. betweenF' andL
C. between L and F
D. betweenFandC
(3)
'Which of the followin g ray dia grzmsis/are correct?
(1)
A
B.
(3)only
(1) & (2) on ly
---
C. (2) & (3) onl y (2)
D. 0), (2) & (3)
F' F
If points F and F' represent the focal points of a concave lens, which of the following ray diagrams correctly shows the path
of a li ght ray through the lens ? �
A B. (3)
zifr
C. D. A (1) only
B. (!) & (2) oruy
C. (2) & (3) only
D. (1), (2) & (3)
F
18. <HKCE 1988 Paper Il - 19 >
15. < HKCE 1987 Paper II- 21 >
0
A concave lens is placed above the letter " d" which has the size shown in the above figure. The image of the letter "d " T
appears as S
A
d
B.
p The :figure shows an object OP placed in front of a convex lens. Which of the following should be its most probable image?
A. IQ
d p
C. D. B. JR
C. IS
D. IT
1
,====================::a:J
.
11 -.
WA4: Lenses
PC - WA4 - M / 071 I DSE Physics - Section C : MC.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/ 08 II
19. < BKCE 1988 Paper II- 21 > 0 23. < HKCE1989 Paper II- 20 >
light
"I'
p QR s · screen
f''
The figure shows an object O placed in front of a concave lens to give an image I. What is the most probable position of the
@]
focus?
A. p
B. Q A slide illuminated by a light source is placed in front ofa convex lens of focal length/as shown in the figure above. The
C. R • -lucont '.�IB .
D. S � � C D
[Ej G �
20. < HKCE 1988 Paper 11- 22 >
1 &
24. < HKCE 1989 Paper II - 22 >
A
sI
.:
The above figure shows a beam oflight passing through devices X and Y. What couldX and Ybe ? Q R
y p I I
X
A. concave lens concave lens f f
B. concave lens convex lens
C. convex lens concave lens
D. convex. lens convex. lens An object AB is placed at a distance ofone focal lengthfin front of a concave lens-as shown in the figure above. What is the
position and the nature ofthe image 7
Position Nature
21. < HKCE 1989 Paper n- 18 >
A. stP virtual and erect
s ,t Q
B. virtual and erect
p
>+�
stR
-------i
_______ C real and inverted
r---+----p D. atinfu:rlty
Q
f----+---- 25. < HK.CE 1989 Paper II- 23 >
If C, C • are both ata distallce of2 times the focal length from a convex lens, which of the following ray diagrams is correct?
A. 7�c· B.
c.
C f=c· D. c4'
' C'
7 '-----'.._
A convex lens is used as a magnifying glass to read small printing in a book. Which ofthe following statements is/are true?
(1) The image distance is greater than the object distance.
(2) The image of the printing is real
Which ofthe 4 light rays P, , R andS drawn above is NOT possible ?
A. p Q (3) The image of the printing is erecl
A. (1) only
B. Q B. (1) & (3) only
C R C. (2) & (3) only
D. S D. (!), (2) & (3)
I
DSE Physics· Section C : M.C.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/09
11
If F, F' are foci and C, C' are both at a distance of two times the focal length from the lens, which of the following ray
I
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/10
11
diagrams is/are correct?

(1) XAM
C' C
A lens is used to look at some print on a paper. The image of the word ''PHYSICS" is sho'WD. above. Which ofthe following
statements is/are true ?
(2) (I) The lens is a converging lens.
(2) The image lies between the paper and the lens.
(3) The image is real.
A (2) only
C' B. (1) & (2) only
C. (1) & (3) only
D. (1), (2) & (3)
(3)
'Which of the following statements concerning real images fonned by a lens is/are cottect?
C
(1) Real images are always diminished.
(2) Real images can be photographed with a camera.
A. {l) only (3) Without a screen, real images cannot be seen by the eye.
B. (1) & (2) only A (I) only
c. (2) & (3) only B. (2) only
D. (1),(2)&(3) C. (1) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) only
28. < RKCE 1991 Paper Il-1S >

32. <BKCEI995Paperll-13>
A convex lens is used as a magnifying glass to :read some small print in a book. The glass is placed 3 Cill from the book and
Object the ma.gzrification is 3. What is the distance beiween the book and the image of the print?
A. 3cm
B. 6cm
c. 9 CI11
D. 12 Cill
In the figUre above, Fis the focus of the converging lens. Which ofthe refracted rays is JNCORRECTLY drawn ?
A. p
B. Q 33. < BKCE 1995Paper Il-16 >
C. S
D. T
'' A
s
'
A I 0 B C D
In the above diagram, F, F' are the foci of the convex lens and AB is an incident ray. Which of the following paths best
In the diagram, the image] ofan object O is produced by a lens. What is the nature and position of this lens ? represents the emergent ray ?
A. concave and placed at A A. P
B. concaveandplacedat.B B. Q
C. convex. and placed at C C. R
D. convex and placed at D D. S
iI
34. <HKCE1996·Paperll-15>
DSE Physics - Section C : MC.
WA4:Lenses
P C-
WA4-M
/llll
I
For questions 37 and 38
WA4:Lenses
PC-WA4-M/1211
---a
An illuminated letter 'R' is placed in front of a lens as shown below and an image is formed on a translucent screen.. The object
distance is 30 cm and the image distance is 20 cm.
10 CID 4cn:t
@----------L<ruQ-- S=en
I,..._
30 cm --
When an object O is placed in front of a convex lens and a plane mirror as shown above, an .image I is formed at the same
positions as the o�ect. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
(1) Theimage/isreal
�20 cm
--., ------/. observer's eye
(2) The focal length ofthe lens is 10 cm. 37. <BKCE1999Paperll-11>

(3) If the distance between the lens and the plane mirror is changed to 2 ctn. the position of the image I would remain Which of the following statements is/are correct?
unchanged. (1) The lens is a converging lens.
A. (1) only (2) The image is diminished.
B. (3) only (3) The shape of the image seen by the observer is ' 15 '.
C. (I) & (2) only
A (1) only
D. (1), (2) & (3) B. (1) & (2) only
C. (2) & (3) ooly
D. (I), (2) & (3)
38. <BKCE1999Faperllw12>
If a piece of paper is used to cover one-half of the lens, which of the following descnbes the change in the frrutge as seen by
the observer ?
B B' A. The whole image can still be seen but the image becomes ditnmer.
B. The whole �ge can still be seen and its brightness remains unchanged.
C. Only half of the image can be seen and the image becomes dimmer.
Q
D. Only half ofthe image can be seen but its brightness remains unchanged.
In the above diagram, A'B' is the image ofan object AB formed by an optical device PQ. What is PQ ?
A. a plane minor
B. a glass block 39. <BKCE2000Faperllw15>
C. a concave lens Lens
D. a convex. lens
36. < HKCE 1998 Paper Il- 15 >

IfF andF;are the foci of the concave lens, m:tlch of the following ray diagrams is incorrect?
A a
D.
s
C.
In the above figure, F andF' are the foci of the above lens and AB is an incident ray. Which of the following paths best
represents the emergent ray ?
F' A. P
B. Q
C. R
D. S
I
40.
WA4:Lenses
< HKCE 2003 Paper Il-15 >
PC-
WA4-
M/ 1
31 1
I
WA4 :Lenses
PC-
WA 4 -M
/141
1
Which of the follow:ing ray diagratl1S concerning the refraction of light ray by a converging lens is/are incorrect? F denotes
the focus of the lens.
(1)
The photograph shows a watch with a lens positioned over the date-display. WhiCh of the fol lowing statements are eotreet?
(I) The lens is a convex lens.
(2) The image of the date-display funned by the lens is virtual
(3) The date-display and its image lie on the� side of the lens.
(2)
A. (1) & (2) only
B. 0) & (3) on1Y
C. (2) & (3) ooly
D. (1), ( 2) & (3)
(3)
F"
An object O is placed in front ofa concave Jens. F andF'are the foci of the lens. Which of the follawillg di.agnnns shows
the refracted rays of the three incident rays and the image I formed?
A. {2) only A. B
B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only
0 0
D. {1) & (3) only F" F"
41. < BKCE2003 Paper II - 16 >
C. D.
0 0
The photograph shews a stndent using a convex lens of focal length 20 cm to view a distant object Wbich of the following 44. <HKCE2004Paperll�l5>
statements about the image formed is/are correct ? An object is placed in front ofa concave lens. Which of the following statements about the properties of the image fonned in
(I) The image will be erect. the lens must be correct ?
(1) The image is diminished.
(2) The :image will be diminished.
(2) The image is virtual.
(3) The student must use a screen in order to see the image. (3) The image distance is smaller than 1he focal length ofthe lens.
A. 0) only A. (1) & (2) only
B. (2) only B. (I) & (3) only
c. 0) & (3) only C. (2) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) only D. (1), (2) & (3)
Il
45.
WA4:Lenses
<HKCE 2005 Paperll-11>

PC-WA4-M/1511
I
47.
WA4:Lenses
<HKCE 2006 Paperll- 13 >

convex lens screen
PC-WA4-M/ 1611
1--rn-,-,,-. n-
i.,..j.' :u. -l' '±'
object
AJ; shown above, an illuminated object is placed at a distance 20 cm in front ofa_convex.lens and a sharp image is formed on
Cecilia uses a magnifymg glass to read some small print. Which of the following diagrams shows how the image of the print a screen at a distance of 16 cm from the lens. The focal length ofthe convex lens is
is formed? A. less than 8 cm.
A. B. B. between 8 cm and 10 cm.
C. between 10 cm and 16 cm.
D. between 16 cm and 20 cm.
0
48. < BKCE 2006 Paper ll-14 >
Which of the following examples illustrate(s) a real image-']
(1) a fish in a pond being observed from above the water
(2) a fingerprint left at a crime scene being observed through a magnifying glass
c. D. (3) a motion picture on the screen being watched in a cinema
A. (1) only
B. (2) only
0 C. (3) only
D. (1), (2) & (3)
A p
46. < BKCE 2005 Paper 11-12 >
s
F and F' are the foci ofthe above lens and AB is an incident ray. Which light raY best represents the emergent WJ ?
"'"'rincipal A. p
B. Q
C. R
D. S
The figure shows a web cam. A web cam typically includes a lens and an image sensor.
All object is placed near a lens and an image is fomied as shown. Which of the following statements are correct 7 The :function of the image sensor is similar to that of a filxn in a conventional camera.
The image is fum1ed on the sensor and is then digitised.
(1) The height of the image is halfthat ofthe object. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
(2) The lens is a concave lens. (1) The lens is a convex lens.
(3) The focal length of the lens is 20 cm. (2) The lens is a concave lens.
(3) Image formed on the image sensor is real
A. {l) & (2) only A. (1) only
B. (1) & (3) only B. (2) only
C. (2) & (3) only C. (l} & (3) only
D. (1), (2) & (3) D. (2) & (3) only
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/ 171
I DSE Pbysics - Section C : M.C.

WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/1811
!
51. <HKCE2008Paperll-12> 55. < BKCE 2010 Paper JI - 14 >
0
L--::::�p-
X Q
A light bulb O is placed infront of a lens L as shown above. A shaxp and diminished image is fonned on the screen S. With
the position ofL fixed, which of the following methods can form a shazp andmagai1iedimage on the screen?
A. Move O andStowardsL. z
B. MoveOandSawayfromL. Two parallel rays X and Y meet at P after passing through lens L as shown. Another ray Z parallel to the principal axis is
C. Move OtowardsL andmoveSawayfromL. directed to lens L. Which point in the :figure will ray Zpass through?
D. Move O away fromL and move S towards L. A p
B. Q
C. R
52. <HKCE2008Paperll-I5> D. S
Which ofthe following ray diagrams concerning the refraction of two light rays by a converging lens is/are possible?
w � � 56. < BKCE 2011 Paper ll-16 >
An object is placed in front of a concave Jens. Which of the following descriptions about the image.formed by the lens is
incorrect?
A. It is always virtual
B. It is always diminished
C. It is always between the object and the lens.
r
A. (1) only
D. It will be formed at infinity if the object is placed at the focus of the lens.
B. (3) only
C. (I) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only
·rs·r
53. < HKCE 2009 Paper n -13 >
A student puts a lens at a certrun distance above ap aper with the word "TEST" written on it as shown in the figure. What is
the lens? If the student moves the lens further away from the paper,
what will be the change in the size of the image ?
r s
Jen, crutnge in size of the image ---�1�--x---0"----------Y----p iru:ipal axi
A. convex increases
B. convex decreases The figure above shows an object O and its image I formed by a lens. Which of the following about the lens used and its
C. concave increases position is correct ?
D. concave decreases Type oflens Position oflens
A concave X
54. <HKCE2009PaperII-17> B. concave y
C. convex X
D. """'"" y
Pa.rt B : BKAL examination questions

In the above figure, Xis a light bulb and Lis a convex lens. Which of the following ways can be used to produce a parallel
beam of light rays 1 58. <HKAL 1980 Paper I - 15 >
(1) MovingLclosertoX.
An object is placedin :front ofa converging lens of focal length 30 cm. For which of the following object distances would the
(2) ReplacingL with another convex lens of longer focal length image be real and magnnied ?
(3) Replacing£ with another concave lens of shorter focal length
A. IO cm
A. (1) & (2) only
B. 20 cm
B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only C. 40 cm
D. (1), (2) & (3) D. 80 cm
!I DSE Physics • Section C : M.C.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/19
l1
1 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/20
l1
·n»<o
59. < HKAL 1983 Paper I - 15 > 63. <BKAL2011PaperllA-17>
An object is placed at 15 cm from a lens. A virtual image magniiied 2 times is produced. The lens is a
A. concave lens of focal length 10 cm.
B. convex lens of focal length 10 cm.
C. concave lens offocal length 30 cm.
D. convex lens of focal length 30 cm.
/4...__ 2/- -------

----r/
--------1;.
64. <HKAL2013Paper1IA-18>
An object is placed 12 cm in front ofa converging lens. An.image is formed 24 cm from the lens. Find the focal length of
An object with two arrows drawn on a screen is placed at a distance 2/from a convex lens of focal lengthf. Which of the the converging lens ifthe image is
followjng diagrams correctly represents the image seen by the eye when the object is viewed through the lens? (1) real; •
A a C D. (2) virtual 7
[DJ [ill [iJ] [ill

image is real image is virtual
A. 24cm Som
B. 12om Som
C. Som 12om
60. < HKAL 1984 Paper 1- 13> L D. s,m 24om
p
Q
--=:,,..,,�,,,_,cc---l--+-<>,6..... =-- Part C :• Supplemental exercise
65. An object is placed at 15 cm from a lens. A real image magnified2 times is produced. The lens is a
A. concave lens offocal length 10 cm.
B. convex lens of focal length 10 cm.
Two parallel light rays P and Q are incident onto a convex lens. After refraction, the two light rays meet at the point c. The C. concave lens of focal length 30 cm.
ray XY parallel to the principal. axis after passing through the lens will pass through the point D. convex lens of focal length 30 cm.
A. a.
B. b.
c. c. 66. An object is placed in front of a convex: lens of focal length 20 cm. For which of the following object distances would the
D. d. image be erect?
A. 10cm
B. 30 cm
61. < HKAL 2007 Paper IIA -12 > C. 40 cm
An object is placed at the focus ofa diverging lens of focal length 10 cm. What is the magnffication ofthe image fonned ? D. 60 cm
A. 0.5
B. 1.0
67. An object is moving at constant speed awey from a convex: lens of focal length 20 cm. At the moment when it is at 30 cm
c. 2.0 from the lens, which oftbe following descriptions ofthe iniage is cotrect 7
D. infinite
direction of image movement speed of the image
62. < HKAL 2009 Paper 11A - 20 > A. away from the lens faster than that of the object
An object is placed at different distances in front of a converging lens. The image is fomred on the other side of the lens. B. towards the lens faster than that of the object
C. awey from the lens slower than that of the object
I
The graph shows the variation of the linear magnification m of the image with the image distance v. Find the focal length of
the converging lens. D. towards the lens slower than that ofthe object
m
lens '
object 1.5
t LO
I Part D : HKDSE examination questions
I 68. < HKDSE Sample Paper IA- 21 >
05 An object is placed at the focus of a concave lens of focal length 10 cm. What is the magnification of the image formed 7
A. !Oom I A. 0.5
B. !Som B. 1.0
c. 20om 0
10 15 20 25 30
C. 20
D. 30om D. infinite
Ii DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4 -M/21 I I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/2211
69. <BKDSE SamplePaper IA - 16> 71. <HKDSE2012PaperIA-21>

In each of the following diagrams, Lis a concave lens and its two principal foci are denoted by F andF'. Which of the ray
diagrams is/are possible?
(1)
Cecilia uses a magnifying glass to read some small print Which of the following diagrams sho'"'.S how the image of the print
is formed?
A. B.
(2)
c. D.
FF'
0
(3)
70. <HKDSE Practice Paper IA-21 >

ill'llminated 1/v
'ii
[)
u A (1) only
B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only
0 1/u D. (2) & (3) only
Figure (a) Figure (b)
A student uses the set-up in Figure (a) to study the relationship between the object distance u and the image distance v of a 72. < HKDSE 2013 Paper IA- 22 >
convex lens. A graph of 1/v against 1/u is plotted in Figure (b). If the lens is replaced by another convex lens of shorter focal
. L. . :L.
length, which of the following graphs (in dotted lines) would be obtained?
-
-
-x"'',�"--0 --"- ---_=...
}-----
-principalaxis
�
A point light source atX on the principal axis of a tbin convex lens emits a ray of light The ray passes through the lens and
reaches the principal axis at point Y as shown. 0 is the optical centre of the lens such that OX= 20 cm and OY> OX. "Which
of the following statements is/are correct ?
C. ! Iv D. {I) The focal length of the lens ls shorter than 20 cm.
Q) If the point light source is shifted away from the lens, separation OYwouid increase.
(3) An object placed at Y would give a diminished image atX.
� A. (1) only
' B. Q) only
c. (1) & (3) only
0 1/u D. (2) & (3) only
Ii DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/23 I I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-M/ 2411
73. <HKDSE2015PaperIA-15> 75. < HKDSE 2016 Pape r IA-22 >
.Anobject is moving at constant speed towards a convex lens of focal length 10 cxn. At the moment when it is at 100 cm from
the lens, which ofthe following desc riptions of the image is correct?
a
F>,. F' direction of image movement speed of the image
I A. away from the lens faster than that of the object
B. towards the lens faster than that ofthe object
C. away from the lens slower than thatof the object
D. towards the lens slower than that of the object
An object O placed in front of a concave lens forms an image I as shown. F and F' are the foci of the lens. Which ray
diagramis conect ? 76. <HKDSE 2017 PaperIA-19 >
A a When an object is placed 30 cm in front ofa conc ave lens, an image is formed 20 cm awey from the lens. Ifthe concave lens
is replaced by a convex lens of the same focal length and the object distance remains unchanged , whic h of the following
descriptions about the image formed is correct ?
a
F, { F' F' nature of the image image distance
I A real 20c m
B. real 60cm
c. virtu,J 20om
D. virtu,J 60cm
c. D.
77. <HKDSE 2018 PaperlA-19 >
kn.obJectplaced25.0 cmin:6.-ont ofa lens forms a virtualimageatadistance lLl cm from the lens. The lensis a
a '' a A. concave lens of focal length 7.7 cm.
FM F'
B. concave lens offocallength20cm.
I
C. convex e l ns of focal length 7.7 cm.
D. convex lens of focal length 20 cm.
74. <HKDSElOlSPaperlA-16>
.�,
A student uses a convex en
l s to investigate the variation of image distance v with object distance u for real image. The graph
of.!. plotted against .!. is shown above. Ifa convex lens oflongerfocal length is used, what would be the expected result (in
V U
dotred -) ?
A a C D
1 I I 1
;i �
I
o�-
;i �
I
o�-
;i �-
1
o�-
;i-�
1
o�-
u u u u
79. <HKDSE 2019 PaperIA-17> 81. <HKDSE 2020 Paper IA-20>
The figure $how,: apcmcopc � by a student. An objtct is observed via the ptriscopc. Th<: ligun, shows an enlarged sharp image ofon object O fomied on a sc:eenSby a COIIW( Jen, L.
Which of the following can give a diminished sharp ima� on the screen?
Which it:nagc will tbc-obscrvtr sec ?
(I) Keeping the positions of O and L unchanged, move S suitably closer to L.
A. (2) Keeping the positions ofLand S noebaoged, move O suitably rarther awey from L.
(3) Keeping the positions of O aod S nncbanged, move L suitably closer toS.
B. A. (!)only
B. (3)only
C. (l) and (2) only
C. D. (2) and (3) only
D.
Refemng to the above Ill)' diagram, wbat kind Of
--
be its focus? lens JS reptesented, by L?
Which point,. P or Q. can
lensL
A.
B. p
C. cones,. p
D. conv"' Q
Q
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA4-MS/01 DSE Physics - Section C: MC. Solution PC-WA4-MS /02
WA4:Lenses WA4 :Lenses
· HKBAA's Maddng Scheme is ptepa:red for the markets' reference.. It should not be ICgaided as a set of model amwers.
Students and teachers who are not involved in the marking process are advised to interpret the Mming Scheme with care. 3. D
✓ (1) Since the image distance is larger than the object distance, the image is larger than the object
M.C. Answers ✓ (2) Since the image can fonn on the screen. it must be a real image
✓ Since the image is real, it must be inverted.
I. D 11. C 21. C 31. B 41. B 51. C (3)
2. D 12. D 22. D 32. B 42. D 52. B

4. B
3. D 13. C 23. C 33. B 43. B 53. D Since the position. of image is beyond 2F,
4. B 14. B 24. B 34. D 44. D . 54. A thus the position of object should be between F and 2F :. the object is placed near to Q
5. C 15. A 25. A 35. C 45. A 55. C
5. C
6. D 16. D 26. B 36. A 46. D 56. D
Since concave lens is a diverging lens, the ray after refraction must bend away from the principal axis.
7. C 17. A 27. A 37. B 47. B 57. D
8. C 18. C 28. C 38. A 48. C 58. C 6. D
9. D 19. A 29. D 39. D 49. D 59. D ✓ (1) If the screen is moved towards the lens until it is atP, the sharp image would be formed at the screen.
10. B 20. B 30. A 40. A so. C 60. B ✓ (2) Since image and object move at the same distance, ifthe object is moved to the right,
the image would also move to the right and fonned at the screen.
✓ (3) If the focai length is increased, then the :refracted light would be converged to a less extent
61. A 71. A 81. B and the image may form on the screen.
62. A 72. C
63. D 73. B 7. C
64. D 74. D ✓ (1) naked eye can see virtual images directly
65. B 75. C
• (2) light :rays diverging from virtual images cannot be ca ptured by screen
✓ (3) camera can take a picture of virtual ima ge directly
,.
66. A 76. D
67. B 77. B C
68. A 78. A • (1) Object placed between convex lens and focus :::) image is virtual
69. A 79. D ✓ ( 2) Object placed between c_onvex lens and focus :::) image is magnified
70. D 80. A ✓ (3) Virtual image :::) image is erect
9. D
• Object placed between the lens and F will give a ma gnified and virtual image
M.C. Solution A
• B Object placed between F and 2F will give a magnified andI'eal image
I. D • c. Object placed at 2F will give a same size and real image
Covering top halfof the lens means that only half of the lens can refract li ght to fonn the image. ✓ D. Objectplaced beyond 2F will give a diminished and real image
Therefore, less light passes through the lens, thus the ima ge becomes dimnler.
However, the shape and size ofimage remain unchanged, that is, the whole image can still be seen. JO. B
LensXshould be concave to give a divergent beam ofrays.
2. D Lens Y must be convex so that the divergent beam of light bends towards the principal axis to give a parallel beam of rays.
Since convex lens is a con.verging lens, the ray after refraction must bend towards the principal axis. :. (3 ) is the only correct answer.
PC-WA4-MS/03 PC-WA4-MS/04
1
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution
WA4 :Lenses WA4 :Lenses
11. C 19. A
Draw a line joimng the head of the object and the image. By drawing light ray parallel to principal axis from object, the light ray should diverge from image.
The intersection point of the line with the principal axis gives the position ofthe lens.
By extending this line, it would meet the principal axis at P, thus P is the focus.
Thus Cis the correct position ofthelens.
On the other hand, since the image i5 magnified, the lens must be convex.
20. B
Light rays diverge after passing through.X, thus Xis a concave lens.
12. D Light rays converge after passing through Y, thus Yis a convex lens.
Draw a line joining the head ofthe object and the image.
The intersection point of the line with the principal axis gives the position of the lens. 21. C
Thus D is the correct position of the lens. Treat right side parallel rays as incident rays, they diverge after passing the lens.
On the other hand, since the image is inverted, the lens must be convex. Thus the lens must be a diverging lens, that is, a concave lens.
13. C 22. D
(1 ) Parallel beam oflight should converge to the focus F, not to 2F.
All the light rays emitting from the same point must meet also at the same point after passing through the lens.
✓ (2) Object between F and 2F give the image beyond 2F.
Extending rays P, Q andR would meet at a point to give the image,
✓ (3) Light rays after refracted by a converging lens must bend towards the principal axis.
but ray S would not meet at that point
14. B
A. Light passing through the lens bends to the principal axis => property of converging lens 23. C
✓ As the object is placed betweenF and 2F,

B. Incident light through focus on the other side of lens ⇒ emerge as ray parallel to principal axis
the image must be real, inverted and magnified.
C Light parallel to principal focus converges to focus ⇒ property of converging lens
D. Light passing through the lens bends to the principal axis ⇒ property of converging lens
24. B
Nature : Concave lens ⇒ image must be virtual and erect
15. A
Position: Concave lens
The image formed by a concave lens must be erect and diminished.
⇒ image must be virtu.al. ⇒ on the same side as object
⇒ image must be diminished ⇒ v < u ⇒ Q is the position
16, D
For a convex lens, if the object is placed beyond 2F, 25. A
the image must form betweenF and 2F at the other side of the lens. ✓ A. Light ray emitted from C should converge to C'
, B. Incident light ray from a point between C and F
17. A
⇒ refracted ray should converge to a point beyond C'
✓ (1) Parallel incident rays must converge to a focus on the focal plane.
, c. Incident light ray from a point between C and F
(2) The two rays should not diverge after passing through a convex lens, -which is a converging lens.
⇒ reftacted ray should converge to a point beyond C'
(3) Since the upperray does not come from thefocus, it should not emerge as light ray parallel to the axis.
, D. Light ray emitted from C should converge to C'
18. C
26. B
As real image must be inverted, thus IS and IT may be possible.
✓ (1) v>u => hi >h0 :. image is magnified
When pointP of the object is shifted closer to the lens,
the image should be shifted in the same direction, that is, further away from the lens. (2) Image formed behind the lens ⇒ virtual image
Thus, IS is the possible one. ✓ {3) Virtual image ⇒ erect
\I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution
WA4:Lenses
PC-WA4-MS I 05 II DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution
WA4:Lenses
PC-WA4-MS/06
27. A 35. C
✓ (1) Treat right side as parallel incident lights, they should diverge from focus. As the image is virtual. erect and diminished,
(2) Light rays should not converge after passing a concave lens, which is a diverging lens. the lens must be a concave lens.
(3) Parallel incident lights should diverge from focus, not C '.
36. A
28. C
A. Light ray parallel to principal axis diverge from focus
The incident light ray S comes from the bottom of the object,
✓ B. Light ray extension passes through F' ⇒ emerge as parallel ray ⇒ lower light ray is correct
thus it must refract towards the bottom of the image, not towards the head of the image.
✓ C. Light ray extension passes through F' ⇒ emerge as parallel ray
29. D ✓ D. Emerged light ray bends away from the side of the principal axis.
Nature oflens : Since the image is magnified, thus the lens must be convex.
Position of lens : Draw a line joinmgthe head of the object and the image. 37. B
The intersection point of the line with the principal axis gives the position of the lens. ✓ (1) Real image formed from lens ⇒ converging lens
Thus Dis the correct position of the lens. ✓ u > v :::::> m < 1 ⇒ image diminished
(2)
(3) Real image ⇒ inverted ⇒ image seen on the screen is �
30. A
(1) As the image is erect and dinfurlshed, the lens must be a concave lens, that is, diverging lens. 38. A
✓ (2) As the image is diminished, magnification m < l, If half of the lens is covered,
thus v < u, the image distance is shorter than the object distance, the image is closer than the object.
only half of the lens can refract light to form the image,
(3) Since the image is erect, it must be virtual.
thus the image must become dimmer.
31. B
(1) Real images may be magnified or diininish.ed 39. D
✓ (2) Camen can talce picture for both real and virtual images For concave lens which is diverging lens, the refracted ray must bend away frolll the principal axis.
(3) Hnman eye can see real images directly RaysP, Q andR bend towards the principal axis.
Only ray S bends away from the principal axis.
32. B
v = mu = 3x3 = 9cm 40. A
:. Distance between the bookandtheprint = v-u = 9-3 = 6 cm
✓ (1) The two parallel light rays converge to a point on the focal plane.
33. B (2) It is not correct since the light rays diverge after passing thraugh the convex lens.
A. P is not comet since it bends away from the principal axis ✓ (3) The two light rays converge after passing through the convex lens.
✓ B. Q is correct since it bends towards the principal axis [Note that the question asks you to find out the ray diagram which is NOT correct}
c. R is not correct since the incident ray does not pass through the focus F
D. Sis not correct since the incident ray is not parallel to the principal axis. 41. B
For a distant object, the image must be real, inverted and formed at the focus of the convex lens.
34. D
.
(1) The image should be inverted.
✓ (1) Since refracted light rays actually pass through the :image, thus the image is real.
✓ (2) The image must be diminished since the image distance is less than the object distance.
✓ (2) Parallel incident rays converge to focus ⇒ f= 10 cm
✓ ( 3) Light rays between lens and mirror is still parallel, regardless of the distance between mirror and lens. (3) The student can see the real image directly without the use of screen.
PC-WA4-MS/07 PC-WA4-MS/08
1
DSEPhysics -Section C: M.C. Solution DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution
WA4 :Lenses WA4: Lenses
42. D 47. B
✓ (I) Since the in1a.ge is magnified, it must be a convex lens. Only convex lens can give magnified image. convex lens
✓ (2) Since the image is erect, the image must be virtual
✓ (3) Since the image is virtual, it must be at the same side as the object. illuminated
object '.
'· f
43. B principal axis
+
0
F'
From the above figure, the focal length is about 9 cm, i.e. between 8 cm and IO cm.
A ray parallel to the principal axis should be diverged from the focusF.
48. C
A ray through the optical centre should pass without bending.
• (1) The image ofthe fish at the apparent depth is a virtual ima.ge.
A ray emitted from the bottom of the object should seem to be emitted from the bottom of the image.
• (2) The image given by a magnifying glass must be virtual. erect and magnified
✓ (3) The image formed on the screen is a real image.
44. D
Images formed by a concave lens have the following properties :
* virtual
49. D
* erect
The lens is a convex lens, i.e. a converging lens. Only ray Sbends towards the principal axis.
* diroi.nished
* form in the region between the focus and the lens
50. C
✓ (1) Only convex lens can form real image onto the film.
45. A
• (2) Concave lens cannot form real image onto the film.
I
✓ �) The image is real since the sensor (film) has to receive light to record the infun:nation.
A magnifymg glass is a convex lens.
The image formed is virtual, erect and magnified.

51. C
To give a magnified :llrutge, the linear m agnification m > 1, and.image distance v > object distance u,
46. D
Thus, the distance LS should be increased and the distance OL should be decreased.
Therefore, move O towards L and move S away from£ can achieve this.
52. B
• (1) The parallel rays should converge to a point at the focal plane after passing through the c'?llverging Jens.
• (2) In this figttre, ray© is not COITeCt since it bends away frotn the principal axis •
However, ray @ is correct since it bends towards the principal axis.
✓ (1) Height ofiinage is halfof that of object, giving a magnification of O5.
✓ (2) Only concave lens can give a rumi::oi.shed and virtual image..
✓ (3) Draw a ray parallel to the principal axis and diverge from the image,
the intersection with the axis gives the focus. The focal length is 20 cm. ✓ (3) Both two rays are correct since they bend towards the principal axis after refraction.
DSE Physics · Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA4-MS/09 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA4-MS/10
WA4 :Lenses WA4:Lenses
53. D 60. B
As the image is erect (virtual) and diminished, the lens must be a concave lens. As the two incident rays are parallel, the two refracted rays DlUSt meet at the focal plane.
If the lens is moves away :from the paper, object distance increases, image distance would also increase.
Thus, the vertical plane containing band c is the focal plane and bis the principal focus.
As the image moves closer to the focus, the image size would decrease.
As the ray XY is parallel to the principal axis, the refracted ray D111St pass through the principal focus b.
54. A
61. A
X By .!_ = .!_+.!_
f U V
1 1 1
--=-+-
✓ (-10) 00) v
(1) The light bulb is now beyond the focus F.
If the lens L is moved closer to X, Xcan then be at the focus and gives a parallel beam of light rays. v = -Scm
✓ (2 ) If the convex lens has a focal length longer so that the light bulb Xis at the focus, v (S)
then a parallel beam ofl ightrays can be produced. m= = l = 0.5
-;; ( 0)
(3) Concave lens is a diverging Jens, and it can never produce a p_arallel beam of light rays.
62. A
55. C
The two parallel rays X and Y meet at P, thus P is one of the focus on the focal plane, and R is the principal focus. By.!_=.!_+.!_
f U V
For a light ray parallel to the principal axis, the refracted ray must pass the principal focus R,
y y y :. m = ...!_ v - l
thus ray Z will pass through R.. -=-+- :. 2'...=m+l
! U V f
By slope�interceptform: y = mx + c, slope oftbe graph is...!..

\ 56. D
f
✓ A. The image of a concave lens must always be virtual and erect
slope=..!. = l.S-0.5 .·. f= 10cm
✓ B. The image ofa concave lens must always be diminished. f 25-1 5
✓ C. Since the image must be diminished, m < 1, v < u, OR

thus the image distance must be shorter than the object distance. Wbenm = 1, v = 20cm.
• D. Even the object is placed at the focus, the image is still between the lens and the focus. Wbenm = l,u = v = 2f :.f"-'l0cm
57. D 63. D
Since the image is magnified, the lens must be convex. since only convex lens can give a magnified image. By v = m u = (2)(15) = 30 cm
Since the image is virtual. it must be at the same side as the object,. thus the lens D111Stbe at position Y. For a virtual image, vis(-) in the lens formula.
1 1 1
-=-+-- :. f= +30cm
58. C ! 05) (-30)
For a converging lens, f < u < 2f gives areal and magnified image. The lens is convex with fucal length 30 cm.
Thus, object distance 40 cm that is greater thanf of30 cm but less than 2fof 60 cm will give a real and magnified image.
64. D
59. D Image is real: 1 1 1 1 1 f=+Scm
-=-+-=-+--
A real image formed by the convex lens mustbe inverted. ! U V (12) (24)
Thus, the dotted arrow shifts from the left to the right and 1 1 1 1 1
Image is virtual : -=-+-=-+-- /=+24cm
the bead ofthe dotted arrow shifts from the bottom to the top. ! U V (12) (-24 )
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. Solution PC-WA4-MS/ll DSE Physics - Section C : MC. Solution PC-WA4-MS/12
65. B 72. C
By v =mu= (2)(15) = 30cm ✓ (!) ffan object is placed atX, the image is real and fonned at Y.
For a real image, the image distance is (+) in the lens formula. To give a real image, the object must be placed beyond the focus.
1 Thus, OXis longer than the focal length, that is,/is shorter than 20 cm.
By_!_=.!. + .!. :. ..!_=--+-' - :.f = +10cm
J u v / 05) 90) • (2) Ifthe object is shifted towards the left, the inlage would also shift towards the left,
The lens is convex with focal length IO cm. thus OY should decrease.
✓ (3) Ifan object is placed at Y, the image would fonn atX.
66. A As the image distance O!'is shorter than the object distance OY,
that is, v < u, thus m < 1, the image is diminished
For a convex lens, u <Jgives a virtual. erect and magnified image.
Thus, object distance IO cm that is less 1:banfof20 cm will give a virtual, erect and magnified image.
73. B
• A T:4e incident ray emitting from the bottom. of the object should diverge from the bottom of the image,
67. B
not from the top of the image.
Assw:ne the object is at the left hand side of the convex lens.
✓ B. The incident ray emitting from the bottom. ofthe object cmrectly diverge from the bottom ofthe image.
Since the object distance 2/ > u > f, the image is real, inverted, magnified and at the right hand side of the lens.
When the object moves leftwards away from the lens,
(j) the real image at the other side also moves leftwards, that is, towards the 1e.os
"' as thehnage is magnified, the speed of the image is faster than that of the object
F'
68. A
I I I
By.!_,,,.!_+.!_
f U V
--=-+-
(-10) 00) V
:. v = -5cm
• C• The incident ray emitting from the top ofthe object should diverge from the top of the image,
not from the bottom of the image.
m=!'.=�=0.5
u (10) • D The incident ray emitting from the top of the object should diverge from the top of the image,
not from the bottom of the image.
69. A
A magnifying glass is a convex lens. The image formed is virtual, erect and magni£ed. 74.
I I I
-=--+-
70. v u f
I
-:--+
I 1 Compared with the slope-interceptform ofa straight line :y = mx + c
v u f The slope of the line must be equal to - 1 and they-intercept is l /f.
Compared with the slope-intercept form of a straightline :y = m x + c If the lens is replaced by another lens of longer focal length, the slope is still equal to - L
The slope of the line must be equal to - 1 and they-intercept is 1 /f. As fis increased, I /f is decreased, therefore, they-intercept should decrease,' as shown in option D.
If the lens is replaced by another lens of shorter focal length, the slope is still equal to - I.
AsFJS decreased, I // is increased, therefore, they-intercept should increase, as shown in option D. 75. C
Assume the object is at the left hand side of the convex lens.
71. A Since the objf:ct distance u > 2/, the image is real, inverted, diminished and at the right hand side ofthe lens.
✓ (!) Concave lens is a diverging lens, thus the light ray bends away from the principal axis. When the object moves rightwards towards the lens,
• (2) Since the ray is incident towards the focusF', the refracted ray should be parallel to the principal axis. © the real image at the other side also moves rightwards, that is, away from the lens
• (3) If the refracted ray is diverged from the focusF, the incidentray should be parallel to the principal :i\XIB. "' as the image is dn.nmished, the speed ofthe image .is slower than that of the object
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA4-MS I 13 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA4-Q/0l
WA4:Lenses WA4:Lenses I
76. D The following list of formulae may be found useful :

For a concave lens, the image must be virtual. thus vis negative.
Equation for a single lens
1 1
... -=-+--
1 :.f=-60cm
! (30) (-20)
For a convex lens, the focal length must be positive, thus/is + 60 cm..
. 1 1 1 :. v = -60cm
··-=-+- Part A: HKCE examination questions
(60) (30) ,
Since v is negative, the image is virtual, and the image distance is 60 cm. 1. < HKCE 1979 Paper I- 5 >
The box A in the Figure below represents an optical device capable offunning an image J ofa given object O as shown.
77. I
. 1 1 1
t
+-- .·. f= -20cm
(25 ) (-11.1) 0
f
Since the focal length is(-), itis a concave lens. Observer's eye
(a) What is the optical device as represented by A? (1mm)
(b) State whether the image formed is real or virtual
Z. < BKCE 1984 Paper I- 6 >

(a) Descnbe briefly with the aid ofa ray diagram, a simple laboratory method that can be used to determine the focal length
ofaconvexlens. (4marks)
PC-WA4-Q/02 PC_-WA4-Q/03
1 1
,. (b) 2. (b) (iv) Explain, with. the aid of a ray diagram, why an image cannot be formed on the screen when the distance between the
Jens and the ruler is smaller than the focal length of the lens. (3 marks)
Convex
;,
l�s
The figure shown above is a simple experimental set•up to study the image formed by a convex lens. The translucent
ruler is an illuminated object, the position of which tentains unchanged throughout the experiment The position of the
lens is adjusted so that a sharp image of the ruler is fonned on the screen.
(i) Suppose that the distance between the lens and the ruler is 25 cm and that the focal length of the lens is 20 cm.
What n:tust be the distance between the lens and the screen? Draw a scaled diagram in the figure below to iind the
answer. What is the magnification of the iinage? (4:marks)
3. < HK.CE 1987 Paper I - S >
The figure below shows an object AB in front of a concave lens with foci F a.ndF'. p, q, rands are incident rays.
(ll) If the screen is now moved a few centimetres towards the object, how would you adjust the position of the lens to
give a sharp image on the screen again? (2 marks)
(iii) Keeping its position unchanged, the lens is now replaced by another convex lens of shorter focal length, and the
screen is adjusted to give a sharp image. How would the magnification ofthe image be affected? Explain briefly.
(2 marl<s)
(a) Draw the refracted rays ofp, q, rands and the image of AB on the above figure.
(b) State the nature (real or virtual, erect or inverted) of the image. (2 mruck.s)
(c) Fmdthem.agnification. (2 ""'"")

DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC- DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA4- /05
WA4 Q Q
WA4 :Lenses - /
0 41 1 WA4: Lenses
4. < HK.CE 1989 Paper I - 6 > 5. <HKCE1990Paperl-6>

h
An obje ctof ci ght4 cm placed in front ofa lens produces an image of height 8 cm on a screen. The object and the :image The figure below shows an experullental set--up to study image formation by convex lens A of focal length 40 cm. The object
are 60 cmapart. is an illuminated letter 'J' placed a few metres away. The tracing paper is moved to catch a slllllp image.
(a) (i) Draw a ray diagram on a graph paper, using a scale of 1 cm :representing S cm for the obj ect and image distaJJces
· and a scale of 1 cm repres enting 1 Cill. for the object and image heights to show TWO rays between the object and
the image. (3 tnarks)
(a) (i) What is the approximate di$tance between lens A and the image? Explain briefly. (2 IIl!ll'ks)
□
(1i) Sketch the: shape of the illla:ge seen by the observer.
(b) If the experiment is repeated with a convex lens oflonger focal length, 'MU!t will be the change in the size of the image ?
lliusl'rate your answer with a ray diagram. (4 marks)
(n ') From the ray di agram, measure (3 marks )
(1) the object distance,
(2) the image distance, and
(3 ) the focal length ofthe lens.

6. < HKCE 1992 Paper 1- 3 >
A student bolds a lens close to bis eye to look at some small print on a paper. The image of the letters "EX" is shown in the
Figure below. The magnification is 3.
(iif) What is the

BR< t �AM\RA 110H
(1) .magnili cation and
(2) nature
(a) %at kind oflens is used in the above figure? Explain briefly. (2 m,rl<s)
ofthe image? (3 marks )
(b) DcscnDe the change in the magnification and nature of the image when the object is rooving from nearly touching the
lens to far away from the lens. (6 marks ) (b) State the nature (real or virtual, erect or inverted) of the image. (2-"')
lI
6. {c)
WA4:Lenses
PC-WA4- QI 06
The p aperisplaced at a distance of8 cm from the lens In the figure below,ABr epresen.ts the object, andp q are two
.
incident rays A scale of 1 cm representing4 cm for the object distance is used.
.
,
I I <BKCE 1994 Pap e r I-3 >
WA4:Lenses
PC-WA4-Q/07
I
A student uses the set-u p shown below to study the image for.ma6on ofa lens Anillt.llllinated object is placed a distance of
.
20 cm from the lens A screen fs placed on the other side of the lens. When the screen is moved to a point 60 cm from the
Q
.
lens, a sharp illlage is formed on the screen.
(a) What kind of lens is used in the experiment ?
(b) Is the image real or virtual? (I m&k)

Q
(c ) In the Figure shown below, AB represents the illUI!linated object andp, q and rrep rcsents the incident1ays.
(i) Draw the refracted rays ofp andq andthe image ofA1J in the above figure
. (4ma.tks)
(ii} From fue ray diagrun, measure
(1) the ima ge distance

,
2) the focal length ofthe ens. (2 marks)
( l
(i) Draw the refracted 1ay s of p, q and rand the :image of AB in the figure Shove. (4m,uks)
(ii) Find theDlagllification of the ima ge. (2-ks)
(d) Ifthe paperis placed closer to the lens, how wouldth.e size of the image and the image distance be affected ? illustrate
'
youranswer itharaydiagrat:n.
w
(4marks)
(lit) Find the focal 1engthofthe1ens (! m&kJ
.
(d) How would the image fonned on the screen be affected when the upper half of the lens is covered by opaque paper ?
(2m,uks)
(e) Descn"be briefly a simple laboratory roethod to measure directly the focal length of the lens. Dlustrate your answer with
a ray diagram. (4 marks)
t
(e) If he paper is moved away from the lens to a position beyond the focus the student finds th.at a clear image cannot be
,
observed, Explain briefly. (2 marks)
I
8.
WA4 :Lenses
<HKCE 1996:Paper I- 1>
PC-W A4-Q / 08
11
I
8.
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA
4-Q
/09
(c) The iJ.lmninated letter is now placed closer to the lens. In the Figure below, .AB represents the letter and the path ofa ray
from A through the lens is shown.
I
A
--��---;------ Principal axis

In Figure 1, the image ofan illuminated letter 'J ' funned by a lens is caught by a translucent screen. 9
(a) (l) What kind oflens is being used? Explain your answer. (2m,w) Lens
(i) In the above Figure, draw the path of ray from A which passes through the optical centre of the lens and construct
the h:nage ofAB. (3 marks)
(it) Sketch the s'rulpe of the image seen by the observer. (2,n,rl<s)
(ii) State an application of the lens in which an image like that shown in the above Figure is formed. (1 maxk)
(fu) Comment on the following statement:

(b) Figure 2 shows the relation between the image distance v and the object distance u. After adjusting the position of the screen. the image formed in the above Figure can still be caught (2 marks)
9. <HK.CE 1999 Paper I- 8 >

An o'aject is placed 40 cm in front of a convex lens of focal length SO mm. In the following figure, AB represents the object
andp, q and rare incident rays. A scale of l cm representing SO mm is used.
(a) Draw the refracted rays ofp, q and r and the image ofAB in the below figure. (4 marks)
20
'++4-
· '
. ;··:--j_ ctn
i::r.:
0 +; -I 20 40 60
(i) Findthemagnification ofth.eimagewbenu = 18 cm. (2maxks:)
(h) Find the value ofu w.ben u "' v.. Hence find the focal length ofthe lens. (3 marks)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA4-Q/IOI DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA4-Q/ 1111
11
9. (b) If the convex lens is replaced by another conve x lens of focal length 100 nun and the object remains at 40 cm from the 11. < lIKCE 2001 Paper I- 3 >
lens, how would the size ofthe . image be affi:ctcd ? IDusttate your answer with a ray diagram. (4 marks)
A student holds a lens above a picture and the imAge observed is shown in the abClve figure.
,- (a) What kind of lens is used by the student? Explam your answer.
(b) Sketch a ray diagram to show how the image in the above figure is formed.
10. <HKCE2000Paperl-l>
An illuminated object is placed 30 cm.in front ofa convex lens and a sharp image is formed ona screen on the other side of
t
the lens. The image is of he smi.e size as the object.
12. <HK.CE 2002 Paper I - 11 >

(a) Is the image real orvirtual? Explain your 11n5wer.
{b) In the below figure, draw a ray diagram to showhow the image of the illuminated object is formed.
Kittydesigns a simple peephole as shown in the above .figure which is i!lstalled at an entrance door to identify visitors. The
peephole consists ofa metal tube with a concave lens of focal. length 10 em fixed inside.
(a) A visitor stands at a distance 30 cm in front of the peephole (see Figure 1).
''T' ·i:r-r�¥.-r-E� .:2tf.f.

,+t+;
Hence, or otherwise, detennine the focal l ength ofthe lens. (4n,,rks)

i
() In Figure 1, dxawtherefractedrays ofthe three incident rays and the image formed (4m,m)
WA4 :Lenses
12. (a) (ii) Find the magnification ofthe image formed.

P C-
WA4 Q
- /
12
(2 nmrl<,)
I I
13.
WA4:Lenses
<HKCE 2004 Paperl-11 >

PC-WA4-
Q
/ 1311
---t;�--- ------- .....,,
--
//,,., .,..---
--
(b) Suggest one reason to explain why the concave lens inside peephole camiot be replaced by a convex lens. ,// �--..-1-''-I '\\
I \
I :
\' r---1--"- ,!
Figure 1
(o) \,, aperture 1 mm �/ /
,
--------,___________' 55 - ,- ------/
\ : screen
\., I
\f projector
"
",,
/trolley
The Fiwze above shows the top-view of the peephole. The metal tube will only allow Kitty to see those images formed
in the shaded region. Now a visitor stands at a point P and Kitty cannot see hlm through the peephole. Peter designs a simple slide projector {see Figure 1). A slide is placed in front of abright light source. A sbaxp image of the
slide formed by a lens is projected onto a screen. The focal length of the lens is 40 mm and the distance between the slide
' '
p::r
tt_,.. "' -.... ..
,:CO and the lens can be adjusted within the range of41 to 55 mm.
(a) What kind of lens is used in the projector? Explain your answer.
' ' '
r i.;- •
,-+r -,-r-i:'.' -,- -!
.:-: 1,
(b) The projector is placed on a trolley in front ofa screen (see Figure 1). The lens is placed at 50 mm.from the slide.
(i) In Figure 2, draw aray diagram to show how the image ofthe slide is fonned by the lens. (4 """1<,)
Figurc2
(i) Explam. by drawing a rey diagram in Figure 2, why Kitty cannot see the visitor. (3 """1<,)
(it1 The lens is now replaced by another concave lens ofa shorter focal length and Kitty can just see the visitor at P. In
Figure 2, locate the image observed and find the focal length ofthis lens. (4 marks)
PC-WA4-Q/14 PC-WA4-Q/15
I
13. (b) (ii) F'lnd the magnification of the image fonned. 14. <BKCE2005PaperI-4>
(Ul.) Peter finds that the size of the image fonned on the screen is too small.
(I) Without replacing the lens, descnl,e a method to increase the size of the image fanned on the screen.
(2m,w)
Figure2
(2) Karen suggests that the size of the image can also be increased by replacing the lens with one that has a focal
lengfu of 60 lX1Dl. Explain whether Karen's suggestion will work or not (2 marks)
Figure I shows a paper with some letters 'J' printed on it The paper is placed behind a glass filled with water. Figure 2
shows the image of the letters fonned by the glass of water.
(a) State the nature of the image funned (erect or inverted, .magnified or diminished, real or virtual). (2marl<s)
(o)
(b) Jason holds a lens in front of the paper in Figure I and finds that the ii:nage funned is of the same nature as that fonned
by the glass ofwater.
(i) What kind of lens is held by Jason?
(ii) Sketch a ray diagram. to show how the image of the letters is funned by the lens.
The projector is designed so that the lens can be moved up and down by adjusting the rollers. The screen is now htmg at
a higher position. In order to project the image onto the screen again, Katen suggests that the lens should be-moved up
(see Figure 3). Is .Karen correct? Sketch a ray diagram to illustrate your answer. (3 marks)
Ii
'
15.
WA4:Lenses
< HK.CE 2006 Paper I- S >

PC-WA4-
Q
I 16
.11 I
16.
WA4:Lenses
<BKCE 2008 Paper I- 6 >

PC-
WA4
-Q/
1711
Figure 1 below shows a plastic lens L mounted on the rear window of a car. The driver can view bis friend David, and the Using the apparatus in the following figures, descdbe the procedures ofan experiment to find the focal length ofa cylindrical
sw:roundings at the back ofthe car through either the rear window or lensL as shown in Figure 2. convex lens. (4marks)
Figure 1
ray box with a single slit connected to a 12 V power supply
:.. David and the :.urroundings viewed

·.· through the rear window of the car
·,:- ;·, I'.- David and the surroundings
':•--;::· ;• ·.·:.:-:.,· viewed throughlensL
,
.' �- �:� cylindrical conve,c lens on a paper with its optical centre at the
(a) WhatkindoflensisL'l Explainyouranswer. (2 marks) intersection O of two perpendicular lines AB andXY, the lineXY
is the principal axis of the lens
(b) Suppose that David in Figure 2 stands at 60 cm from lens L of focal length 30 cm. In Fi gure 3, David is plotted as AB.
Draw a ray diagram to show how the image of David is formed by lens L. Use a horizontal scale ofl cm to 10 cm.
(4marl<s)
Figure 3
(c) State one advantage of using lens L. (1 mark)

II
1
17. <HKCE2009Paperl-5>
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-Q/18
An ob ject.HK is placed in front ofa lens Z, A light ray x fromH passes through the lens as shown in the Figure below.
18. <RKCE2010Paperl-5>
WA4:Lenses
PC-WA4-Q/19
Identical letters are printed on a paper. One of the letters is observed under a lens as shown in Figure 1.
jmage ofthe
letter viewed
tbrwgh the lens
FJg w-, 1
(a) What kind oflens is used? Explain you answer.
(b) The height of the printed letter "A" is 2 cm. The lens is placed 4 cm above the paper. The linear magnification of the
image is found to be 1.5. In Figure 2, 0 andL show the positions of the printed Jetter "A" and the lens respectively .
(a) Explain whether the lens is convex or com:ave.

principal axis oflens
(b) ( i) Construct the image of HK in the above Figure.
(Ii) Hence, find the linearmagnification ofthe image.

(3 marks)
(l mark)
F.igure2
-2cm
In Figure 2,
(i) drawanarrowtoshowtheimage ofO. (2made;)
(tl ) add one suitable light ray to find the focal length of the lens.
Focal length = ____ cm
(c) Mark the position of the principal focus Fin the above Figure. (1 mark) (c) The lens is then placed at a distance twice the focal length above the paper• .State the :natw:e of the Image. (2 marks)
(d) Draw the refracted ray of ray yin the above Figure. (1 mark}
19. <HKCE2011PaperI-4>
WA4:Lenses
PC-WA4-Q/2011
It is known that the refractive index of glass is different for light of different wavelengths. Figure (a) shows a blue light ray
WA4 :Lenses
Part B : HKAL examination questions

PC-WA4-Q/21
I
passing through a glass prism. Some angles are measured as shown. 20. < HKAL 2007 Paper IA� 5 >
A student performs an experiment on an optical bench to measure the focal lengfu of a conveilens. He places a lamp behind
a sheet of cardboard with a circular hole covered by a piece of translucent paper and tries to locate a sharp image of the edge
of the hole on a screen. The object distance and image distance are denoted by u and v respectively.
glass prism
Figure (a)
(a) Detennine the refractive index of glass for blue light.
(a) Suggest ONE way to make it easier to focus the image on the screen.
(b) Now, the blue Iightra'f is replaced by a red light ray as shown in Figure (b). The dotted line ( - • - • - • - ) shows the
original path of the blue light ray. It is known that the refractive index of glass for red light is smaller than that for blue
light Sketch the path ofthe red light ray in Figure (b). (2 marks)
screen
(b) For a certain object distance, the student cannot obtain an image on the screen no matter how he adjusts the screen's
position. What would most likely be the reason? Explain briefly. (2 marks)
glass prism
Figure(b) (c) If the centre of the lens is covered by a small coin. what would be the effect on the :image formed on the screen J
(c) An object emitting red light is placed in fro nt of a convex lens as shown in Figure (c). The lens is made of glass. A E,pl,in bri,fly. (2 =ks)
sharp image is formed on the screen. The positions of the object and the lens remain UllChanged.
object emitting
X
red light
(d ) Suppose the object distance is exactly equal to the image distance and the separation between the object and the real
image is 40 cm.
y
(i) Draw a ray diagram to show the formation of the image by the o�ect.
convex lens screen
FigUre (c)
(i) Complete the paths ofraysx andyinFigure (c).
(llJ When the object is replaced by one emitting blue light, the image on the screen becomes blurred: Explain in which
direction should the screen be moved in order to form a shrup image. (2 marks)
(iii) Now the object is replaced by one emitting white light. Theoretically, it is impossible to form a sharp image on the
screen. Explain why. (2 marks) (ii) From the ray diagram. 'Write down the focal length of the lens. (1 matlc)
1 DSE Pbysics • Section C : Question
WA4:Lenses

PC- WA4 -Q / 22
11
22.
WA4 :Lenses
<]Il{l)SE 2012 Paperm-7>

A luminous objectPQ is placed 15 cm in front of a convex lens AB as shown in the Figure below.
PC-WA4-Q/23
1
21. < IDIDSE Practice Paper IB - 7 >

(a) The focal length of the lens is 5 cm.
A drop of liquid is placed on a thin glass slide above a plastic ruler. The side view of the set-up is shown in Figure (a).
Looking through the liquid drop, a magnified image of the number '9' on the ruler is seen as shown in Figure (b). (i) Use a graphical method to find the location of the image of the objeci. Clearly draw all the coru:truction lines on
the Figure and state the nature of ht e image. (4 m arks)
11111111111111 Ulljlll,111111
8 . · , ..10
plastic ruler liquid drop

:1\ plastic ruler
Q
p
Figure(a) FJgtu-e (b)
(a) A Jens can be used to produce an image with the same nature as h
t at produced by the liquid drop. Statethe type of lens
'
and explain your answer. (2 marks)
{b) The linear magnification of the number '9' is 1.4. Take the number '9' as the object, use the graph paper below to
(i) draw the image ofthe object, and
[li) draw one Iightra)'to find thefocal length of the liquid drop. (ii) Complete the path ofray r on the Figure to show how it travels after passing through the convex lens. (I mark)
You may neglect the effect due to the thin glass slide. (3mw)
(b) Suppose that a lens of focal length 10 cm is used instead while the size of the lens and the object distance of PQ from
the lens remai.n unchanged.
(i) Use the lens fum:mla to find the image distance. Fmd also the linear magnification of the image. (3 nwk,)
principal axis
(ii) Compare thebrightness ofthis image with that in {a). Explain.
Focalleng h
t oftheliquiddrop "" ___ mm
(c) If the refractive index of the liquid becomes smaller, ex.plain the change, if any, in the focal length of the liquid drop.
(2 marks)
1
23.
WA4:Lenses
< BKDSE 2013 Paper m - 8 >

PC-WA4- /
Q 24
I I
24.
WA4:Lenses
< HKDSE 2014 Paper m - 6 >

PC-W
A4-Q 2
/ 5
I
In the Figure below, A'B' represents the image ofan object AB formed PY a lensL (not shown) where XY is the principal axis In the below Figure, XY is the principal axis ofa thin spherical lens L while A, B are two parallel rays corning from a point P
ofthe lens. of a distant object (NOT shown).
principal
axis
y principal
1
(a) (i) Istheimagerealorwtual?
(a) WhatkindoflensisL? Explain.
(uJ What kind oflens is used 7 Explain your ansvver. (2 """°'l
(b) (i) Locate the image ofP (denoted it as point P'). (2 marks}
(u') Hence, detennine the focal length of the lens.

(b) (i) Locate the optical centre O oflensL and draw on the above Figure the position oflensL. (1 m,,k)
Focal, length = _______
(ti) By drawing an additional light ray, mark the principal focus F ofth.e lens and find its focal length. The horizontal
scale is 1 cm to 5 cm. (2 marks) (c) Risa ray coming from the same pointP; complete its path after passing through the lens. (1 m,,k)
Focal length "" _________ (d} Based on the situation shown in the nrJ diagram above, descn"be a silnple experimental method to determine the focal
length oflensL. (2marks)
(c) Draw a light ray to show how the eye E shown can see the image ofheadA through lens L.
(d) State an application oflensL in the situation as shown above. (lm,,k)

WA4 :Lenses
PC- WA4-Q I 6
2
I I DSE Physics - Section C : Question
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA
4 -Q 2
/ 7
I
2S. <BKDSE2016PaperIB-5> 25, {b) (i) When the Jens is placed at 18 cm from the object, use the graph to :find the corresponding separation between the
�:-;
lens and the screen. Hence calculate the magniiication of the image. (2 roarks)
observer
,..,4-- u ___,,,.._____
,
+--------
, D _________./ In the Figure below, AB repres� the illuminated object which is at 18 cm from the lens L. p, q and r are light rays from.AB.
Kitty uses the set-up in the above Fi g11te to study the imag e fonnation of a lens. The lens is placed at a distance u from an
illuminated object Oetter 'P�. An opaque screen is placed at a distanceD from the object so as to capture the image.
□
(a) (i) State the kind oflens 'USed. Explain your answer. (2 marks)
{ii) Sketch the image on the screen seen by the observer. (I =rl<J
op,qu, scmn
(b) The separation D is varied while the position of the lens is adjusted to fon:n an image once again on the screen. The
corresponding object distance u is obtamed for plotting a graph ofD against u as shown below.
Diem
(ii) Indicate the image formed by AB (denote it as I) and draw the refcacted- rays ofp, q and r. (3 marks)
(rii) Hence :find the focal length ofthe lens. The horizontal scale is 1 cm to 5 cm. (I nuuk)
Focal length= ______
(iv) Keeping the object and screen fixed in position, suggest where Kitty should move the lens to such that an image can
be fanned again on the screen,
State the ra tio height of this new image (2marks)

height of the original image
ulcm
0 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
WA4:Lenses
PC-WA
4- Q /
28 I DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-QS 01
/
BKEAA.'s Marking Scheme is p,rcpm:cd for the matkers' :reference. J1 should:not be mgardcd as a set of model 8llSWCtS.
26. < HKDSE 2018 Paper m - 6 > Students and teachers who SIC not involved in 1he nwkmg i,rocess are advised to intaptctthe Matkiug Scheme with care.
(a) You are given a ray box vmh a single slit (producing a fine light beam), a cylindrical concave lens, a plastic ruler, a
pencil and a piece ofpaper as shown in the Figure. Question Solution
1. (a) A is a convex lens. < OR converging lens> [!]
(b) The im,g, is virn>al. [l]
..
0
cylindrical
concave lens
, � 2. (a) The convex lens is used to face a distant object [!]
Describe how you would use the above apparatus to :find the focal length of the lens and state ONE possible source of
error in the experiment (5 maxks) and the image is captured by a screen. [l]
The distance between the lens and the screen is equal to the focal length of the lens. [l]
[!]
(b) In the figure below, L represents another cylindrical lens. A vertical pin used as the object is placed at 0, the image is
formed atlby the lens. The horizontal scale is 1 cm to 5 cm.
(b) (,)
1-H ....
-+ ""
principal
�t
-! -
:ti.
' '
' .--
, h -t .. -I
-H
< a light ray parallel to principal axis refracts to F correctly drawn > [l]
· (i) What kind oflens is used '7 Explain.
< a light ray passing through optical centre without change of direction correctly drawn> [l]
< if any one arrow is missed, deduct one mark >
Distance between the lens and the screen "" 100 cm < accept90 cm.to 110 cm> [l ]
(nJ Draw a suitable light ray to locate the principal focus F of lens L. Find its focal length.
Magnificati.onoftheima.ge ""4 <accept3.5to4.5> [l]
Focal length= _______ (2 mm!<,)
(iii) Complete the path for the ray p from point A. (lmarlc) (h) The lens should be moved away from the ruler. [2]
28. < HKDSE 2020 Paper lB -7>
27. <HKDSB2019 Ppaper-IB-6> Figure 7.I shows an optical fibre which consists ofa cylindrical glass core of refractive index n6 enclosed by
a transparent cladding ofrefractive index n c•
In Figme 6.1, AB n,presenls thnirtual image ofan d,je<t - by !em L. The magnifi<a!ion oftb.e image
is D.4. The horizontal scale is I t;m to 5 an.
cJa �ting (refractive index nc;
j-
' '' : ,. glass core (refractive index n g)
.
-!-H ' .:,. m
Figure 7.l
As shmvn in Figure 7.1. a point light source at O emits monochromatic light in all directions. Inside the fibre,
light can reaclI the right end of the fibre through many differeut paths making angles 8 with the axis OD. Two
of these. paths, OD and OABC, have been drawn for reference. Light ray OA makes an angle of 30° wlth the
axis OD and is incident at the core---cladding boundary at A with an angle ofincidence iA.
(a) (i) Find iA. (I mark)
···········-··••+••·······-····-··--····························.. •········································································'"·················
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• .. ••• .. ••--••--•••••·• .... ••••• .. ••••••••••••••••••••••• .. •••·•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••--•••••••·••••••••••••Ho••••••••
11
(ii) If iA is just greater than the critical angle of that boundary, estimate -lL. (2 marks)
"c
(iii) What phenomenon occurs at point A 1 State the condition needs to be satisfied by Osuch that this
phenomenon fails to occur. (2 marks)
(a) What kind ofIons is used? Explllin. (2 marks) (b) A narrow monochromatic light pulse (i.e. of a short duration) emitted at point O propagates with its energy
within 0 =- ±3O,o towards a light sensor located at the right end of the optical fibre. The respective emitted
and detected light pulses are represented below using the same scales.
light light
intensity lri+-+-f-+--l intenslty
(b) lndica1oonFigure 5.1 theJl""ition andhcigbt oftae object. (2maru) gure 7.2
(e) By drawing a suitablo light ray, !ocat:e anti 1IlllIX the position oflbe fi>cus, F, of the lens. Fmd the focal
length ofthckns. (3 llllO"ks) r'
Focal lengtb = ............................ '-"---'---'--....L+ time
light pulse emitted
time
light pulse detected
at point 0 at the right end
(<I) °":" a Jiglttray emerging from dleoQjectto iJlustmre how ti,e observer in tbe:figure oanS<e thenp A of
the-· · (2 madol)
(i) Exp lain why the light pulse detected is broader (i.e. of a longer duration) and with lower intensity.
Assume that the loss of energy of the light pulse clue to absorption by glass is negligible. (2 marks}
(ti) An engineer suggests changing the refractive index n, of the cladding in order to reduce the width of
the light pulse received. Should nc be increased or decreased? Or, will a change in n .c have no effect
on the pulse width? Explailt your choice. (2 marks)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA4-QS/ 02 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA4-QS/03
WA4 :Lenses WA4: Lenses
2. (b) ('ril.') Themagnificationdecreases. [!] 4. (a) {i)
[!]
(iv) The image becomes virtual [!]
[2]
3. (a)
< Correct scale> [!]

< Light ray passing through the optical centre correctly dmvn > [!]
< Light ray passing through the focus F correctly drawn> [!]
(tl) (!) object distance = 20 cm [!]
(2) image distance = 40 cm [!]
(3) focal length = 13.3 cm [!]

<accept 13.0 cmto 14.0 cm>
(ill) (I) magnification = 2 [!]
(2) natures of the image are real [!]

and inverted [!]
(b) The magnificationi.Dcreases first [!]

and then decreases .finally. [!]
<Each correct ray I ma:rk x 4 > [4]
< Correct position of image > [!] The nature of image is virtual [I]
and erect at first [!]
(b) The image is virtual and erect. (2]
and thenbecome real [!]
(c) Magnification m = 0.33 (± 0.03) [2] and inverted finally. (!]
' 5. (a) (i) The approximate distance is 40 cm. [1] 6. (d)

For a distant object, image is fonned at the focal plane of the lens. [1]
�-,,":::.:::::::_-::-- [2]
.::::.-.:�:�.=--..-c:::�---5-:J
--=t--
[I]
(ii)
[2]
(b)
[3]
Size of image decreases [1]

Image distance decreases [1]
(e) When object distance is greater than the focal length, the image becomes real [1]
Image size increases. [1] and forms belrind the observer's eye. [l]
6. (a) Convex.lens (OR Convcrginglens) [1] 7. (a) A convex lens is used. [1]
Since only a convex lens can give a magnified image. [1] (b) The image is real. [l]
(b) The image is virtual [1]

(c) (i) -
and erect [1]
(c) (i)
:J
-F
< 1 mark for each ray (solid line) > [3]

< Image at right position (solid inverted arrow}> [l]
< Image behind object> [1]
< Magnification = 3 > [1] (ii) ma.::'. (OR m • }!J_) [l]
u h,
< 2 correct rays> [2]
a 3 [1]
(ul (1) Image distance "" 24 cm [1]
(iii) Focal length "" 15 cm < from 14 cm to 16 cm is acceptable> [l]
(2) Focal length = 12 cm [1]
7. (d) The brightness ofthe image decreases. (2] 9. (a)

OR
The image becomes dimn:ler. (2]
(,)
(1]
The lens is used to view a distant object and (1]

the image is caught by a screen. (1]
The dist?.n.ce from the lens to the screen is equal to the focal length of the lens. (1]
8. (a) (i) Convex lens (1] <raypcozrectlydrmm> (1]

Only convex lens can form real image (1] <rayq correctly drawn> (1]
.r
< ray r correctly drawn> (!]
(u) (2]
< image correctly drawn> (!]
(b) (i) Whenu = 18cm,v = 36cm (1] (b) As shown in the ray diagram, the size of the image is increased. (!]
V
(1]
u
:r _- -
(11') u = 24cm (1]
J = 24x .!. [1]

2
= 12 cm (1]
(c) (i)
[3)
-'�--'------"+-------
I 0
Principal axis
Lorn
(Ii) Magnifying glass (1)

< ray diagram correct > [!]
(iii) False (1] < two rays correctly drawn > [!]
The image is virtual and cannot be formed on a screen. (1] < image correctly drawn > [!]
10. (a) The image is real [!] 12. (a) (i)
because it can be fonned on the screen [1]

+v
(b) "+i-
-<
" ' j
J
J
< 3 correct rays> (no mark for dotted rays or wrong direction) [3]
< image correct> (no mark for s.olid lines or inverted image) [1]
m = ! = 7.5 OR m =J!L= 2 .5
{ ii) [1]
u 30 h, 10
= 025 = 0.25 [1]
< m = 0.2 to 0.3 areacceptable>

< Image correctly drawn> [1]
(b) (i) Any ONE of the following :
*
< The ray passing through optical centre drawn> [1] [2]
The image fonned bya convex lens may be inverted.
*
< The ray parallel to the principal axis drawn> [1]
The image fonned may be magnified and it is difficult for Kitty to observe the image.
The focal length of the lens is 15 cm. [1] * The image formed may be real and forms behind Ki.tty and thus difficult fur Kitty to observe the image.
* The field of view of the peephole would become narrower when a conyex lens is used.
11. (a) Itisaconcavelens. [1] (c)
The image is erect and diminished. [!]
(b)
F 0 I
< A ray passing through the optical centre correctly drawn> [1]
< A ray pa:rallcl to the principal axis correctly refracted > [1] T
< Image cotrectl.y shown> [1]

12.
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution
WA4 :Lenses
(c) (i) Since the image 11 is outside the shaded region, Kitty cannotsee the visitor.
PC-WA4-QS/10
[l]
I
13. (c) Karenis correct.
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solu1ion
WA4 :Lenses
PC-WA4-QS/11
[!]
l1
<Two correct rays> [l]

< Position of the image /1 correctly marked> [!]
[2]
(it) Focal.length of the lens =:: 6 cm < 5 cmto 7 cmis acceptable> [ 2]
< The imageh should be formed at the boundary ofthe shaded reg ion> [!]
< Correct ray to locate the point of focus F' > [!]
0
13. (a) Itisaconvexlens. [l]
Since only convex lens can give a real image that can fon:n on the screen. [l]
(b) (i )
,,,,_
(•) The image is inverted, diminished
14. [!]
[!]
(b) (i ) convex lens < OR converging lens> [!]
(ii)
[3]
"�,
15. (•) L is a concave lens. [!]
Since the :image is erect and diminished. [!]
< Correct position of the lens> [!] (b)

< 2 refracted rays correctly drawJ1 > [!]
< Rays use solid line with arrows > [!]
< Image correctly drawn> [!]
(it) m = ! (OR m = �) UJ
u h.
4 ( Accept 3.2 to 4.5) [!]
(iii) (1) The projector should be moved away from the screen. [l]
The lens-to-slide distance should be decreased to re-focus the image onto the screen. [l]
(2) Since the focal length is larger than the object distaD.ce (41-55 mm) [!]
the image will become virtual that cannot be captured by the screen, thus it does not work [l]
1-=I
=====�"'s"'!"'�"':"'�=i:s"'!"'�"'·=c
15.
"'
(b) < correct position ofthe lens and the its conect symbol>
< correct ray passing through the optical centre >
P W A 4 • Q s t ll
"'
C
· o"'lu"'tion== "' "'
=:Question===S •
12
"' "' "' "' "' "'"' :e.l
[1] 18. (a) Convex lens
DSE Physics · Section C : Question Solution
WA4 :Lenses
P
C-WA4-QS/13
[1]
[l] Only convex lens can produce magnified image. [1]
< correct -rayparallel to the principal axis > [l]
< correctposition of the image at about 20 cm (no mark if solid line is used)> [l] (b)
(c) It can increase the field of view of the driver. [1]
16. Directali ghtraytothelens [11

which is parallelto XY. [1]
Mark on the blankpaper the point of intersection ofthe em.erg� light ray andthe principal axis. [1]
principal axis of lens
Measure the distance between the point of intersection and the optical centre by the ruler to give the fucal length. [1]
17. (a) SUlce the ray x div erges from thc:'principal axis, [1]
it is a concave lens. [1]
(b) (i) a:m:nrn:aJJ:t:DTIIIIJJ:r:tlictJJ::tIIctJ:O:IIctJTilI•J□.:r. ., 1:

..:i:.a: , .□1□,:r_I_rr, CTJTI:ITOCIITIJ
'"'"�"""""
2cm
(i) <correct image distance and image size> [1]

< erect, same side as the object> [1]
(ii) <correct light ray> [1]
-7 Focal length= 12cm <accept 10.8 - 13.2cm> [1]
(c) Real, inverted [1]

same size [1]
19. (,) n sini [1]

sinr
''
= sin60 °
+1· sin36°
,-r....-;-,.-=-
:!:t!±-t+iJ-+ ' : " 1·Cf:-
, t+l+=++FF,74
"' 1.47 [1]
< refracted ray ofx extended backwards > [1] (b) """"'
< :ray passing through optical centre is drawn> [1]
< correct image marked> [1]
[2]
(ii) m == 0.58 < accept 0.50 to 0.62 > [1]
(c) <Fmarkedatthelefl:side of the lens, at around 13 to 15 cm> [l] red light ray
(d) < The reftacte4. ray correctly drawn > [l]

19. (o) 0) 21. (a) Convex lens < OR converging lens> (!J
Only a convex lens can produce magnified image. [lJ
object emitting
red light
(b)
screen
< after refraction, the two light rays meet at a point at the principal axis on the screen > [1]
< no mark is givenifthere is no arrow>
principal axis
(ii) It is because blue light bends more in glass, the focal length of blue light is shorter. [l]
The screen should be moved towards the lens. [1]
(iii) White light consists of light of different colours. [I]

Image positions fur light of different colours are different. (1]
(i) <image position and height correct> [!J
(ii) < construction ray correct drawn> (!]
20. (a) Add a mark, e.g. a cross, on the translucent paper. [1]
< the following construction ray is also acceptable to find the focal length>
(b) The object distance is less than the focal length of the lens. [1]
The image would be virtual and cannot be f01med on the screen. [!]
OR
The object distance is equlU to the focal length of the lens. [!]
The image would be at infinity and cannot be fon:oed on the screen. [!]
principal axis
(c) The whole image can be seen but become dimmer Qess bright), [!]
since less light is refracted by the lens. [!]
Focal length = 17.5 mm < accept 17-18 ll!Ill> [1]
(c) The focal length of the liquid will increase, [1]

since an incident ray parallel to the principal axis of the liquid will bend towards the principal axis less
after passing through the liquid. (1]
< object and image conectly drawn > [!] < accept the explanation by drawing>
ri
< two rays correctly drawn > [1] refracted ray if the refiactive·
< if any one arrow is missed, deduct one mark> �-�;;'.!li quid" .,,.Uo,
(ii) /= IO cm [1]
D
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA4-QS / 16 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA4-QS/17
22. (a) (i) Nature of image: 23. (a) (i) Virtual [!]
,e,l [!] (ii) It is a convex. lens. < OR converging lens> [!]
inverted, diminished [!] Only convex lens can give a magnified image. < virtual and erect image is NOT accepted> [!]
(b)
' principal
,xis
<A light ray passing through the optical centre> [!]

< A light ray parallel to the principal axis converges to the focus> [!]
(ii) <ray r correctly completed> [!]
I I I
( b) (l) -=-+- Q.) < correct position of O marked in the figure and lens drawn correctly> [!]
/ U V
(ll) < correct light ray drawn to locate F > [!]

I I I
--�-+- [!]
(10) {15) V Focallength = 17cm <accept 16.0 to 17.Scm> [!]
V"" 30cm [!] (c) < correct light ray drawn from A 'to E> [!]
< incident light drawn from A, all correct, including solid line and dotted line> [!]
V
u (d) AnyONEofthefollowing: [!]

[!] * magnifying glass
* glasses :fur long.sighted eye
(ii) Same amoimt oflight is refracted by the lens inboth cases.
* simple microscope
For the magnified image in (b) (i), same amount ofligbt is distributed over a larger image, [!]
thus, the image is dimmer compared to that in (a). [!]
24. (a) Lis a conVex lens < accept converging lens> [!]
OR
Reason (any ONE of the following) [!]
Same amount oflight is refracted by the lens in both cases.
* since the ray A converged (OR bent) to the principal axis afterrefracted byL
For the image in (b) (i), the image distance is greater, light intensity decreases as distance increases, [!]
* a realimage (OR inverted image) can be formed
thus, the image is dimmer compared to that in (a). [!] * the object and the image are at the opposite sides of the lens
DSE Physics • Section C : Question Solution PC-WA4-QS/18 DSE Physics • Section C : Question Solution PC-WA4-QS/19
WA4 :Lenses WA4:Lenses
24. (b) 25. (b) (h)
L
"
''
..l...!..
prin cipal ' ' princi,,al
,xi, ' axis
"±
{i) < the ray A passing through the lens without bending> ( no mark is awarded ifno mow ) [lJ < Intage I correctly drawn> [!]
< theposition of P' correctly marked> [lJ < Iutys p and q correctly drawn with arrows> [1]
< Ray r correctly drawn with arrow> [1]
(ii) Focal length = 20 cm [1]
(iii)/= 12cm <accept 11.5cm to 12.Scm> [1]
(c) <refracted ray ofR travels to P' > [1]
(iv) Move the lens 18 cm farther away from the object (OR towards the sCI"een). [1]
( no mark is awardedlfno arrow)
Height ratio = 1 : 4 [1]
(d) Face the convex lens towards a distant object Capture the sharp image onto a screen. [1]
The distance between the lens and the screen is the focal length of the lens. [1]
26. (a) On the paper, draw a straight line to represent the principal axis,markapoint Oto represent the optical centre.
Place the lens on the paper so that the lens isperpendicular to the principal� and its optical centre on O. [11
25. (a) (i) Convexlens [1] Direct a light ray parallel to the principal axjs to the lens and trace the path Ofthe emergent ray on thepaper. [!]
Only convex lens can form real image that can be captured by the screen [1] Extend the path ofthe emergent ray backwards and locate the intersection point Fon the principal axis. [!]
Measure the distance ofF from 0, which gives the focal length ofthe lens, [1]
(ii)
[1] < accept using diagram to simplify the description>
Source of error (Any ONE of the following) ; [1]

* The light ray may not be parallel to the principal axis.
(b) (i) image distance: v = 54 - 18 = 36 cm [lJ * Due to the thickness of the beam oflight, the path ofray may not be marked cmrectly.
Magnification: m = v =
36 = 2
[1]
* There is uncertainty in the reading ofthe focal length by using the plastic ruler.
u 18 < accept other reasonable answer>
--
DSE Physics . Section C : Question Solution PC-WA4-QS /20 Hong Kong Diploma of Secondary Education Examination
WA4 :Lenses 27. (a) Lis diverging/ CO'.l'l:Cllve.
°"1Y divergiag / CODCll'Ye ]em forms dittlinished, virtual
:i
26. (b) . L L
(b)
mJf. ,._
m tting5 an
th�- :i:J
r
' I+
' .
, rr
., .:�
,,Tl: "f -H
:8t
principal
- - : .. , --!--i-t•
....;... .. ' -1 4 -i"��·: ,x;, -;-.;
. +
':I- +' ,_++- '-1<+�· - . T
I·
• ,·. : I •
-:; iq, :-1-t- _..:...J-_
(i) Lis a concave lens (OR divergent lens) [!]

Since the image is erect (OR virtual) and diminished. [!]
(ii) Focallength a:: 30cm <accept 29 to 31 cm> [!]
< ray to findF correctly drawn> [!] Comet posltitJnm:lheigbtofobject
[ril) < refracted light ray ofp correctly drawn and extended backwards > [!]
(e) Conmra'jtolocatc,Faadfocm:F�nwftcd.
Focallength."'lC°cm
27.
(d) Corm::tnypfromtipofobjed;
2. Astronomy through history (Ji;.j:_<J!,i¥,i-ft, JIU!J

3. Orbital motions under gravity (:91"1J"rll(i.$Jt.Utli)
4. Stars and the universe (•!J..£:ft,*'ili)
Elective 2 -Atomic World (�-f-1!!:-:ff..)
L Rutherford's atomic model (LS'.l!:ii,W.-1-��)
2. Photoelectric effect ( if, 'llt!U:.I!.)
3. Bohr's atomic modelofhydrogen {.l!tllhtr i\...W.-ftlt�)
4. Particlesorwaves(�"T�i&'..)
5. Probing into nano scale (;Jl..fl,t#l,f--tt.fl-)
Elective 3 - Energy and Use of Energy (ll61!:;foll6ilf-{r,J-jtffl)
1. Electricity at home ( :t:.'w 11.111:t)
2. Energy efficiency in building (�1'1� /l6�!ll:.Jil.)
3. Energy efficiency in transportation ( it� 'lit� IJ6i.J¥.:AA:.Jil.)
4. Non-renewable energy sources (� "'f .jlj. :UE.ll-)
S. Renewable energy sources ("'f.Jli.i. IJ6i;lf.)
Elective 4 - Medical Physics (lffl-�#J:f£,$)
1. Making sense of the eye ( lllU1� l!1. 'it)
2. Making sense of the ear (JF,�itl. .go)
3. Medical imaging using non-ionizing radiation (JJ°F'lll:lt!t.ti6M��il$1t�)
4. Medical imaging using ionizing radiation ( 't#,!t.W.Af 1-�!Ht.�)
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAS-M/01 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAS-M/02
WA5: Wave Nature ofLlght WA5 : Wave Nature ofLlght
Use the following data wherever necessary: 4. < HKCE 1983 Paper II -18 >
'\Vhich of the following statements about the properties oflight is/are correct?
Speed of light in vacuum
(1) The speed oflight in vacuum is independent ofits wavelength.
(2) The wavelength oflight will chan ge when it enters a less dense medium.
(3) T he frequency of light will change when it enters a less dense medium.
The following list of formulae may be found useful : A. (1) only
B. (3) only
Fringe width in double-slit interference AD C. (I) & (2) only
t..y = D. (2) & (3) only
a
Diffraction grating equation dsin0=nA

5. < HKCE 1983 Pap er II - 21 >
Given that the approximate wavelength of red light is 7 x I 0-7 m, what is the ap proximate wavelength of an FM radi o wave ?
A. 3x102m
Part A : HKCE examination questions B. 3xl0-3m
C. 3xI0--7 m
I. <HKCE 1980 Paperll-35> D. 3xI0�m
An electromagnetic wave has a frequency of the order of 10 16 Hz. What should be the type of the electromagnetic wave?
Given that the speed oflight in vacuum is 3 x I03ms-1. 6. < HKCE 1985 Paper II -22 >
A. infra-red rays When light travels from an: to glass,which of the following statements is/are true?
{l) The speed of the light changes.
B. visible light
(2) The wavelength ofthelight increases.
C. ultra-violetrays (3) The frequency of the light remains unch anged.
A. (1) only
D. X-rays B. (2)only
c. (1) & (3) only
D. (2 ) & (3) only
2. < HKCE 1981 Paper JI - 23 >
Given the following types of electromagnetic waves : 7. < HKCE 1985 Paper II - 23 >
(1) radio waves A short pulse of microwave travelling at 3 x 108 m s-1 was used to detect the position of a stationary weather balloon. It was
(2) yellow light found that the microwaves reflected from the balloon were picked up 2 x 10-4 s afte r the pulse had been emitted from the
station. The distance ofthe balloon from the station was
{3) green light A. l.5xl04m
B. 3.0x104m
The waves listed in ascending order oftheir wavelengths are
C. l.5xl01Z m
A. (I)• (3), (2) D. 3.0 x 1012 m
B. (2), (I) , (3)
C. (3) , (!), (2) 8. < HKCE 1985 Paper II - 24 >
D. (3), (2), (!)
Wh ich of the following is in the correct order of increasing wavelengths ?
A. infra-red rays, X-rays, radio waves
B. infra-red rays, radio waves, X-rays
3. < HKCE 1982 Pa per Il - 14 > C. X -rays, radio waves, infra-red rays
Arrange the following electromagnetic waves in descendin g order of their wavelengths : D. X-rays, infra-red rays, radio waves
(!) vis ible light

9. <HKCE1986Papei:Il-26>
(2) X-rays
Which of the following is/are transverse wave(s) ?
(3) radio waves (I) wat erwaves
(2) sound waves
A. (!), (2), (3)
(3) X-rny,
B. (!), (3), (2) A. (1) only
c. (2), (3), (I) B. (1) & (2) only
C. (!) & (3) only
D. (3) '(!) ' (2) D. (2) & (3) only
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA5-M/03 DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WAS-M/04
WA5 : Wave Nature of Light WAS: Wave Nature of Light
10. <HKCE 1987 Paper Il-15 > 16. <HKCE 1989Paperll-28>
Which of the following has the shortest wavelength ? Arrange the following in ascending order of wavelengths.
A. X-rays (1) X-:rays
B. Microwaves (2) Microwaves
C. ·Radio waves (3) Visible light
D. Visible light
-
(4) Ult:ra--violetrays
A. (1), (2). (3). (4)
11. < JIKCE 1988Paper II-12> B. (2), (3). (4), (1)
visl.ble light C. (1), (4), (3), (2)
D. (2), (1), (3). (4)
ra&o
wav,,
I micro-
y
111 ultr,
-
violet
X-rays
,ays 17. <HK.CE 1990Paper II- 29>
II I
wav,
The figure above show$ the electromagnetic spectrum. Which of the fol lowing statements about Yis/are true?
(1) The frequency of Yis lowei: than that of visible light.
(2) Yis emitted by hot bodies. --red P s
-
(3) Y can be deflected by electric and magnetic field. Q X ny
A. (1) only
B. (3) only The diagram shows partof the electromagnetic spectrum. Which ofthe following statements is/are true ?
C. (1) &(2)only (1) The wavelength ofP is longer than that ofQ.
D. (2) & (3) ouly (2) The velocity ofP in a vacuum is smaller than that of Q.
(3) Q can be deflected by an electric field.
U. <BKCE1988Paperll-28> A. (1) ouly
B. (3) only
If the speed of radio waves in air is v1 and the speed of light in air is vz, which of the following is correct? C. (1) & (2) only
A. Vl>2VJ. D. (2) & (3) only
B. 2v1>Vl>V1
C. V1 =Vl
D. 2vi>v1>V2 18. <BKCE1990Paperll-11>
What happens to the wavelength and frequency of a :ray of light uit passes from water to air ?
13. < llKCE1988Paper n-29 >
Wavelength Frequency
When a light ray travels from air to water, how do the speed. the :frequency and the wavelength change ?
A. increases decreases
Speed Frequency Wavelength
B. decreases :remains unchanged
A. remains the same remains the same reiruuns the same C. remains unchanged increases
B. becomes smaller becomes greater remains the same D. increases remains unchanged
C. becomes smaller remains the same becomes smaller
D. becomes greater rem.aim the same becomes smaller
19. <HKCE 1991 Paper II-25>
14. < BK.CE 1989Paper 11-13 > Which of the following graph s correctly shows the variation of speed v against frequency f of1he electromagnetic waves in
A pulse of microwave of speed 3 x 108 m s- 1 is sent out to detect the position of a stationary weather balloon. The reflected vacuum 'I
microwave was picked up in 2 x 10-4 s after emission. What is the distance of the balloon from the station? A. B. D.
V V
c.
A. 1.5xl04 m
B. 3.0 x 1Q4m
C. 6.0 X 1()4 m
D. 1.5xl012 m
15. < HK.CE 1989 Paper II - 27 >

Which of the following descriptions about 1he nature oflight is/are correct ?
(1) The speed of light in a vacuum is independent ofits wavelength.
(2) There cannot be total internal reflection when light is travelling from air to water. 20. < HKCE 1992Paper II- 28 >
(3) Light travels faster in glass than in air. 'Which ofthe following is an application of microwaves in everyday life?
A. (1) only A, Rada<
B. (3) only B. Carbon-14 dating
C. (1) & (2) only C. Radiotherapy
D. (2) & (3) only D. Detecting cracks in railway track
WA5: Wave Nature of Light WA5 : Wave Nature of Light
21. <HKCEI992Paperll-27> 27. <B]{CE 1996 Paperll-26>
Given that the wa:velengths of visible light range from 4 x 10-7 m to 7 x 10-1 m, which of the following combinations of
wavelengths for infrared, red and violet lights is possible?
Infrared Red light Violet light Visible
X-ray, p light
Q Microwaves
A 1 x 10 4m 7xI0-7 m 4xl0-7m
B. lxJ0-7m 7x 10-1m 4xl0-7m
C. 1 xlo--4m 4x 10-1m 7xl0-7m Part of the electromagnetic spectrum is shown above. Which of the following statements is/are correct?
D. J X 1Q-7m 4x 10- 1m 7xl0-7m (1) Pis ultra-violet and Q is infra-red.
(2) The wavelength of Pis shorter than that of Q.
22. < HKCE 1993Paper II- 26 > (3) The speed of Pin vacuum is higher than that of Q.
Which of the following statements is/are true ? A. (1) only
(I) Light is a transverse wave. B. (3) only
(2) Light does not undergo diffraction. C. (1) & (2) only
(3) Light transmits energy. D. (2) & (3) only
A. (2) only
B. 3) only
(
C. (1) & (2) only 28. <HKCE 1997Paper n - 26>
D. (1) & (3) only Which ofthe following is an application of ultra-violet radiation?
A. Camera auto-focusing
B. Detecting cracks in railway tracks
23, < HKCE 1993 Paper ll-24 >
C. Detecting survivors buried in landslides
A radio station broadcasts at a frequency of94 MHz. Find the wavelength of the radio waves. D. Sterilization of drinking water
A. 0.31 m
B. 3.19 m
C. 31.91 m 29. < HKCE 1999Paper II -24 >
D. 3191 m
Which of the following equipment emit(s) waves which are electromagnetic in nature?
(I) a television remote ccmtrol
(2) a microwave oven
24. < HKCE 1994 Paper Il - 22 >
(3) an ultrasonic scanner for examining foetuses (babies not yet born)
Which of the following statemcn.1s concem3nginfra-red radiation is correct? A. (1) only
A. Infra-red is red in colour. B. (3) only
B. Infra-red can be detected by a Geiger-Muller counter. C. (1) & (2) only
C. Infra-red can be used to sterilize drinking water. D. (2) & (3) only
D. Warm.objects emitinfra_.red.
30. <BKCE2000Paperll-25 >

25. < HKCE 1994 Paper Il-21 >
Scientists have discovered that ozone molecules in the earth's atmosphere are being destroyed. Which of the following
Arrange ,the following electromagnetic waves in ascending order of frequencies. electromagnetic waves is mainly responsible for causing hazard to human health as a result of the damaging of the ozone
(1) X-ray, layer?
(2) Ultra-violetrays A gamma radiation
(3) Radio waves B. visible light
A. (1), (2), (3) C. infra-red
B. (2), (1), (3) D. ultra-violet
C. (3), (!), (2)
D. (3), (2), (1)
31. <.HKCE2002PaperII-27 >
Which ofthe following is/are the reason(s) for not over-using ultra-violet lamps to produce a suntan effect?
26. < BKCE 1996 Paper Il - 28 >
(I) Ultra-violet radiation is highly penetrating and will damage body tissue.
Which of the following is not an application of the corresponding electromagnetic wave ?
(2) IBtra-violet radiation has a strong heating effect and will damage body tissue.
Electro111agnetic wave Application (3) Over exposure to ultra-violet radiation may cause skin cancer.
A. IBtra-violet Camera autofocusfug A. (2) only
B. 1nfra-red Detecting survivors buried in landslides B. (3) only
C. Microwaves Satellite communication C. (I) & (2) only
D. X-rays Detecting weapons hidden in suitcases D. (1) & (3) only
WA5: Wave Nature of Light WA5: Wave Nature of Light
32. < HK.CE 2003 Paper II- 30 > 37. < HKCE 2010 Paper II- 37 >
'"""P"dgun
(stationary) 9 I I I/)
laser pulse
car (approaching the speed gun)
�
In the figure, a laser speed gun is used to check for speeding. A car is approaching the speed gun. The speed gun emits a
The photograph shows a digi tal video camera recorder. The recorder has a nighHhot fimction of capturing images in the laser pulse. The speed gun receives the reflected pulse from the car after 3.6 x 10-7 s. After 0.2 s, the speed gun emits
dark. Which of the following electromagnetic waves is employed by the reccrder in capturing images in the dark ? another laser pulse. The speed. gun receives the reflected pulse from the car after 3.1 x 10- 7 s. What is the estimated speed of
A. radio waves the car? Given that speed of the laser pulse is 3 x 108 ms-1.
B. infi'Hed A. 15.0 mS-1
C. ult:ra.-violet B. 20.1 ms~1
D. X-rays C. 37.5m s-1
D. 40.2m s-1
33. <HKCE 2004 Paper II- 24 >
A ship is equipped with certain devices. Which device is not an application of electromagnetic waves? 38. < BXCE 2011 Paper II - 13 >
A. the radar system Compare the tune taken for the following waves to travel a distance of 100 m.
B. the sonar system
T1 Water waves with frequency 0.5 Hz and wavelength. 2 m
C. the infra-red system for ni ght navigation
D. the wirf:less telecommunication system T2 Sound waves travelling at 340 m s-1
T3 Microwaves emitted by an artificial satellite
34. < HKCE 2005 Paper II -16 > The time taken in descending order is
A. T1>Tz>T3
Which ofth.e following shows the correct order of the relative positions of five electromagnetic waves in the electromagnetic
spcctrmn, in the order of decreasing wavelen gth ? B. Tz>T3>T1
A. microwaves, infra-red, visible light, ultra-violet, X-rays C. T;>T2>T1
B. microwaves, ultra-violet, visible light, infra-red, X-rays D. Ti > T; > T2
C. X-rays, infra-red, visi"ble ligh t, ultra-violet. microwaves
D. X-rays, ultra,.violet, visible light, infra-red, microwaves
35. <HKCE2007Paperll-17> Part B : BKAL examination questions

Which ofthe following phenomena demonstrate(s) that light is an electromagnetic wave?
(1) Light bends when it travels across a boundary from one medium into another. 39. <HKAL1981PaperI-43>
(2) Light reflects when it meets a polished metal surface.
(3) Light can travel :frtnn the Sun to the Earth. In Young's double slit experiment, which of the following can increase the separation oftbe interference fringes on the
A. (1) only screen?
B. (3) only (1) Increase the distance between the double slits and the screen.
C. (1) & (2) on ly (2) Increase the wavelength of the lighL
D. (2) & (3) only
(3) Increase the distance between the light source and the double slits.
A. (1) only
36. <HKCE 2009 PaperII-16> B. (3) ouly
Which of the following graphs showing the relationship among velocity ( v ), frequency (f) and wavelength ( A) of C. (1) & (2) only
electromagnetic waves in vacuum is/are correct? D. (2) & (3) only
(2) (3) V
.t=, .�. .l=.

(1) V
40. < HKAL 1989 Paper I- 22 >
When light of wavelength A is incident normally on a diffraction grating with p lines per millimetre, the second-order
ItlaXU!lum is at an an gle 0 from the central position. When light of wavelength 5.Y4 is incident normally on another grating
with 3p lines per millimetre, the first-order maximum is formed at an angle ¢ from the central position. Which of the
following relations is correct?
A. sin¢ = (5 sin 0) /12
A. (1) only B. sin¢= sin(50/12)
B. (2) only
C. (1) & (3) only C. sin¢= sin(150/4)
D. (2) & (3) only D. sin¢= (15sin0)/8
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. PC-WAS-M/09 DSE Physics - Section C : MC.
WA5 ; Wave Nature of Light WA5 : Wave Nature of Light
=
""""'�-
4L < JIKAL 1995 Paper IlA-14 > 45. <BKAL2002PaperilA-15>
In Young's double-slit experiment, which of the following combinations of monochromatic light, the slit-separation and the
sliMo-screen distance would produce the greatest fringe separation on the screen?
incident light-----+------,�f,E,--t1J------==
Monochromatic light Slit-separation Slit-to-screen distance un
A. red light Imm Im first-order

B. ,edlight 1mm / 2m
·c. red light 2mm Im When a monochromatic light passes through a dil'fraction grating, a pattem of maxima and mmima is observed as shown.
D. blue light Imm 2m Which of the following combinations would produce the largest angle &between the two first-order maxima?
"""
Grating (lines permm) Colour of light used
42. < HKAL 1996 Paper IIA - 12 > A. 200
B. 200 red
When light travels from glass to air, the emergent light would show an increase in C. 400 green
(I) frequency. D. 400 red
(2) wavelength.
46. <EIKAL 2003 Paper II.A- 19 >
(3) velocity.
A. (I) only A plane diffraction grating hii.ving a ruling of 5000 lines per cm. When monochromatic light of wavelength 500 nm is
B. (3) only incident normally onto it, which ofthe following descriptions is/are correct ?
C. (1) & (2) only (1) The spacing between the rulings is 2000 nm.
D. (2) & (3) only (2) The second-order maximum occurs at an angle of30° from the central � line.
(3) There is no third-order maximum in the diffracted pattern.
A. (1) only
B. (3) only
43. < HKAL 1997 Paper IIA- 15 > C. (I) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only
p
light som:ce • 47. < HKAL 2004 Paper II.A- 11 >
In a Young's double-slit experiment, a monochromatic light source is used. Which of the following methods would in,;rease
the fringe separation on the screen?
(1) Use a monochromatic light source oflooger wavelength.
In a Young's double-slit experiment, the light source gives out a monochromatic light of wavelength 400 run. If the path (2) Use a double slit with greater slit separation.
difference of light from the two slits Xand Y at point P on the screen is 3000 nm, which of the following is/are correct ? (3) Use a double slit with larger slit width.
· A. (1) only
(1) At pointP, the 7th dark fringe is observed. ·1 B. (I) & (2) only
(2) If the light source is moved closer to the slits, the fringe separation on the screen will incre�e. C. (2) & (3) only
D. (I), (2) & (3)
(3) If light ofwavelength 500 nm is used, pointP will become a bright fringe.
A. (1) only
48. < BKAL 2007 Paper II.A- IO>
B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only A beam of monochromatic light is incident normally on a diffraction
D. (2) & (3) only grating. The third-order maxima are found at angles of 45° from the
central line. What is the highest order of diffracted maxi:tnum that incident beam
can be observed ?
44. < HKAL 2001Paper II.A - 13 > A. 3,,i.order
b = Imm. B. 4th order
ramp•
"-:11I a = 0.01 m
c: 5th order
D. &II order
If 49. <HKAL2007 PaperIIA-11 >

� X "' ◊.lm I<------ D "" lm
In a Young's double-slit experiment, monochromatic light ofwavelength 550 nm is used. The fringes are formed on a scr�
A student prepares a double-slit :interference experiment as shown. a is the slit separation and b is the slit width. However, placed at LO m frru:n the double slits. If the separation between the.first and the fifth dark frulges is 5.0 mm, calculate the slit
no interference fringe can be observed on the screen. Which of the following improvements should be taken? separation of the donble slits.
{A) decreasex A. 0.3x104 m
B. decreaseD B. 1.1 x 104 m
C. increase b C. 4.4x 104 m
D. decrease a
D. 5.5 x 104 m
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAS-Milli DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAS-M/12
WAS: Wave Nature of Light WA5 : Wave Nature of Light
50. <BKAL2011PaperIIA-15> 54. Two identical monochromatic light sources cannot give interference pattern. The reason(s) is/are
Which of the following statements about a transmission diffraction grating are correct when monochromatic light is incident (1) the two light sources have different amplitudes.
onto fue grating ?
(1) The grating produces diffraction pattem on both sides of the central line. (2) the two light sources have different frequency.
(2) The angle of diffraction of the same order is directly proportional to the wavelength of the D,lcident light. (3) the two light sources do not have constant phase relationship.
(3) Agra.ting with smaller grating spacing gives greater diffracted angle of the first.maxima. A. (1) only
A. (1) & (2) on ly B. (3) only
B. (1) & (3) only C. (1) & (2) only
C. (2) & (3) only D. (2) & (3) only
D. (1), (2) &(3)
55. electric field

51. <BKAL 2012 PaperIIA-13 >
�t �
A student used the above set-up to produce a diffraction pattern on a screen. The filament lamp gives out white light. It was The above figure shows how the electric field of a monochromatic light wave varies with distance in air. Which description
found that part of the second-order spectrum overlapped 'With the third-order one. The student suggested the following about the colour of the light and its frequency is correct?
changes to eliminate the overlapping so as to obtain a pure second -order spectrum. Which of the following may be possible? colour freque ncy/ Hz
(1) Move the screen closer to the grating.
A. violet 5.0 X 1014
(2) Replace the grating by one with smaller grating spacing.
B. violet 7.5 X 10 14
{3) Insert a single slit between the filament lamp and the grating.
C. orange 5.0 x 1014
A. (l)only
B. (2) only D. orange 7.5x10 14
C. (3) only
D. None of the above
56. A diffraction grating of 4000 lines per cm is placed at a distance of0.75 m from a screen. A monochromatic light is directed
perpendicularly onto the grating. The two second-order fringes on the screen are at a separation of 68.6 cm. Calculate the .
wavelength of the monochromatic light.
A. 460nm
Part C : Supplemental e:xercise
t 520nm
52. A diffraction grating ruled with 500 lines per mm is illuminated nonnally by white light. If the wavelengths for yellow light C. 545nm \ .
and violet light are 600 nm and 400 run respectively, which of the following statements are correct ? D. 572nm
(1) In the :first order spectrum, the violet end is closer to the central bright fringe than the red end.
(2) The second-order image of yellow light coincides with the third-order image of violet light.
(3) There is no fourth-order image for violet ligbl.
A. (1) & (2) only Part D : BKDSE examination questions
B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) on ly 57. < HKDSE Sample Paper IA- 20 >
D. (1), U) & (3)
A YoUilg's doubie..slit experiment was performed using a monochromatic light source. Which change would result in a
greater fringe separation on the screen ?
53. Which of the following correctly gives the order of magnitude of the wavelengths of infra-red radiation and ultra-violet (1) Using monochromatic light source oflonger wavelength
radiation in air ?
(2) Using double slit with greater slit separation
Infra-red radiation ultra-violet radiation
(3) Using double slit with larger slit width
A. 10-2m 10..,m
A. (1) only
B. 10-sm 10·8m
B. (1)&(2)only
c. 10-2m 10- 10 m C. (2) & (3) only
D. 10-sm 10-lOm D. (1),(2)&(3)
WAS: Wave Nature of Light WAS: Wave Nature of Light
-
58, < HKDSE Sample Papei IA- 23 > 63. < BKDSE 2012 Paper IA- 20 >
-----...,-----�nu 0 :1:.......�
For a diffraction grating of 600 lines per mm, the diffracted red light (657 nm) coincides with the diffracted violet light
(438 nm) at an angle of diffraction of 52° . What are the respective orders·ofthe diffracted red light and violet light 7
-�::::i..::
incident light :;:,
red violet
first-order
A 2 3
When monochromatic light is passed through a diffraction grating, a pattern of maxima and minima is observed as B. 3 4
shovm. Which combination would produce the largest angle 0between the first-order maxima? C. 3 2
Grating (lines per mm) Colour of light used D. 4 3
A 200 blue
B. 200 red 64. < BKDSE 2013 Paper IA- 23 >
C. 400 blue
D. red first-order bright fringe
-
400
59. < HKDSE Practice Paper IA - 23 >

Yellow light of wavelength 590 run is .incident normally on a diffraction grating with 400 lines per mm. Find the difference incident beam
in angular positions for the third order and the fourth order bright fringes. diffraction
A. 13.7 ° first-order bright fringe
. B. 25.7°
c. 45.1 ° When monochromatic light passes through a diffraction grating, a pattern of bright fringes is formed. Which arrangement
D. 70.7 ° would produce the greatest angle 0between the central and first-order bright fringes?
=t 1
grating (lines per mm) colour of light
60. < HKDSE Practice Paper IA- 22 >
A. 400 ,oeon
B. 400 blue
C. 200 green
D. 200 blue
screen 65. < BKDSE 2015 Paper IA - 17 >

double slit
Which diagrams below correctly show the spectra formed from white �ght by a glass prism and a diffraction grating .
In a Young's double slit exptmmetlt, a monochromatic light source of wavelength 600 nm is used. The fringe separation respectively ? It is known that red light travels faster than violet light in glass.
is 5 mm on the screen. If the slit separation is halved and a monochromatic light source of wavelength 450 run is used
w
(R "'red, V"'violet, W-=white)
instead, what is the new fringe separation ?
A. 1.9mm
w
B. 3.3mm
C. 7.5mm
�R
�v
D. 13.3 mm
w�v W�R
61. < HKDSE Practice Paper IA-16 >
Which of the following phenomena demonstrates that light is an electromagnetic wave 7 (3) (4)
A. Light carries energy.
B. Light reflects when it meets a polished metal surface.
C. Light bends when it travels across a boundary from one medium into another.
D. Light can travel from the Sun to the Earth. w
62. <HKDSE 2012 Paper IA- 19 >
Which of the following statements is INCORRECT? A (1) & (3) only
A In air, the wavelength of infra-red radiation is shorter than that of ultra-violet radiation.
B. Visible light tra':els :faster in air than in glass. B. (1) & (4) only
C. Microwaves travel at the speed of light in avacuum. C. (2) & (3) only
D. Both light and sound exh!Dit diffraction. D. (2) & (4) only
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WAS-M/15 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAS-MS/01
WA5: Wave-Nature of Light WA5: Wave Nature of Light
HKEA.A's Marking Scheme is prepared for the matkc:ts' � It should not be regatded as a set of model answers.
66. < HKDSE 2015 Paper IA- 20 > Students and teachers who are not involved in the marking process are advised to i:o.terpret the Ma:rl:ing Schm!c with care.
Which of the following gives the order of magnitude of the wavelengths of ultra-violet radiation and microwave in a
vaclllWl? M.C. Answers
ultra-violet radiation microwave
I. C 11. C 21. A 31. B 41. B
A. 104 m }0-lm
B. 104m 10-sm 2. D 12. C 22. D 32. B 42. D
C. 10-1om 10-2 m 23. B 33. B 43. B
3. D 13. C
D. 10-tom 10-5 m
4. C 14. B 24. D 34. A 44. D
67. <BKDSE2016 Paper IA-19 > 5. A 15. C 25. D 35. B 45. D
Diffraction will occur when light
(1) passes through a pinhole. 6. C 16. C 26. A 36. C 46. C
(2) passes by a sharp edge.
7. B 17. A 27. C 37. C 47. A
(3) passes through a slit.
A. (1) only 8. D 18. D 28. D 38. A 48. B
B. (2) only
C. (3) only 9. C 19. D 29. C 39. C 49. C
D. (1), (2) & (3) 20. A 30. D 40. D 50. B
10. A
68. <BKDSE2017PaperIA -2_0 > 51. D 61. D 71. C

The figure below shows some of the bright fringes fozmed when monochromatic light passes through a diffraction grating.
52. A 62. A 72.A
second-order bright fringe 53. B 63. A
first-order bright fringe 54. B 64. A
central bright fringe 55. B 65. A
56. B 66. A
57. A 67. D
Which of the following is/are correct?
(1) 0,-11, 58. D 68. B
(2) The maximum or®r of)lrigbt fringe is4 if 01 = 20 ° . 59. B 69. D
(3) B1 will decrease if the experiment is perfonned in water but not in air.
60. C 70. A
A (1) only
B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only M.C. Solution
1. C
V =jJ..
Ther � is question in next page .. (3 X 108) "' (10 16) J,_ .. /4=3xl04 m
:. The wave is in the range of ultra-violet rays.
2. D
Wavelengths in ascending order are : green light, yellow light, radio waves
69, <HKDSE 2019 Paper IA-19> 71. <HKDSE 2020PaperIA-14>
A light beam consisting ofwavelengths .i, and ..i, is incident normally on a diffi>clion grating. The
tbird-<llller difliadion of wavelength A1 coincides with lhe l\lurth-order dllfnction of wavelength ..I, in
the resulting pattern. IU1 is 680 nm, find..!,.
A. 510nm
B. 680nm
C. 907nm
D. It cannot be detennincd because the grating spacing is unknown.
72. <HKDSE 2019 Paper JA-15>
The figure shows a typical set-up of Young's double sJitexJ)eriment.
dislance between the double

slit and the smen, L
-----, ·---------- ----

monochromatic
•
•'
light source •
70, <HKDSE 2019 Paper IA-22>
�-- single sl'll double slit of

''
•'
of width w separation d
Which combination below is the best setting ford'isplaying an observable fringe pattern on the......,?
"' d L
A. 0.1mm Imm !Om
B. 0.1mm lmm !m
C. Imm O.Jtnm Im
D• Imm 0.Jmm 0.1 m
..
3. D
12. C
Wavelengths in descending order are : tadio waves, visible light, X-rays Both radio waves and visible light are electromagnetic waves, they have the same speed,
4. C
✓ (l) Speed oflight depends on medium only. 13. C
✓ (2) Change in medium!C$lllts in change of speed, thus give the change in wavelength. Speed: Speed decreases when light travels from air to water
(3) Frequency must remain unchanged during refraction. Frequency: Frequency remains unchanged when light travels from one medium to another medium
Wavelength: Wavelength decreases when light travels from air to water, by v ""f}w
5. A
The wavelength ofFM radio wave is the order of 10 2 m. 14. B
d= ±vt = ½(3xl0s)(2x10� = 3 xl0 4 m
6. C
✓ (l) From air to glass, speed of light would decrease.
15. C
(2) When speed decreases, wavelength would also decrease, by v =fA. ✓ (l) Speed of light depends on medium.
✓ (3) Frequency must be unchanged during refraction. ✓ Total intemal reflection can only occur when light travels from a denser medium to a less dense medium,
(2)
e.g. from water to air.
(3) Light travels slower-in glass than in air.
7. B
Byd=½vt
16. C
4
_:. d= ½{3xl0�(2xlo-4)=3x10 m The correct ascending order of wavelengths :
gamma rays, X-rays, ultra-violet, visible light, infra-red, microwave, radio waves.
8. D
17. A
A. wavelength of.infra-red rays > wavelength ofX-rays
✓ (l) Wavelength decreases towards the right of the spectrum., thus P has longer wavelength.
B. wavelength of radio waves > wavelength ofX--rays
(2) All electromagnetic waves travel with the same velocity in vacuum.
C. wavelength of radio waves > wavelength ofinfta-red rays (3) Electromagnetic waves cannot be deflected by an electric field.
✓ D. it is the correct ascending order ofwavelengths
,. C
18. D
Wavelength: Speed of light increases when it travels from water to air, by v =f,t, wavelength also increases.
Sound wave is the only example oflongitudinal wave.
Frequency: Frequency must remain unchanged when light travels from one medium to another medium.
A 19. D
Wavelength ofX-rays is shorter than microwaves, radio waves and visible light Speeds of all the electromagnetic waves are the same and do not depend on the frequency of the wave.
20. A
11. C
✓ A. Radar uses microwaves to send pulses to detect flying objects.
✓ (l) Frequency decreases towards the left
✓ Y is infra-red which is emitted by hot or warm bodies
• B Carbon-14 dating uses� :radiation.
(2)
• c. Radiotherapy uses y-rays.
(3) Blecttomagnetic waves cannot be deflected by electric field or magnetic field.
• D Detecting cracks in railway track uses ultrasound.
DSE Physics - Section C : MC. Solution PC-WAS-MS/04 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAS-MS/OS
WA5 : Wave Nature of Light WA5: Wave Nature of Light
21. A 29. C
ltlfrared; Wavelength is longer than that of visible light, thus it should be 1 x 10-4 m ✓ (I) Remote control : Infrared radiation
Red light: Red light has the longest wavelength among the range of visible light, thus it is 7 x 10-1 m ✓ Oven: Microwave
(2)
Violet light: Violet light has the shortest wavelength among the range of visible light, thus it is 4 x 10-7 m Scanning foetuses : ultrasonic waves - sound waves with frequency higher than 20000 Hz
(3)
22. D 30. D
✓ (I) Llght is a type oftransVerse wave. Ozone layer in the atmosphere can absorb most of the ultra-violet radiation from the sun
• (2) All waves, including electromagnetic waves, posses all phenomena ofwaves, including diffraction. so that the intensity oftbe ultra-violet radiation reaching the Earth's surface is much reduced
✓ (3) Light wave carries light energy. and causes less hazard to human being, as over-exposure to ultra-violet radiation may cause skin cancer.
23. B 31. B
V =ff. (1) The penetr.tting power of ultra-violet radiation is not high enough to penetrirte through the human body
(3xl0� = (94xlO�J.. (X-rays and gamma radiation can penetrate through human body)
A.=3.19m (2) Ultra-violet radiation does not have h.eating effect (Infra-red has heating effect)
✓ (3) Ultra-violet radiation has sun-tan effect and over.exposure may cause skin cancer
24. D
A. lofrMed is invisible. 32. B
B. Geiger-Muller counter can only detect a, � or y radiation, but not infra-red radiation. Infra-red can enable the images to be captured in the dark.
c. Ultra-violet is used to sterilize drinking water.

33. B
✓ D. Warm or hot bodies emit infra-red radiation.
✓ A. The radar system makes use of microwave which is an eleclromagnetic wave.
B. The sonar system makes use of ultrasound which is NOT an electromagnetic wave.
25. D
✓ C. The :infra-red system makes use ofinfra-red radiation which is an electromagnetic wave.
Frequencies in ascending order are :
✓ D. The wireless telecommunication system makes use of radio wave which is an electrmnagnetic wave.
radio waves, ultra-violet rays, X-rays
34. A
26. A
The electromagnetic wave spectrum in order of decreasing wavelength:
Infra-red radiation OR ultrasonic wave can be used for camera autofocusing. <D radio waves
"'
(l) microwaves
27. C infra-red
© visiOle light
✓ (I) Ultra-violet is between X-rays and visible light while infra-red is between microwaves and visible light
ultra-violet
✓ (2) Wavelength increases towards the right of this spectrum, thus wavelength of Pis shorter. @ X-rays
(3) All electromagnetic waves travel with same speed in vacuum ® gamma rays
28. D 35. B
A. Camera autofocusing ; both ultrasound or infra r- ed radiation can be used
(I) This can only shows that wave has refraction.
B. Detecting railway cracks : use ultrasound
(2) This can only shows tha� wave has reflection.
c. Detecting survivors : use infra-red radiation
✓
(3) Since the space between the Sun and the Earth is vacuum,
✓ D. Sterilize drinking water: use ultra-violet radiation
this can show that light is an electromagnetic wave that can travel in vacuum.
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA5-MS 106 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA5-MS/07
WA5 : Wave Nature of Light WA5: Wave Nature of Light
36. C 42. D
✓ (1) Speed v of electromagnetic waves is independent of the frequencyf, thus it is a horizontal line.
(1) Frequency remainsunchanged during refraction
(2) As the velocity is constant, by v =fA, ✓ Forlight: vgt,.a,<v.;,. ⇒ A.glus</1.oir
(2)
the frequrm.cyfand the wavelength ,1, should be inversely proportional, thus the graph should be a curve.
✓ (3) Forlight: Vg1m,<vo1r
✓ (3) Speedv of electromagnetic waves is independent of the wavelength /4, thus it is a horizontal line.
43. B
31. C t:. = 3000nm = 3000 A= 7.SA :. P:Sthdarkfringe
(1)
Initial distance oftbe car = f x (3 x 108) x (3.6 x 10-7) = 54 m 400
(2) The fringe separation is independent of the distance between the source and slits, thus same s
Final distance of the car = ½ x (3 x 108) x (3.1 x 10-7) = 46.5 m
✓ (3) t:. = 3000nm = �A= 6A :. constructiveinterferenceoccurs,itisa brightfringe
Speedofthecar = M = � = 37.Sms-1 500
l:,J 0.2
44. D
38. A The wavelength oflight is very small (about 10-7 m).
Speedofwaterwaves < speed ofsoundwaves < speedofmicrowaves
In order to have observable interference, slit separation a should be much decreased to give observable interference.
Time to travel a distance ofl00 m = ---'l"O-'-
Om
='-�
speed of the wave
45. D
Thus, the smaller the speed, the longer is the time taken
Bydsin0 = 1 ,1. ••• To have greater 0,dshould be smaller and A.shouldbe greater
© grating in lines per mm should be greater so that grating spacingdis Sll18l.ler :. 400 isbetter
39. C
red light bas longer wavelength than green light :. red light is better
D
✓ (1) By /::.y = ;t Dt ⇒ Ayt
46. C
✓ t.y = AD ,it ⇒6.yt
By ✓ Grating spacing d = 1 x io-z = 2 x 1 o--<> m = 2000 nm
(2)
(1)
5000
(3) Separation between fringes is independent of the distance between the light source and the double slits, ✓ (2) By dsin 0 = n;.. :. (2 x Io-6) sin02 = (2)(500 x 10-9) 02 = 30°
thus l::.y is unchanged.
(3) sin· 03 = 3 sin 01 = 1.5 sin 02 = LS sin 30 ° :. 03 = 48.6° Third order spectrum exists.
40. D
47. A
Asdsin0=n..t
10 3
H
10-1 By using fringe separation: by = AD
(-)sine = (2)..t and ( )sin¢ = (1) 5/4 a
p 3p 4
✓ (1) A.t⇒6yt
( 1! p) sine _ (2) iL sin¢ = !1sin0
013p). sin¢ - 0) {5M4) 8 (2) at ⇒ t,.y.J,
(3) Larger slit width gives the same fringe separation 6.y
41. B
48. B
By Ay.= ).D
Bydsin0=nA.
Monochromatic light: ,t t ⇒ l::.y 1' red light <D dsin45° - 3;..
Slit-separation: a J, ⇒ ay t @ dsin90° -nA
Slit-to-screen distattce: D t ⇒ 4)1 t :. 2m n = 424

Thus the highest order isthe 4th order.
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAS-MS/08 . DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAS-MS/09
49. C 55. B
Fringe separation: Ay = 5.0mmx ¼ = 125mm
From the figure, the wavelength: ,1, = 10 x 10- 1 x 3. = 4 x 10-7 m
5
By 6. y"' 2D
The colour is violet since violet.has the shortest wavelength among the visible light that has range of400 nm to 700 nm.
By C = f,1,
(3 X 10 8) = fx (4 X 10-7)
a=4.4x10-4m
56. B
50. B
© tan 0.2 = !. = 0.686/2
✓ The diffraction pattern is symmetrical on both sides of the central line. d 0.75
(1)
-2
X For the same order, it should be the sin of the angle proportional to the 'Wavelength, ie. sin 0 oc A @ dsin0 = nA (
lxl0
)sin24.58" = (2),1, :. A. = 520 nm
(2)
4000
✓ (3) For smaller d, the angle Bis greater, thus the first maxima are separated at greater angles.
57. A
51. D
Fringe width in double- slit interference : .6.y = �
For grating or interference pattern, the second order and the third order must be overlapped. a
✓ (1) ,it⇒ .6.yt
The overlapping cannot be changed by any methods.
X (2) at⇒ Ay ,!,
52. A X (3) Larger slit width gives the same fringe separation .6.y, as .6.y is not affected by the slitwidth.
✓ (1) For the first-order spectrum: dsin B = U
:. A.viokt < A.y.now ⇒ Bvio1e1 < �w :. violet is closer. 58. D
✓ (2) By dsin 0= nA By d sin 0 = 1 /2 :• To have greater 0, d should be smaller and ,1, should be greater
For 2nd order image ofyellow light:dsin 0 = (2) (600) = 1200 nm (j) grating in lines per mm should be greater so that grating spacing dis smaller :. 400 is better
For3rdorder imageofviol�light: dsinB= (3)(400) = 1200nm
Same value of dsin 0⇒ the2 lights coincide at the same diffracted angle B
"' red lig{J.t has longer wavelength than blue light :. red light is better
X
(3) Consider the 4th order image for violet light.
..; 59. B
By dsin 0 = n 2 (IO )sin0"" (4)(400xl0·�) :. 0 = 53.1"
500 Bydsin8=n,1,
.·. 4th order violet maximum exists.
(j) (
lxlO
-l )sin0 =(4)(590xl0-9) & = 70.73 °
4
400
53. B -J
Ill (lxlO )sinl9i = {3)(590 xl0-9)
Typical order of wavelength of infra-red radiation in air is 10 m. -s 400
Typical order of wavelength of ultra-violet radiation in an' is 10--s m. A0 = 70.73 -45.07 = 25.7 °
54. B 60. C
AD
X
Q) Since the two light sources are identical, they should have same amplitudes. By Ay =
X (2) Since the two light sources are identical, they should have the same wavelength and frequency. -9
(j) (5 X 10-3) = (600x10 )D @ .6.y = (450x10-, )D
✓ (3) Two independent light source cannot have constant phase relationship. a (a/2)
Thus, they are not coherent sources, and therefore, no interference pattern can be observed.
Combine CD and@: Ay = 7.5 x 10-3 m = 7.5 mm
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA5-MS/10 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WAS-MS/11
WAS: Wave Nature ofLlght WAS: Wave Nature of light
61. D 68. B
• A. All waves carry energy. Carry energy cannot prove that light is an electromagnetic wave.
• B All waves reflect Reflection cannot prove that light is an electromagnetic wave.
(!) The bright fringes produced by a diffraction grating is not evenly distributed,
thus 0:i.mustnotequal 61, actually, 0:i.> 0i.
• C All waves bend to give refraction. Refraction cannot prove thatlight is an electromagnetic wave.
(2) By dsin6= nl
✓ D. Light can travel in space (vacuum) is a prooffor electromagnetic -;vave. <1> dsin20" = (1) A- @ dsin.90° = nl
:. n = 2.92
62. A The maximum order of bright ftinge should be 2.
• A. The wavelength ofthe infra�red radiation is longer than that of ultra-violet radiation. ✓ (3) Ifthe experiment is performed in water, A will decrease.
✓ B. Vts1ble light travels at the greatest speed in air or vacuum. In glass, the speed is smaller. By d sin 0 = n ;t, 0wil1 decrease.
✓ C. Microwaves are electromagnetic waves, which must be travel at the speed oflight in a vacu�
✓ D. Since light and sound are waves, they exln"bit diffraction.
63. A
By dsin0= nA
Red light: (lxlO�\sinS2° = n (657x10-') .·. n = 2

600
Violet light : :. n = 3
64. A
By dsinB = nA
For the first order bright fringe, n = 1
To give greatest angle B,
dshould be smaller, thus the grating should have more line per mm, that is, 400
A should be greater, thus the colour oflight should be green, since wavelength of green light is longer than blue light
65. A
<D When white light passes through a prism. it is dispersed into its component colours.
Red (R) light is least deviated from the original direction.
@ When white light passes through a diffraction grating, the :first order consists of continuous spectrum.
Red (R) light with longest wavelength has the largest diffracted angle from the central line.
66. A
Order of magnitude ofwavelength ofultra-violet radiation = 1o-s m
Order of magnitude of wavelength ofmicrowaves = 10-2 m
67. D
✓ (!) When light passes through a pinhole, light spreads out from the hole to give diffraction.
✓ (2) When light passes by a sharp edge, light bends round the corner to give diffraction.
✓ (3) When light passes through a slit, light spreads out from the slit to give diffraction.
/
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WAS-Q/01 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WAS-QI 021
WA5 : Wave Nature of Light WAS :Wave Nature of Light
Use the following data wherever necessary : I. (b) The following figure shows another experimental set-up using the same microwave translllitter and receiver. 3 cm
microwaves are emitted from the transmitter. A metal plate M is then moved fromP to Q. DescnOe the variation of
Speed of light in vacuum c = 3 x 10 8 m s-1 the loudness of the sound from the loudspeaker. Explain briefly with the aid of a diagram. (5 marks)
The following list of formulae may be found useful :

Fringe width in double-slit interference
D �ction grating equation dsi:D.B=n?. Loudspeaker
Part A : BKCE examination questions
1. < HKCE 1986 Paper I - 6 >

(a) The below :figure shows an experimental set-up to study the interference of3 cm microwave. Microwaves emitted from
a transmitter at Tpass through two narrow slits A andB where TA= TB. The microwaves are picked up by a receiver at
Xwhere X4 = XB. The receiver is connected to a loudspeaker through an amplifier. The loudness of sound from the
loudspeaker indicates the intensity of the microwaves received.
yr (c) Give two examples of applications of microwaves. (2 marks)
x l:g
er?) �
Receiver
�u&peaker
2. < BKCE 1995 Paper I - 4 >
1r-.
�
;y
Meter reading
ij
t
(i) What is the frequency ofthe microwaves? (3 marks) Low voltage
supply p;
: R�,i,�
g ________________ L_____________ z
(ii) What is the path difference of the microwaves from A andB atX? (1,,,,,k) Position of receiver
r
(iii) Are the waves at constructive or destructive interference atX? (1mm) The figure above shows a set-up to investigate the interference of microwaves. Microwaves emitted from a transmitter Tpass
through two narrow slits A and B, which are equidistant from T. The receiver is then cOIIIlected to a meter, which indicates
the intensity of microwaves received.
(iv)· Would the sound from the loudspeaker be loud or soft? (1 mark) The graph above then shows the variation of the meter reading as the receiver is moved fromXto Y. Xis equidistant from A
andB.
(v) Descnlie briefly the vmia:tion of the loudness of the sound from the loudspeaker when the receiver is being moved (a) Explain briefly why the meter shows � and minimum readings.
"1ongXY. (2 marl<s)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WAS-Q/03 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WAS-Q/04
WAS: Wave Nature of Light WAS :WaveNatureofLlght
2. (b) What type of interference is observed at P ? 3. (b) (ii) Peter finds that the radio reception is better than the TV reception. Explain this phenomenon.
(c) IfAP = 36 cm,BP = 33 cm, find the wavelength and frequency ofthe microwaves.
(c) Peter is watching TV in his house. He finds that the reception is affected when an aeroplane flies overhead. Explain this
phenomenon. (2 marks)
(d) Sketch a graph to show the variation of the meter reading as the receiver is moved from Xto Z (.XZ is perpendicular to
X'Y). Explain briefly why the reading varies in this way. (4 marks)
(d) Another transmitting station will be built at site Q. (See the above figure.) Mary lives in a house B such that
BP= 3.95kmand BQ = 3.20km.
(i} Find the path difference at B from P and Q. (1 mark}
(ii) Mary listens to the radio in her house. How will the reception be affected ifboth stations transmit identical radio
waves at 600 kHz? Explain your answer. (Neglect the reflection of waves from the hill) (3 marks)
3. <HKCE 1999 PaperI-10 >
(e) The table below shows the broadcasting frequencies ofRTIIK Radio 1 ( FM ) in different districts :
District Fr,..rmencv/MHz
Hong Kong north 92.6
Hong Kong south 93.6
Kowloon east 94.4

Peter lives in a house A on one side ofa bill. A transmitting station Ti is located at site P on the other side of the hill. (See
the above figure.) The station transmits� waves of frequency 600 kHz and TV waves of frequency 500 :MHz. Kowloon west 92.9
(a) Find the wavelengths of the radio waves and IV waves. Sb.at.in, Ma On Shan 93.5
Tai Po, Fanling 93.2
Tuen Mun. Yuen Long 93.4
State one advantage ofbroadcasting at different frequencies in different districts. {2 marks)

(b) {i) Name the wave phenomenon which enables the waves transmitted by T1 to reach Peter's house, (1 mmk)
WAS: WaveNatureofLi.ght WAS: Wave Nature of Light
4. < HKCE 2004 Paper I - 4 > 6. < HKCE 2006 Paper I - 2 >
channdR.z RADAR is a useful device to detect aircraft. However, the air--forces of many countries try to build aircraft that can hide
away from their enemies. Read the following passage about a stealth bomber (see Figure 1).
FM 88 • 94 • 99 • 105 • 108 MHz Stealth Bomber
There are some special features in the design of the

stealth bomber to make it inviSlOle to enemy sensors.
The aircraft needs to blend in with the background
channel Rt visually and its engine needs to be very quiet.
Furthennore, it needs to hide from enemy radar and
The Figure above shows the display panel ofa radio and the broadcasting frequencies of two radio channels R1 and.Ri.
infrared sensors. Defending against radar detection, the
surface of the stealth bomb'er is particularly good at
(a) Find the wavelength of the radio waves used by channel R1. (2 marks)
absorbing radio waves. More importantly, the large flat
areas on the top and bottom of the aircraft reflect most
incoming radio waves away from the radar station in the
same llllUJJler as plane mirrors usually reflect light rays
away from light sources. In r egard to infrared sensors
(b) Anita's house is surrounded by hills and at her house, the reception of one ofthe two radio channels is better. For which typically picking up on hot engine exhaust, all of the
radio channel is the reception better? Explain your answer. {3 marks) exhausts in a stealth bomber pass through cooling vents
before flowing out of the plane. With the designs
mentioned above, a stealth bomber has the ability to fly
almost tmdetected through enemy airspace.
-
Source: http:J/science.bowstuffworks.com/stealth-bomber3.htm
5. < HKCE 2006 Paper I - 1 >
5 µs (a) (i) In Figure 2 below, draw a ray to show how a wave from the radar is reflected at the bottom of the stealth bomber.
(1 mm-k)
stealth bomber
�;"
L]
radar station
-
Figure 1 Figure2 radar station

Figure2
RADAR (RAdio Detecting And Rangmg) is a useful device in air traffic control. In Figure 1, an aircraft is flying near a radar
station. A pulse of electromagnetic wave with a speed of3 x 10 8 m s-1 and a frequency of 1.2 x 109 Hz is emitted from the (ii) If the stealth bomber flies horizontally to a particular position around the radar, it can be detected by the radar.
radar station towards the aircraft. Mark this position with a symbol X in Figure z. (1 mark)
(a) Find the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave.
(b) All of the exhausts in a stealth bomber pass through cooling vents before flowing out ofthe plane. Explain how this can
help the stealth bomber to hide away from enemy detection. . (2 marks)
(b) The electromagnetic wave pulse emitted is reflected by the aircraft back to the radar station. The emitted and reflected
pulses are displayed on the screen ofa CRO as shown in Figure 2. The time-base setting of the CRO is 5 µs per division. (9) Apart from the above designs which help prevent the stealth bomber being detected by radar and infrared sensors, state
Estimate the distance between the radar station and the aircraft. (3 marlcs) two other essential features which are important in building the stealth bomber so that it can hide away from enemy
detection. (2 marks)
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC- WA5-Q / 071 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA5-Q /08
WA5 : Wave Nature of Llght WA5 :WaveNatureofLight
Part B : HKAL examination questions 8. < BKAL 1994 Paper I- 6 >
I
(a) A student views a green light source through a double slit. The pattern observed is shown in the Figure below.
7. <HKAL1981PaperlIB-3>
line :filament
How would the pattern be affected if red light is used instead? (1 mark)
,,,;;:: � StudentB
� sw""1
filto<
metres
( b)
180 °
\
diffraction
grating
___ �escope
platform
/
Student A views a line filament lamp with a yellow filter through a diffraction grating with its lines parallel to the filament as 0'
shown. The grating is held at one end of a metre rule which is direCted towards the lamp. At. the other end of the metre rule,
a second rule is placed at right angles to the first rule. The d.iflraction grating has 6.0 x 10 s lines per metre. To observe the light spectrum of the sodium lamp, a student places a diffraction grating on a platform such that
the incident light falls normally on the grating, There is a protractor scale on the platform from 0° to 18o e. The sodium
(a) Student B was told to move a pencil held vertically along the second rule until it coincides with the yellow band in the lamp produces a yellow light of a certain wavelength. The student uses the second-order images and records the angular
first image of the lamp as seen through the grating. If the distance between the first rule and the pencil is x = 0.37 m as position readings ofthe yellow line on each side of the central line as· follows:
shown in the figure, calculate the wavelength of the yellow light. (2 marks)
Left..hand side Right-hand side
(second order) {second order)
scale reading on protractor 45.67° 134.37°
(b) If student B keeps moving the pencil along the second metre rule in the same direction, bow many more yellow bands (i) Give the grating spacing to be 1684 om. calculate the wavelength of the yellow light produced by the sodium lamp.
will be encountered 'l Explain. (You may extend the length of the second metre rule by using more metre rules.) Give your answer to 4 significant figures. (2 marks)
(2 marks)
(c) If the filter is removed. sketch the pattem seen by student A on both sides of the filament, up to the second order, on the
figure below. Label the significant features.· (4 marks)
(ii) Suggest ONE reason for making measurements by using the second-order images instead of the first-order ones.
(1 mark)
1
position ofzero order
9. < HKAL 2010 Paper I - 2 > 10. (b) State one safety precaution in uSing the laser light. (1 ""'k)
metre rule
Figure 1
(c) State one precaution in performing the above experiment (! nwk)
An LED (Light Emitting Diode) emitting monochromatic light of wavelength /4 is viewed through a diffraction grating of
160 lines per mm as shown in Figure 1. With the aid of a pencil and two mutually perpendicular metre rules, several
positions of images corresponding to the maxima are located in the way sho'Wn. Figure 2 shows the observation through the
diffraction grating.
images ofLED

0 0 0 0
I I
I
o�
III
10
IIIIII
20
IIIII III IIIII
30
III 50
11. < HKDSE Sample Paper m - 5 >
Figun2 channel,Rz
(a) Find the angular position 0 oftli.e image of the fowth maximum according to the above observation. Hence detemrine
the wavelength A of the light emitted by the LED.
®• 99
(3 marlcs)
FM 88 • • 105 • 108 MHz

AM 530 • 610 • 750 •
(b) Calculate the maximum order of the LED image that may be observed for the above grating. (2 marks)
channelR1
The Figure above shows the display panel ofa radio and the broadcasting :frequencies of two radio chrumelsR1 and&.
(a) Find the wavelength of the radio waves used by chrumelR,. (I mark)
10. < HKAL 2011 Paper I- 3 >
' Im
'
'' (b) Anita's house is surrounded by hills and at her house, the reception of one of the two radio channels is better. For which
radio channel is the reception better? Explain your answer. (2 marks)
m� =��=tic ____...__________ __ _ ______________________ _
diffraction grating
! Notto scale
12. < HKDSE 2012 Paper IB- 6 >

Monochromatic light of wavelength 570 nm from a laser is directed normally onto a diffi'action grating as shown. A screen is
placed at a distance 1 m behind the grating. The central part of the resulting diffraction pattern is shown in the :figure . The A double•slit set•up is used for the demonstration of the interference oflight in which the separation between slits S1 and S2 is
separation between the second-order bright spots on both sides of the pattern is 1.02 m 0.5 mm and the screen is at 2.5 m from the slits. Calculate the average separation between adjacent bright fringes on the
screen for a monochromatic light of wavelength 550 nm (2 marks)
(a) Calculate the grating spacing d of the diffraction grating. (3 marks)
WAS: Wave Nature of Light WAS : Wave Natuxe of Light
-�t{1---
13. < BKDSE 2013 Paper IB - 7 > 14. < HKDSE 2014 Paper IB - 7 >
'' The Figure below shows an experimental set-up to determine the wavelength of monochromatic light emitted from the
l7 vertical narrow slit of a discharge lamp. A, B are two mutually perpendicular mette rules on the bench with rule A pointing
towards the lamp. A diffraction grating with vertical lines is placed at one end of rule A. A vertically mounted pin P is
:' moved along rule B until the pin is in line with the diffracted image of the second-order to the observer. The corresponding
distance xis measured for :finding the diffraction angle 0.
'
:, illlllllinated
�Tometer it
To,uppl� p
_______________ .d_ _______ _
r,,,w-::;!:;----- • X
B
Diagram NOT drawn to scale ��

�
The Figure above shows a set-up for the study of interference of microwaves. Microwaves of wavelength 2 cm emitted from
a transmitter T pass through two slits A and B formed by metal plates. The slits are separated by 6 cm as shown.· A probe R
connecting to a meter is moved from X to Yto detect the intensity of microwaves received. Transmitter T and point X are
equidistant from.A and.B.
(a) Calculate the frequency oftbe microwaves. f observer
The grating has 300 lines per mm and x is found to be 0.38 m for the Sei:ond-order image.
{a) (i) Calculate the diffraction angle 0. (1 mark)

(b) (i) The meter shows alternate maxima and mmima when R moves along.IT. Explain. (2mrui<s)
{ii) Hence find the wavelength of the light from the lamp. (3 marks)
(UJ The second minimum is found at position P where AP= 1.24 m. Find BP. (2 marks)
(iii) Give ONE advantage of measuring the position of the second-order image instead of the :first-order one. (1 mark)
(iii) V&en R is moved along XY from X towards Y and beyond, explain whether or not it is possible to detect more than
three maxima. (2 marks)
(b) In the experiment, the illuminated slit may not be well aligned along metre rule A. Suggest one way to reduce this error.
(2 marl<,)
(c) Microwaves can be used in radar. Why are radio waves of lower frequencies not suitable for use in radar? (2 marks)
' 1,��---
15. < HKDSE 2015 Paper m - 7 > 15. Figure 3 shows circular water waves in a ripple tank The two point sources S1 and S2, separated by40 mm. are driven by the
(a) A laser light beam of wavelength 650 nm is incident normally on a pair of slits separated by a '-' 0.325 mm. Interference same vibrator. The solid lines represent the wave crests from 81 and the dotted lines represent the wave crests from Sz. The
pattern is observed on a screen at a distance D"" 3.0 m from the slits as shown in Figure 1. What is the separation wavelength of the waves is 10 mm.
between adjacent :first- and second-order bright fringes ? (2 marks)
laser
ligh t -
--+
--+
I
aE------
double slits
----------------------------
D = 3.0 m
screen
Diagram NOT drawn to scale ]
F,gure3
40
20 FH'ftt�,ffp:ffil
IO f+l'rf'ffifHF,i4'4iFf:
-!-,
40 50 ., 10
(b) Figure 2 shows a set -up with two small LEDs separated by 6 mm and both LEDs emit light of wavelength 650 mn. State
and explain what you would expect to see on the screen. (2 marks) (c) Sketch on Figure 3 two lines to indicate all points P with path difference PS, - PS2 equals to 10 mm (L1) and
20 mm (Lz). Stat.e the kind of interference that occurs at these pointsP. (3 marks)
Pigore2
.±..=0 ----------------------------------------
6mm (d) (i) If the interference pattern is observed along line XY at 50 mm from the source as shown, measure the separation
f=C> LEDs
D�3.0m between adjacent first- and second-order maxima 6y. (1 mark)
separation tzy "" _________
I I
screen
Dia<ram NOT drawn to scale (ii) However, using the calculation method in (a) would obtain 12.5 mm for this separation. Why does this calculated
value differ with the measurement in {d) (i) ? (2 marks)
I
16. <HKDSE2016PaperIB-6>
WA5 : Wave Nature of Light
PC-WA5-Q /1511
17. <HKDSE2018PaperIB-7>
WAS: Wave Nature of Light
PC-WAS-Q/16
(a) A laser beam is directed perpendicularly towards a double slit of separation a= 0.3 mm. The pattern of bright spot; (•) central position
projected on a screen 1.8 m away from the slits is shown in the Figure below.
>----- �I .�•o�m
cen
"----'-'-"�e i
!111!11111\11!1!11111 1111!!111 ]1111!111!111I� ruler with cm

0 1 2
Figu:rel las=-------.,,.------------
.i,J '
3 4 scale marks double slit
(i) Find the wavelength ofthe laser beam.

Figure 1 above shows a set-up for measuring the wavelength A, of light emitted by a laser pointer. Several bright dots of
average separation about 2 mm can be seen on the screen.
(i) For the same set of apparatus, suggest a way to increase the average separation between the bright dots on the
screen. (1 mark)
The double slit is now replaced by a diffraction grating with 400 lines per mm.
(ill Explain why the slit width has to be very narrow in order for the above pattern to be observed. (2 marks)
(ii) Briefly explam why the accuracy of the experiment can be improved. (1 mark)
(iii) Onyl
five bright dots are observed on the screen such that the separation between the 1'1 and 5lll dots is 1.56 m.
Find A. (3 mar ks)
(b) The double slit is now replaced by a diffraction grating of 500 lines per mm.
(i) Find the separation between the central bright spot and first-order bright spot of the pattern on the screen for the
same experimental settings. (3 marks) (b) To measure the speed of sound in air, a student connects two loudspeakers, A andB, to a signal generator as shown in
Figure 2.
!:?
2m
signal generator i
�.E� 0
��A ToCRO
�phone
Figure2
(uJ Sketch the pattern, up to the second..order, that you would expect to see on the screen when using this diffraction
grating. A first-order bright spot bas already been drawn for you. (2 marks) 1
The separation ofA and B is 1 m. A microphone is used to pick up the sound along the line XY at a distance of2 m from
centre ofthe pattern• the loudspeakers. The central maximum is at point O while the next maximum. is at point P.
0 (i) With reference to the above settings, use the fringe separation equation by = A, D in double-slit interference to
a
find the wavelength..l. ofsoundis not accurate. Explain briefly. (] m,rlc)
:first-order bright spot
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WAS-Q/17 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAS-QS/01
HKBAA's Marking Scheme is ptepared for the markers' refe:tence. It .should not be regarded as a set of model answers.
17. (b) (ii) The distance between O andP is found to be 1 m when the signal generator is set at 750 Hz. By considering the Students and teachers who are not involved in the matking process are advised to interpret the Marking Schc:me with care.
path clifferencePB-PA, use the results of the experiment to find the speed of sound in air.
2m Question Solution
t
i 'p
1. (a) (i) v=f), [l]
1 Q.
(3 x IO� - f(0.03) [!]
1
/= IQIOHz [!]
B
; (il') path difference = 0 [!]
(iii) constructive interference [!]
(iv) loud [!]
(v) AlongXY,loud and soft sounds are heard [!]

alternately [!]
(b) Q
[!]
Transmitter
p
As M moves, the intensity of sound increases to a maximum [!]

and then decreases again as it approaches Q. [!]
When Mis mid-way betweenP and Q, (OR indication in the figure that i= r ), [!]
microwaves emitted from the tzansmitter is reffected by Mand coIIected by the receiver. [!]
(c ) AnyTW.Oofthefollowing:
*
[2]
Radru-
* Microwave oven
* Satellite communication
* Mobile phone
2. (a) Interference of microwaves from A andB occurs due to different path difference. [!]
The reading reaches a maximum at positions of constructive interference [!]
and a minimum at positions of destructive interference. [!]
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAS-QS/02 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAS-QS I 03
WA5 : Wave Nature of Light WA5 : Wave Nature of Light
2. (b) Constructive interference occurs at P. [1] 3. (d) (U) Apathdifferenceof750misequaltolfA. [1]

So the two signals give destructive interference. [1]
(c) Path difference at P = 1 A [1]
As a result, the radio reception will become poorer. [1]
:. A.= 36-33 = 3cm [1]
By V =fl (e) Destructive interference of signals from 2 neighbouring transmitters [l]

(3 X 10� - /(0.03) [1] can be avoided. [1]
1
f= 10 0Hz [1]
(d) Meter reading [2] 4. (a) By V ""ft-.

.. (3 XlQ&) = (1000 X 103) '}.. [1]
'}.. = 300m [1]
(b) The reception of channel R1 is better. [1]

Since the wavelength ofR1 is longer than that of.fu., [1]
Distance the radio waves of R1 diffract more than that of.fu.. [1]
x'c--------�z�---i>
The interference is always constructive along .XZ, so the reading is always at amaximum. [1]
However the intensity of the waves decreases with· distance,
s. (a) V ""f'A
so the reading .decreases as the probe moves away fromX [1] (3 X 108) = (1.2 X 109) '}.. [1]
'}.. = 0.25m [1]
.3. (a) By v =f'A. [!] (b) f:..t"" 6.SxSxl0--6 = 3.2Sx10-5 s [1]
For Radio waves : d = ½xvxt:..t= ½x(3xl06)x(3.25x10-5) [1]

(3 x 108) = (600x Wp. = 4880m < accept 487S m > [1]
:. 'J,,=SOOm [1]
For TV waves:
6. (a) stealth bomber
(3 X 108) = (SQQ X 10 6) '),,.
.·. A= 0.6m
(b) (i) The phenomenon is diffiaction. [l]
(ii) Al; the wavelength ofthe radio waves is longer than that ofthe TV waves, [1]
the radio waves are diffracted more by the hills, so the radio reception is better. [1]
(c) The aeroplane reflects the TV waves. [1]

The waves travelling directly to the aerial has interference with the waves reflected by the aeroplane. [1]
radar station
(d) (i) Path difference = BP-BQ
(i) < The incident ray and the reflei;ted ray drawn with reflected angle equals the incident angle > [1]
= 3.95 - 3.20 = 0.75 km
= 750m [!] (il1 < The cross X marked vertically above the radar station> [1]
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA5-QS/04 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAS-QS/05
WA5 : Wave Nature of Light WAS: WaveNatureofLight
6. (b) To lowerthetemperatureofthe exhausts [1] 8. (b) (i) By dsin0"= nA.

and reduce the emission of infra- red radiation. [1] 6 0
:. (1684)xsin [l34.37" 45. 7 ] = (2}.-1 VJ
;
(c) CD The engine is very quiet [1]
:. A = 588.6 nm [lJ
@ The aircraft blends in with the background visually. [1]
(ii) Larger diffraction angle gives smaller percentage error. [lJ
7. (a) tan e = o.37 = o.37

9- (a) Forthe4thorderimage: .x = 49.2cm
e = 20.3 2xl0-2
[1] tan0 = 49.
°
By dsin0= n,1.
e = 26.2° <accept 26.0° to 26.4° > [1]
1 °
(___)xsi.n203 = lxA By dsin0= nA
6.0x IO�
:. A= 5.78x10- m [1] lxl0�3 )Sin26.2° = ) [1]
(4 ,1
1
(
160
(b) The maximwn dimacted angle is 90° ,1, = 6.90 x 10- 7 m <accept 6.8 x 10- 7 m to 7.0x 10-7 m> [lJ
By dsin0= n,'1.
(b) By dsin0 = nA
1 1
(___) x sin 90 = n x (5.78 x 10- ) } X 10-J
°
= If (6.90 X 10-7)
6.0xHf ( 160 ) sin 90 [lJ
°
n = 2.9 [lJ n = 9.06 . ·. maximum order is 9 [lJ

No 3rd or higher ord er maximum can be observed. OR
One more yellow band will be observed. [lJ By n sin90° [lJ
4 = sin26.2 °
(c)
white :. n � 9.06 . • maximum order is 9 [lJ
R V R V j V R.
Z
10. {a) Secondorder: tanB= l.OZ/ :. 0 = 27.02° [lJ
1.00
Any FOUR of the following features in the diagram: [4J By dim.0= nA
* zero order image - white :. dsin27.02 ° = (2) (570 x 10-9) [lJ
* continuous spectra in each order :. d=2.5lxI0 m -6

<accept 2.5xto-6m> VJ
* violet / red ends marked correctly <Do notacceptanswerbyusing Ay = AD/a>
* two orders shown on each side
(b) AJiY ONE of the following [1]
* distance between 2nd and1st order > distanc e between 1stand zeroth order * Do not view the laser light directly with eyes.
* spreadingof colours greater in second order than the first order * Do not point laser light towards human bodies.
(c) AnyONEofthefollowing [lJ

* Grating should b e peipendicular to the incident light.
8. {a) The fringe separation increases. [lJ * Screen should be parallel to the grating.
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAS-QS/06 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAS-QS/07
11. (a) V =f-,._ 14. (a) (iii) The diffracted angle 0is greater and thus the percentage error is reduced. [!]
(3 x 108) = (1000 x 1<>3) A OR
A,= 300m [!] Thevalue x is greater and thus the percentage error is reduced. [!]
(b) The reception of channelR1 is better. [!] (b) Locate the second order images at the other side of the central line. [l]
Since the wavelength ofRt is longer than that of&.,
Take the average value ofx obtained fromboth sides to find ,l [!]
the radio waves of R1 diffract more than that of&.. [!]
OR
Measure the distance between the two images and divide it by 2 to givex. [!]
Ay = AD = (SSOxl0 )(2.5)
..;
12. [!]
-;;-- (O.Sxl0-3)
= 2.75 X 10- 3 In [!]
[!]
=6xl0-3m (6mm} [l]
13. (a) C =f;t (b) The screen is uniformly illuminated. < OR No alternate bright and dark fringes can be observed> [!]
(3 X 108) = /(Q.02) [!] The lights from the LEDs are not coherent. < OR No constant phase relationship > [!]
.. f= l.Sx1010 Hz [!]
( c)
(b) (i) Path difference of the diffracted waves fromslits A and B varies along XY. [!]
100
Constructi:ve and destructive interference occur alternately to give maximum and :rnininmm. [!]
(ii) BP-AP=I.SA [!]

90 l++,"'42:8
BP - 1.24 = 0.03
80
BP= 1.27m [!]
70
(iii) Path difference along.XY must be less than slit separation AB.
AB=6cm = 3A 60
Thus the path difference can never reach 3..t alongXY. [!]
Therefore, it is not possible to detect more than 3 maxima along XY. [!]
(Only d= OA.,D.,2/1. canbedetccted.)
(c) Radio waves with lower frequencies and longer wavelength have greater diffraction effect. [!]
Radio waves by-pass small obstacles ( OR Radio waves cannot be reflected by small obstacles). [!]
20
10 1:±::trrrrl::i±Jct±
14. (a) (i) tan 0 = 0.38 0 = 20.SQ [!]
:h
Grating spacing : d = c1
x10·l
(u1 ) [!]
300 < .6. = PS1 - PSi = 10mm = 1 A: drawn.correctly > [!]
3
By dsin.0 = nA .. (
lxl0·
)sin20.8° = (2)2 [!] < .6. = PS1 - PS2 = 20 mm = 2 ,1,: drawn correctly > [!]
300
:. A= 5.92x 10-1m <accept 5.90xl0-7 mto5.97x10-7 m > [!] Constructive interference occurs atP. [!]
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA5-QS /08 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WAS-QS/09
WA5 : Wave Nature of Light WA5 : Wave Nature of Light
15. (d) (i) 6.y= 17mm <accept 15mmto 19mm> [!] 17. (b) (i) Theequationc anonlybeappliedfor a« D. [!]
(ii") The calculation is true only for small angle close to the central line. [!] (ii) Path difference at P = 1 A [!]
Moreover, the screen is 100 close to the sources, D >> a cannot be satisfied. [!] ✓r 7
/::,, = .Jc1+0.5)2+22- o---o-.,�)'�+-22 = 1,1, [!]
:. A= 0.438m
By v = JA
16. (a) (i) D.y = (4.0 -0) = 0.4cm <accept 0.39 to 0.41 cm> [!] :. v = (750)(0.438) = 329ms..1
--
10 <accept 328 to 330ms 1 > [!]
By /zy = AD
= J(l.)B
•• (Q.4x}Q-l) [!]
(QJxlQ-l)
.. ..t=6.67xto-7m <accept6.5-6.7XI0-7m> [!]
(ii) To ensure that light through the two slits have large diffraction [!]
so that the two diffracted light can interfere (OR overlap). [!]
(b) (i) By dsin0= n,1.

10-l 7
( ) sin, 0 = (1) (6.67 X 10- ) [!]
500
.. 0 = 19.5 °
By tan19S = -=
�-8)
[!]
:. � = 0.637m < accept 0.633 m to 0.640 m > [!]
(ii) centre of the pattern
□ D D
< 5 spots shown with symmeti:y about the centre > [1]
< separation between 1st and2nd order spots is larger> [l]
17. (a) (i) Increase the separationD between the double slit and the screen. [1]
(ii) The separation of the bright dots on the screen becomes larger, thus the percentage error is smaller. [1]
(iii) Secondorderbrightfringe: tan0. = (15. 6/2) [!]

l (1.40)
Grating spacing: d = (l0 ) "' 2.5 x 1 0--6 m

--2
[!]
(400)
Bydsin0=nA
. x 10--,,) sin29.1 ° = (2) A
:. (25 A= 6.08 x 10--1 m <accept6.06to6.10 xl()--1 m> [!]
Hong Kong Diploma of Secondary Education Examination
Physics - Compulsory part (!>&1$.gii �)
Section A-Heat and Gases (�;fi>il:3.) I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/01 II
1. Temperature, Heat and Internal e nergy (;';.lt • ;.it,,to R 116)
2. Transfer Processes (�:t}i/!tl) Part A : HKCE examination questions
3. Change of State (*M-11-Jtt.�)
4. GeneralGasLaw (f-:®.i.:ttli!.#) L < BKCE 1981 Paper II- 20 >
5. KineticTheory (51'"-T':il.i'J"till")
Which ofthe following statements is/are correct?
Section B -Force and Motion (:hlf" ilfh)
l. PositionandMovement.(.f:lr.,l.,fo$!!(i) (1) Sound waves cannot be diffracted.
2. Newton's Laws (41ij{�#) (2) A lo uder sound travels faster in air.
3. Moment ofForce (h Ml.) (3) Sound travels faster in water than in air.
4. Work.EnergyandPower(fF.;IJ, flti;,fol'/,$) A. (1) only
5. Momentum (ijf:) B. (3) only
6. ProjectileMotion(&:ltti!.fh) C. (1)&(2)only
7. Circul.arMotion(lll/aJ�fh) D. (2) & (3) only
8. Gravitation ( iJI :II)
Section C- Wave Motion (ii:fh) 2. < BKCE 1983 Paper II- 22 >
1. WavePropagation(;;tla.fflli!.)
2. WavePhenomena(iat)J.t�) Anultrasonic wave is sent from a ship to find the depth of the sea-bed. A signal is received 02 s later. Given that the speed
3. Reflection and Refraction ofLight (Ir, lrli &.ilt &# Af) of sound in sea water is 1500 mS-1 , what is thedepth ofthe sea-bed?
4. Lenses(iU,t) A. 75m
5. WaveNature ofLight(1r.�iUJJ�tt) B. 150m
C. 300m
6. Sound(*-t)
D. 450m
Section D - Electricity and Magnetism ( 'li:;"f<> Z:!t)
1. Electrostatics(ff-il!:"')
2. Electric Circuits ( il!:4) 3. < BKCE 1984 Paper n- 23 >
3. DomesticElectricity(��ffl'l!t)· p
4. Magneti cField(3�)
5. Electromagnetic Induction ( 1!!:-iti:l!.11)
Two sound waves of the same frequency are emitted from 2 sources A and B as shown in the diagram. What kind of
6. AltematingCmrent (�ilii.il!:)
interference will occur at the mid-point P when the 2 waves generated are (1) in phase; (2) anti-phase?
Section E- Radioactivity and Nuclear Energy (:!it.AfJJl.�!fl':tlfis)
1. Radiatio n and Radioactivity(tiM:fo$.Jlt;JL,t.) In phase Anti-phase
2. AtomicModel(J!i.-f-.jlt'!,t!) A. constructive constructive
3. Nuclear Energy (:fttt.) B. constructive destructive
C. destructive constructive
Physics -Elective part (;lHl'•,,i-J D. cannot be determined cannot be determined
Elective 1- Astronomy and Space Science (7'.X<$-:f"�7'.#lf:)
1. The universe seen in different scales (,F r,;J $1: M#.&""F i,IJ ':j!"'iiim:/ tt.) 4. < BKCE 1985 Paper Il- 21 >
2. Astronomy through history (�:SC.!½!-irl.l�A!l!.)
Which ofthe following are longitudinal waves?
3. Orbital motions under gravity ( :i: :JJ r fl!J .il!.:®l1b)
4. Stan: and the universe (·!i.£.>f" 'f"'ili) (1) sound waves transmitted through a solid
(2) sound waves transmitted through water
Elective 2 -Atomic World (1.5t-ri!-W- )
(3) waves in a vibrating string
1. Rutherford's atomic model (Jt ;Jb#.Ji 'Tf,11:�)
2. Photoelectric effect (;'e. 'lt:l&..!i) A. (1) only
3. Bohr's atomicmodel ofhydrogen (�lllfl!J AJi'T� �) B. (3) only
4. Particles orwaves·(il'll.'T�i£) C. (l) &(2) only
D. (1) & (3) only
5. Probing into nano scale Ol.tit#l*-tt.JT-)
Elective 3- Energy and Use of Energy (�ii::fl'�llf-{f.J1tffl)
1. Electricity at home ( M Jll it) 5. < HKCE 1986 Paper II - 23 >
2. Energy efficiency in building (}tmfi!J/m;llf-:1&.lfi) Which of the following can be reflected and diffracted?
3. Energy efficiency in transportation (;{tfl-1: irHtiW.:I&.�) (1) sound waves
4. Non•renewable energy sources (;F-;;J".jlj.!£1Jtil.f,)
(2) infra-red radiation
5. Renewable energy sources ("of.jlj.!£ite,i!!O
(3) X-rays
Elective 4- Medical Physics ( IH'*#.11£�) A. (1) only
1. Making sense of the eye (�llMI I!. 'ii) B. {1) & {3) only
2 Makingsenseofthe_ear(Jf.Mi�'ii) C. (2) & (3) only
3. Medical imaging using non-ionizing radiation (.'J� '11!:�JII.M II} *fJ1t�) D. (1), (2) & (3)
4. Medical imaging_using ionizing radiatio n ( it�Afil-!Jl,��,!jl, )
6.
WA6 :Sound
< HKCE 1986 Paper II- 27 >
PC-WA6-M/02 I
The depth of a lake can be found by the method of echo-sounding. The depth of a short pulse sent vertically down to the
I
12.
WA6: Sound
< HKCE 1990Paper II- 25 >

PC-WA6-M/03l1
y
bottom of the lake was received after 0.6 s. Given that the speed of sound in water is 1440 m s-1, the depth of the Jake will be
A. 72m.
B. 14.4 m.
C. 432m.
D. 864 m.
7. <HKCE 1987Paper II -14 >

The wavele ngth and velocity of a sound in air are 25 cm and 340 m s-1 respectively. When this sound enters a medium, its
wavelength beco mes 75 cm. Find the velocity of the sound in the medium. X
A 113 m s-! In the fi'gure shown, the two loudspeakers Li and Li. emit sound waves of wavelength 2 m. The waves emitted are exactly
B. 340 m s-1 opposite in phase. Wh ich of the following graphs best represents the variation of sound intensity I along the lineXY?
J�, J�,
C. 1020m s- 1 C.
D. 1130ms- 1
A. I B. I l D. l
8. < HKCE 1988Paper II - 22 >

A signal of sound is sent vertically downwards from a ship. Its echo reflected from the sea bed is detected by a microphone
on theship 0.4 slater . What is the depth of the sea ifthe speed of sound in the sea is known to be 1500m r1 ? x�, x�,
A 150m P Q P Q P Q P Q
B. 300m
C. 600m
D. 3000m
13. <BKCE 1990Paper II - 28 >
A bat emits sound waves offrequency 30kHz and receives a reflected signal from an obstacle after 0.15 s. The speed of the
9. < HK.CE 1988 Paper Il - 25 > sound in air is 340 m s-1• How far is the obstacle away from the bat?
The range of sound that a boy can hear is from 30 Hz to 16500Hz. Ifit is given that the speed of sound in 3ll' is 330m-s-1, A. 11.3 m
v.iJ.at is the shortest wavelength of sound inair that the boy can hear? B. 25.Sm
A. 0.02m C. 51.0m
B. 0.09m D. 88.2m
C. 11.0m
D. 50.0m
10. < HKCE1989 Paper II - 24 >
The wavelength and velocity ofa sound in air are 25 cm and 330 m s""1 respectively. When this sound enters a medium, its
wavelength becomes 75 cm. Find the velocity ofthe sound in the medium.
A. l6 5 m s-1
B. 330mS-1
C. 660ms-1
D. 990m s- 1
11. < HKCE 1990 Papei- II - 27 > The diagrams above show the traces of two musical notes X and Yon an oscilloscope. Which of the following statements
'Which of the following statements abom sound is/are correct? is/arc true ?
(I) Sound cannot travel through water. (I) XhasahigherpitcbthanY.
(2) Loudness increases with the amplitude of the sound wave. (2) The loudness ofXis greater than that of Y.
(3) Pitch increases with the wavelength of the sound wave. (3) Xand Yare longitudinal waves.
A. (I) only A (2) only
B. (2) only B. (1) & (2) only
C. (1) & (3) only C. {I) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) only D. (I), (2) & (3)
I
JS.
DSE Physics - Section C : MC.
WA6: Sound
< HKCE 1991 Paper II- 26 >
Which of the following is an application of ultrasonic in everyday life?
PC-WA6-M/04
11
I
21.
WA6: Sound
< HKCE 1997 Paper Il - 22 >

PC-WA6-M/05
11
Which of the following statements concerning microwaves and ultrasonic waves is/are correct?
A. Cooking
B. TV broadcasting (1) Microwaves are electromagnetic waves while ultrasonic waves are not.
C. Camera autofocusing (2) Microwaves andultrasonic waves travel with the same speed in air.
D. Satellite telecommunication (3) Microwaves can be diffracted while ultrasonic waves cannot.
A. (1) only
B. (3) only
16. <HKCE1992Paperll-23> C. (1) & (2) only
Which ofthe following is/are longitudinal waves? D. (2)&(3)only
(1) Ultrasonic transmitted through air.
(2) Infrared transmitted through water. 22. < HKCE 1998 Paper Il-28 >
(3) Gamma rays transmitted through outer space.
Which of the following statements about ultrasonic waves is correct?
A. (1) only
B. (3) only A. They are transverse waves.
C. (1) & (2) only B. They are electromagnetic waves.
D. (2) & (3) only C. They travel with aspeedof3x 10ms-1 in air.
D. They cannot travel through a vacuum.
The frequencies of two musical notes X and Yare 256 Hz and 512 Hz respectively. IfX and Yboth have the same amplitude, 23. < BK.CE 1999 Paper Il- 25>
which of the following statements is/are true ? Which of the following statements about light andsound is/are correct?
(1) fhasa higherpitchthanX (1) Both light and sound are transverse waves.
(2) The loudness ofXis larger than that of Y. (2) Both light and sound travel faster in air than in water.
(3) The wavelength of Yis longer than that ofX.
(3) Both light and sound can undergo refraction when travelling from one :medium to another.
A. (1) only
A. (1) only
B. (3) only
B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only
c. (I)& (2) only
D. (2) &(3) only D. (2) & (3) only
18. <HKCE 1993 Paper II- 28> 24. <HKCE 2000 Paper n - 28 >
Which of the following statements about ultrasonics is INCORRECT ?
A. Ultrasonics are longitudinal waves.
B. The frequency ofultrasonics is above 20 kHz.
C. Ultrasonics are deflected by a magnetic :field. r t'tti'!±m:ili!s:tttfuTI
D. Ultrasonics crumottravel through a vacuum. =\-r
A microphone and a CRO are used to detect the sound emitted by two tuning forks X and Yin turn. The figures show the
19. <HKCE1994Paperll-23> traces obtained, with the same setting of the CRO. Find the ratio of the frequency of the sounds emitted by Xto that of Y.
Which of the following is NOT an application of ultrasonics ? A. 1 :2
A. Camera autofocusing B. 2: I
· B. Satellite communication C. 4:5
C. Measurement of the depth of the sea-bed D. 5:4
D. Detection of cracks in railway tracks
25. <HKCE2001Paper II - 24 >
20. <HKCE 1995 Paper n- 25> A sonar on a ship is used to find the depth of the sea. An ultrasonic wave pulse is sent downwards from the ship towards the
When a sound wave travels from air into water, its wavelength is increased by five times. Ji the speed of sound in air is sea bed. The pulse travels with a speed of 1500 m s-1 in sea water. If the reflected pulse is recei'{ed after 0.16 s, find the
330ms- 1, find the speed of the s01md wave in water. depth of the sea.
A. 66m s- 1 A. 120m
B_ 330 mS-1 B. 240m
C. 1650mS-1 C. 480m
D. insufficient infonnation D. 4688m
Ii
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/06il
Ii
31.
WA6: Sound
< HKCE 2005 Paper JI- 38 >
PC-WA6-M/07l1
Which of the following is not a transverse wave ? Two musical notes are produced by two different kinds of musk-al instruments. The two notes have the same pitch but
A. radio waves different loudness. Which of the following combinations of notes satisfies the above description?
B. visible light
C. X-rays Note : The settings of the CRO for displaying the notes are identical
D. ultrasonic waves A B.
27. < HKCE 2002 Paper II- 29 >
c. D.
NoteX NoteY
The above figures show the CRO displays of two musical notes X and Y. The settings of the CRO for the two notes are 32. <HKCE2005Paperll-37>
identical. Which of the following statements are correct? Which ofthe following is a unit of sound intensity level ?
(1) Notes X and Y are of different qualities. A decibel
(2) Note Xis ofahigher pitch than note Y. B. hertz
(3) NoteXislouderthannoteY. C. sievert
A. (I) & (2) only D. watt
B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only
D. (!), (2) & (3) 33. <BKCE 2005 Paper Il-13 >
28. < HKCE 2002 Paper Il- 28 > Which ofthe following statements about sound waves are correct?
(I) Sound waves are l ongitudinal waves.
The figure shows the image of a foetus (a baby not yet born) taken (2) Sound waves are eleCtromagnetic waves.
by a scanner. Which ofthe following waves should be used in the (3) Sound waves cannot travel in a vacuum.
scanning process ?
A (I) & (2) owy
A. infra-red B. (I) & (3) only
B. microwaves C. (2) & (3) o,Jy
C. ultrasonics D. (!), (2) & (3)
D. X-rays
29. <HKCE 2003 Paper II-29 > 34. < BKCE 2006 Paper JI - 17 >
A ringing electric bell is placed inside a glass jar as shown.
As air is pumped out of the jar, the sound will die away.
Which of the following can explain this phenomenon?
A. The hammer ofthe bell cannot vi'brate in a vacuum.
•:Ele�trip
B. Sound waves are intemallyreflected by the glass surface. ' __bell
C. Sound waves cannot travel in a vacuum. I
0
f
D. The :frequency of sound waves in a vacuum exceeds the
audible frequency range. A loudspeaker is connected to a signal generator to produce sound waves. The frequencyfis varied and the corresponding
wavelength A, is measured. The wavelength is plotted against the reciprocal of the frequency as shown above. Which of the
following are correct deductions obtained from the graph?
30. < HK.CE 2004 Paper Il- 26 > (1) The wavelength of the sound is inversely proportional to its frequency.
(2) The slope of the graph is equal to the speed ofthe sound.
Which ofthe following descriptions about microwaves and ultrasonic waves is correct? (3) The speed of the sound dep ends on its frequency
A They can both travel in a vacuum. A (1} & (2) only
B. They are both transverse waves. B. (1) & (3) only
C. They canboth be deflected by magnetic :fields. C. (2) & (3) only
D. They.travel with different speeds in air. D. O), (2) & (3)
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/ 08 II I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/0911
35. < HKCE2006 Paper 11- 34 > 38. < HK.CE 2006 Paper II- 33 >
The following data show the frequencies and sound intensity levels of some musical notes produced by a piano. Flash lamps used by professional photographers can find object distances by using infrared waves so as to adjust the flash
output Which ofthe following is/are the reason(s) of using infrared waves instead of ultrasonic waves in such flash lamps?
Note Frequency/ Hz Intensity level/ dB (1) Speed of infrared waves is much faster than that of ultrasonic waves mald.ng the time for finding object distances
shorter.
C 256 64 (2) Objects to be photographed will usually emit infrared waves.
D 288 68 (3) The sound produced by ultrasonic waves makes photographers feel annoyed.
A. (!) only
E 320 65 B. (3) only
C. (!) & (2) only
F 341 63 D. (2) & (3) only
Which of the following statements is/are correct ? 39. < HKCE2007 Paper ll-36 >
(1) The note F has the lowest pitch. Which of the following descriptions about ultrasonic waves must be correct ?
(2) The note D has the greatest loudness. A. In the same medium, the speed of the ultrasonic waves is higher than that of the audible sound waves.
(3) The note C played Oil a guitar will S01llld differently from the same note produced by the piano. B. In the same medium, the wavelength of the ultrasonic waves is longer than that of the audible sound waves.
A. (1) only C. In the same medium, the intensity of the ultrasonic waves is higher than that of the audible sound waves.
B. (2) only D. In the same medium, the frequency of the ultrasonic waves is higher than that of the audible sound waves.
C. (!) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) only
40. <BKCE2007Paperll�37>
Two identical loudspeakers X and Y are connected in parallel to a signal generator. A microphone connected to a CRO
JohnGJ
36. < HKCE 2006 Paper II-18 >
O
detects a maximum when it is 0.2 m fromX and 0.4 m from Y. It detects a minimum when it is 0.9 m from X and 0.4 m from
Y. What is the possible wavelength of the sound wavi::?
Tom A. 0.1 m
paper cups
o---
B. 0.2m
�
/ -,<'\
• • __...---u__; C. 0.4m
string D. 0.Sm
John and Tom communicate with each other by using two paper cups connected with a string. Which of the following 41. < HKCE2007 Paper II-39 >
statements are correct ?
Noise barriers built along highways are used to block the noise generated
(1) The sound waves transmitted along the string are transverse waves. by road traffic. Which of the following statements correctly explain how
(2) The speed of the sound waves along the string is faster than that in the air. the noise barriers can block the noise ?
(3) When John whistles a note of 1000 Hz towards the paper cup, Tom will also hear a note of 1000 Hz. (1) The noise from vehicles is reflected.
A. (!) & (2) only (2) The noise is absorbed by the noise barriers.
. B. (!) & (3) only (3) The noise is diffracted at the top edge of the noise barriers .
C. (2) & (3) only A. (1) & (2) only
D. (!), (2) & (3) B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (3) only
D. (!), (2) & (3)
37. < HK.CE 2006 Paper 11- 20 >
Which of the following phenomena are due to the refraction of waves ?
42. < HKCE 2008 Paper II- 14 >
(1) When water waves enter shallow water from deep water, the spacing between wavefronts decreases.
A ship uses a sonar system to detect the depth of the sea. A sound wave signal of frequency 30000 Hz is sent vertically
(2) A swimming pool appears shallower than it actually is. downward from the sea surface and the reflected signal is received 5 s later. Which of the following is correct?
(3) Mazy can hear loud and soft sounds alternately when she walks across in front of two loudspeakers connected to a (The speed of sound wave in sea water is 1400 m s""1 .)
signal generator.
Wavelength of the sound wave in sea water (m) Depth of the sea (m)
A. (!) & (2) only A. 4.67 x 10-2 3500
B. (1) & (3) only B. 4.67 x 10- 2 7000
C. (2) & (3) only C. 9.33 x 10--2 3500
D. (!), (2) & (3) D. 9.33 x 10-2 7000
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/ 10 I I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/11
11
43. < HKCE2008 Paper Il- 36 > 47. < HKCE 2010 Paper II - 39>
In the figure, S1 and Sz are two identical loudspeakers connected
in parallel to a signal generator. The circles represent the
,\.'-
wavefronts of the sound wave produced. What are the changes watoc
to the loudness ofthe sound atX and Y if loudspeaker Si is turned
off? ' '\
sound wave
X y
The figure shows a sound wave travelling in water. It is known that the sound waves travel faster in water than in !Ur. After
A. increases increases refraction, which of the following statements is/are correct?
B.
C.
D.
decreases
increases
decreases
-=
decreases
increases
(1) The wavelength of the sound wave increases.
(2) The :frequency ofthe sound wave remains unchanged.
(3) The sound wave bends away from the normal
44. < HK.CE 2009 Paper II- 35 > A. (1) only
B. (2) only
,-,!s�;------------::::::::::::� x C. (1) & (3) only
i D. (2) & (3) only
Signal Generator 0 ------------- ___________________ Jj y 48. <HKCE2010PaperII-40>

:
not to scale
s,
Soundwaves of 660 Hz are produced from two identical loudspeakers S1 and S2 which are connected in parallel to a signal
---Po ------------t--- �£ ____ _
generator. The distances S 1 X and S2 X are 2 m and 4 m respectively. 0 is the midpoint of S1 S2. What kinds of interference signal
occur atX and Yrespecti.vely? Given that the speed of sound in air is 330m s-1 generator sound intensity
levelm.eter
X y
A constructive constructive
B. constructive destructive Two identical loudspeakers are connected in parallel to a signal generator, O is the midpoint between the loudspeakers.
C. destructive constructive When a sound intensity level meter is movetl from P to Q, the graph below shows the variation of the sound inten sity level
D. destructive destructive received with position.
Sound intensity level
45. <HKCE2010Paper.Il-15>
Which of the following statements about sound waves is not correct ?
A Sound waves are longitudinal waves.
B. Sound waves diffract when travelling through a doorway.
C. Sound waves cannot pass through a vacuum. ''�''
D. All sound waves offrequencies above 20 Hz arc audible. '' ''
�--:::-------�: ,---►Position
p Q
46. < HKCE 2010 Paper II - 12 >
Which of the following statements is/are correct?
In the figure, a firecracker at a position 80 m away from a
building explodes and produces a bang. A girl standing 90 m 00 building (l) The sound intensity level at Q is smaller because tp.e amplitude of the sound wave decreases as it is further away
away from the :firecracker hears two bangs. What is the time 00 from the loudspeakers.
interval between the two bangs ? 00 (2) Constructive interference occurs at pointP while destructive interference occurs at point Q.
00
Given: speed ofsoundin!UI" = 340 ms-1 00 gi,l (3) The result of the experiment shows.that sound is a wave.
00 firecracker
6
A. 0.24 s A. (I) only
B. 0.26 s B. (3) only
C. 0.47 s 80m 90m
C. (I) & (2) only
D. 0.50 s D. (2) & (3) only
I DSE Physics • Section C : M.C.
. L!::=====W=A:::;6=: :::;S:::;oun=d==============;;;.1
PC - WA6 - MI 1211
1 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/13 II
Part B : HKAL examination questions 52. < BKAL 1992 Paper I - 22 >
49. <HKAL1982P.aperl-41>
�gnal
s, generator
rs:z:sa
Two loudspeakers are connected to the same sign al generator. A microphone placed atX detects a maximum sound intensity.
s, When the microphone is moved upwards, maximum sound intensity is also detected at Y. Which of the following may give
possible values ofthe wavelength oftbe sound emitted from the loudspeakers?
[\f\J\11 (1) 0.04m
(2) 0.08m
Two tuning forks Fi and Fz are hit respectively to give sound notes. Their waveforms are displayed on a CRO connected to a
(3) 0.16 m
mforophone. The traces S1 andS2 observed on the screen of the CRO are given by P1 andF2 respectively. The time base of
the CRO remains the same in each case. Which of the following statements is/are correct 7 A. (1) only
B. (3) only
(1) The period ofFi is greater than the period ofFi: C. (1) & (2) only
(2) The pitch ofF1 is greater than the pitch ofFz. D. (2) & {3) only
(3) The speed ofsound from.Fi is greater than the sp� ed of sound from.A.
A. (1) only 53. < HKAL 2008 Paper IlA-11 >
B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only
50. <BKAL1985Pa perl-17>

oonml
Two loudspeakers S1 andS2 are connected to a signal generator to give out sound waves that are in phase. The separation
between S1 and S2 is 0.8 m. A student moves a microphone along a line PP' 8.0 m away from the loudspeakers and parallel
to S1 S2. Loud sound is detected consecutively at P, 0 andP'. Jf PP' equals 2.0 m, estimate the wavelength of the sound
produced by the loudspeakers.
A. 5cm
B. 10 cm
A beam ofultrasoundis directed from water to air as shown in the above figure. Which of the following statements is true 7 C. 15 cm
D. 20cm
A. The refracted beam leaving the surface will bend away from the normal.
B:· The refracted beam will bend towards the ILOima1
C. The refracted beam will travel in the �e direction as the incident beam. 54. < BKAL 2010 Paper IIA-15 >
D. Total internal reflection will occur.
soood�
51. < HKAL 1990 Paper I.., 18 > waves�
Which of the following represent the approximate noise levels
(1) in aquiet school hl,rary ?
Sound waves of frequency 1000 Hz travel from air to water as shown. If the incident wavefront makes an angle of 13 ° with
(2) near the road with heavy traffic ? the interface, find the angle of refraction and the wavelength of sound in water.
(Given: speed of sound in air and that in water are 340 m s-1 and 1500 m s-1 respectively.)
(1) (2)
angle of refraction wavelength in water
A. 30dB 60dB
B. 60dB 90dB A. 2.9 ° 7.7cm
B. 2.9° 1.Sm
c. 30dB 90dB c. 830 7.7cm
D. 90dB 60dB D. 8 3" 1.Sm
I DSE Physics , Section C : M.C.
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/14
I I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. PC-WA6-M/15

11
-
WA6: Sound
5S. < HKAL 2011 Paper 11A - 12 >
Part C : Supplemental exercise
"'""°""d
[§j1 Ill)
speed detector
p 58. What is the approximate range of audible frequencies for a young adult?
A. from 2Hz to 2 000Hz
The above figure shows a speed detector used for measuring the speed of a toy car. The detector emits an ultrasound pulse Pi B. from 20Hz to 2 000Hz
towards the car, which is reflected back to the detector as pulse R1 after 15 ms. Another pulse P2 is emitted 0.5 s after P1 is
C. from 20Hz to 20000Hz
emitted and the reflected pulse Rz is received 20 ms later.
D. from 200Hz to 200 000Hz
59. Which factors affect the quality of sound waves produced by a musical instrument ?
A the amplitude ofthe sound waves
Assume that the car is travelling directly away from ¢.e detector with -uniform speed. Estimate its speed. B. the frequency of the sound waves
Given: speed of ultrasound in air= 340 m S-1 C. the velocity of the sound waves
A. 1.7 m :.1 D. the :waveform, of the sound waves
B. 2.lms-1
C. 2.6m s-1
D. 3.4ms~1 60. Two boys both sing the same musical note "doh". However, the two notes can be distinguished to be sung by which boy
since they have different
A. speed.
< HKAL 2011 Paper IIA-11 > B. loudness.
f--
c. pitch.
to
D. quality.
oj ►x
61.
Two loudspeakers are connected to a signal generator and they gives out sound waves in anti-phase. A small microphone is
placed midway between the two loudspeakers. The intensity of the sound detected by the microphone is close to zero.
Which of the following changes can lead to a significant increase in the sound intensity detected?
(l) Move the microphone along thex direction.
Mary stands between two cliffs A and B as shown in the above figure. She claps her hands and hears the first echo after 1.2 s
(2) Move the microphone along they direction. and the second echo after 1.8 s. If the speed of sound in air is 320 m s-1, what is the distance dbetween the two cliffs?
(3) Increase the frequency of the signal generator. A. 192m
B. 288m
A. (I) only
C. 480m
B. (2) only D. 960m
C. (1) & (3) only
D. (2) & (3) oruy
62. Peter sees a flash oflightning in the sky. After 6 s, he hears the bang of thunder. How far way is he from the thunderst.orm?
(Given: speed oflightinair = 3 x 108 m s~l; speed of sound in air = 320 m s-1.)
_,�
57. < HKAL 2013 Paper 11A - 16 >
A. 960m
B. 1920m
C. 9x108 m
D. 18x108 m
�
63. Arrange the following in ascending order of frequency:
A boy claps his hands in front of a cliff at the positionX as shown in the above figure. He hears the echo 0.8 s later. He then (1) the domestic mains voltage
walks a distance d towards the cliff and claps again at the position Y. This time he hears the echo 0.6s later. Find d if the (2) microwaves from a mobile phone
speed of sound in air is 330 m S-1 • (3) a note of sound from a violin
A. 17m
A. (1) (2) (3)
B. 33m (1)(3) (2)
B.
C. 66m C. (2) (1) (3)
D. 132m D. (3)(2) (1)
WA6: Sound
Part D : HKDSE examination questions
PC-WA6-M/1611
I
68. <HKDSE 2014 PaperIA-18>
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/1711
ip
64. < BKDSE Sample Paper IA- 22 >
Which of the following statements about sound waves is/are correct ?
(1) Sound waves are longitudinal 'Waves. __________________J 0
(2) Sound waves are electromagnetic waves. 3m
(3) Sound waves cannot travel in a vacuum. s,
A. (2) only
B. (3) only S1 and S2 are two loudspeakers connected to a s ignal generator but the sound waves produced by them are in anti-phase.
C. (1) & (2) on ly Point O is equidistant from the loudspeakers while point P is at the distances shown in the figure from the loudspeakers.
D. (1) & (3) only What type of interference occurs at O and P if the wavelength of the sound waves is 10 cm'!
0 p
65, < HKDSE2012 Paper IA - 22 > A. destructive constructive
B. constructive constructive
The figure shows the waveforms of sound notes generated by a violin, a piano and a tuning fork. The scale is the same in C. destructive destructive
time and intensity axes for all three waveforms. D. constructive destructive
/VVV\
(X)
-
Figure (a) shows a car travelling with a uniform speed along a straight road away from a stationary ultrasound generator and
(Y) detector at Y. When the car is 64m fron:l. Y, the generator emits an ultrasound pulse towards the car.
ultrasound generator emitted reflected

and '�'""' pulse � pulse
[9J:J ))) @ )")'l')'�'I time/,
y 0 0.2 0.4 0.6
(Z) 64m
Figu:re(a) Figure(b)
The pulse is then reflected back to the detector at Yand displayed on a CRO as shown in Figure (b). Estimate the speed of
the car. Given: speed of ultrasound in air is 340 ms- 1•
Which ofthe following about the sound notes are correct ? A. l6ms-1
(1 ) They all have the same pitch. B. 20ms-1
(2) The qualities of sound of(Y) and (Z) are different C. 24ms-1
(3) (X) is generated by the tuning fork. D. 32ms- 1
A. (1) & (2) only
B. (1) & (3) only
C. (2) & (2) only 70. < HKDSE2014Paper IA- 19 >
D. (1), (2) & (3)
Which of the following statements about sound waves is/are correct ?
(1) Sound waves are electromagnetic waves.
66. < HKDSE2012 Paper IA- 23 > (2) Sound waves cannot travel in a vacumn.
Which ofth e following about ultrasound is INCORRECT? (3) Sound waves cannot form stationazywaves.
A (2)only
A. Ultrasound is a longitudinal wave.
B. The frequency ofultrasound is greater than 20000 Hz. B. (3) only
C. (1) & (2) only
C. · In air, the speed ofultrasound is faster than the speed of audl.Ole sound.
D. In air, the diffraction effect ofultrasound is less prominent than that of audible sound.
D. (1) & (3) only
67. <BKDSE2013PaperlA-19> 71. < BKDSE 2015Paper IA- 19 >

f
l
Astronauts P and Q stand at 400m and 600mrespectively from a vertical A balloon is rising at a uniform speed of 20 m s- 1• When the balloon t2oms- 1
�=•
Top view cliff�
cliff on the surface ofa planet The figure shows the top view. P claps his is at an altitude Has shown, it sends a sound signal towards the ground.
HI
hands once and Q hears two clapping sounds separated by 4 s. What is the After 5 s, the balloon receives the echo of the signal Estimate H.
speed of sound in the atmosphere of this planet '! jl ____;________ Given: speed of sound in air "" 340 m s-1 •
A. lO0ms-1 A. 1600m
B. 150 ms- 1 B. 850m
C. 200ms-1 C. 800m
D. 250ms-1 D. 750m
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/18
I I DSE Physics - Section C : M.C.

WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-M/ 19 II
72. <HKDSE2016PaperIA-21> 76. < HKDSE 2017 Paper IA -21>
P (ma:dmum loudness detected) If the speed of sound in water isx and the speed oflight in water isy, whlch of the following is correct 7
speed ofsound in air speed of light in air
s, A. >x >y
B. >x <y
C. <x >y
s, D. <x <y
Loudspeakers Si and Sz connected to a signal generator emit sound waves which are in phase. Point O is equidistant from the
loudspeakers while at pointP maximum. loudness is detected. The wavelength of the sound waves is A Which statement is 77. <HKDSE2018Paper1A-21>
mCORRECT?
Which ofthe following is NOT typical sound intensity level that occurs in daily life?
A. BothPS1 andPS1mustbeintegral n:vltiples ofwavelength �
B. The definite value of the path difference PS2 -PS1 cannot be determined from the information given. A. 130 dB : when an airplane take-off
C. At least one point of minimum loudness can be detected between O and P. B. 110 dB : at a rock concert
D. Minimum loudness 'Will be detected atP if the sound waves from S1 and S2 are in antiphase. C. 80 dB : having a normal conversation
D. 30 dB : inside a library
73. < HKDSE 2016 Paper.IA- 23 >
Which of the following are applications ofultrasound? 78. <HKDSE2018PaperIA-14>
(1) sterilizingdrinlangwater Which ofthe following statements about waves is/are correct 7
(2) detecting cracks in railway tracks (1) Longitudinal waves can 1ransmit energy from one place to another but transverse waves cannot
(3) breaking up kidney stones
(2) Sound waves propagate f.aster in waterthau in air.
A. (!) & (2) only
B. (1) & (3) only (3) Infra-red radiation is a kind ofelectromagnetic wave.
C. (2) & (3) only A. {I) only
D. (!), (2) & ( 3) B. (3) only
C. (!) & (2) only
D. (2) & (3) only
An experiment is set up to m=w:e the speed of sound in air as shown. P and Qare two microphones connected to a timer. 79. <HKDSE 2019 Paper IA-21>
A sound is produced at X The timer starts when P receives the sound, and stops when Q receives the sound. Toe timer
shows the time taken for the sound to travel :fromP to Q. The distance PQ and the time shown can be used to calculate the
=••
speed of sound.
tim ,
�
, ;. ,,,;,i,ill,N/,,.,
X •----- ----- ------------- - --,
p Q
Which ofthe following statements is INCORRECT 7
A X, P and Q must be along the same straight line.
B. The percentage error in the time measured will increase if the distancePQ is reduced.
C. The speed of sound determined should be independent ofthe distance betweenX and P.
D. The distance PQ must be equal to an integral multiple of wavelengths of the sound produced atX
75. < HKDSE2017 Paper IA- 18>

Two musical notes of the same pitch and loudness are produced by two different musical instruments. They sound different
to the human ears because they have different
A amplitudes.
B. phases.
C. wave speeds.
D. waveforms.
80. <HKDSE 2020 PaperIA-19>
Which ofthe following phenomena proV1des conclusiv

e evidence that sound is a wave ?
(1) refl ection ofsound from a wall
( 2) refraction ofsound at the bound between two
lllY media
(3) interference of sound
A. (2)only
B. (3)only
C. (I) and (2) only
D. (I) and (3) only
Which of the following statements about ultrasound isfare correct ?
{I) Ultrasound has a shorter wavelength than audible sound.

(2) Ultrasound cannot be produced by vibrating objects.
(3) Ultrasound cannot be heard as it cannot travel through air.
A. (l}ooly
B. (3) only
C. (1) and (2) only
D. (2) and (3) only
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA6-MS/01 DSE Physics - Section C : MC. Solution PC-WA6-MS/02
WA6:Sound WA6: Sound
HKEAA's Marking Scheme is prepared for the markers' reference. It should not be regarded as a set of model answers.
Stllde:nw and teachers who are not involved in the marking process are advised to intetPret the Marking Scheme with care. 3. B
AsP is the mid-point, the path difference at Pis zero.
M.C. Answers
Ifthe two sources vibrate in phase, P would undergo constructive interference.
l. B II. B 21. A 31. D 41. A 51. C If the two sources vibrate out of phase (anti-phase), P would undergo destructive interferem:;e,
2. B 12. C 22. D 32. A 42. A 52. C

4. C
3. B 13. B 23. B 33. B 43. C 53. B
✓ (I) Sound waves in solid are longitudinal waves.
4. C 14. D 24. C 34. A 44. A 54. D
✓ (2) Sound waves in water are longitudinal waves.
5. D 15. C 25. A 35. D 4 D
5 . 55. A
• (3) Waves in vibrating string are transverse waves.
6. C 16. A 26. D 36. C 46. C 56. A
7. C 17. A 27. B 37. A 47. B 57. B 5. D
8. B 18. C 28. C 38. A 48. A 58. C Since sound waves, infra-red radiation and X-rays are waves, they possess all tbe phenomena ofwaves.
Thus, all of them can be reflected and diffracted
9. A 19. B 29. C 39. D 49. A 59. D
10. D 20. C 30. D 40. B 50. B 60. D
6. C
d= ½ v f,,J = ½ (1440)(0.6) = 432 m
61. C 71. C 81. A
62. B 72. A
7. C
63. B 73. C There is no change in frequency when sound waves enter another medium.
64. D 74. D By v = fJi. :. VO::: A,
65. D 75. D .;i a .i
v, A,
66. C 76. C
. (340) _ (25)
67. C 77. C V2 - (75)
68. C 78. D
8. B
69. B 79. D
d = ½v6t = ½(1500)(0.4) = 300m
70. A BO. B
9. A
M.C. Solution By v = fA,. the greatest frequency gives the shortest wavelength.
(330) = (16500) A,
I. B
• (I) All waves, including sound waves, possess ail the four phenomena, including diffraction.
A,= 0.02m
• (2) Speed of sound is independent ofits intensity or loudness, but depends on medium only.
10. D
✓ (3) Sound wave travels faster in liquid than in gas or air
There is no change in frequency when sound enters another medium.
Byv""'fA v o::: A. (for constant frequency/)
2. B
V. 6./ (1500)(0.2) 3.. = ..i (330) a (25)
d a --a
v, V2 (75)
2 A,
= 150m v2 = 990ms-1
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA6-MS/03 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA6-MS /04
WA6: Sound WA6: Sound
11. B 18. C
X (1) Sound wave can travel in any material medium. including wat�. ✓ A. Ultrasonics are sound waves with frequency higher than 20000 Hz, thus they are longitudinal waves.
✓ (2) Ifthe amplitude of sound increase, loudness increases. ✓ B. This is the definition of ultrasonics.
X (3) If the wavelength increases, :frequency decreases, thus pitch decreases. X c. Ultrasonics cannot be deflected by magnetic field.
Pitch should decrease wi1fi: the wavelength.
✓ D. Sound wave requires a material medium to travel.
12. C
19. B
For the two sources vt'brating lll opposite phase, type of interference is reverse : Satellite communication is an application of microwaves, not ultrasonics.
(1) atthemid-point: /1 = Oil. destructive interference occurs, intensity is minimum
20. C
(2) atQ: A=-J32 +42 -4=1m=½A constructive interference occurs, intensity is maximum
There is no change in frequency when sound enters another medium.
Byv=f'J,..
13. B
d = ½vM
;. Vw.t... = 330x5 = 1650ms~1
= ½ (340)(0.15 )
= 25.Sm 21. A
✓ (1) lTitrasonic waves are sound waves.
14. D X (2) lTitrasonic waves are not electromagnetic waves, speed of ultrasonics is less than speed of microwaves.
✓ (1) Xhas shorter period, thus it has higher frequency, therefore, Xhas higher pitch. X
(3) Both are wa<ies, thus both possess all wave phenomena, including diffraction.
✓ (2) Xhas a greater amplitude, thus it has greater loudness
✓ Bo�X and Yare musical notes, i.e. they are sound waves, thus they are Ion"gi.tudinal waves.
22. D
(3)
X A. illtrasonics are sound waves, thus they are longitudinal waves.
15. C
X B. illtrasonics cannot travel in vacuum, they are not electromag netic waves.
X C. illtrasonics travel with the speed of sound, not the speed of light of 3 x 108 m s-1•
X A. Microwave oven cooking: microwaves
✓ D. Ultrasonics require a material medium to travel, they cannot travel in vacuum.
X B. TV broadcasting : radio waves
✓ C. Camera autofocusing: ultrasonic waves ( OR infra-red radiation)
23. B
X D. Satellite telecommunication: microwaves X (1) Sound is a longitudinal wave.
X (2) Sound travels faster in water than in air.
16. A ✓ (3) Both of them are waves, thus both possess all wave phenomena, including refraction.
✓ (1) lntrasonic waves are sound waves with frequency higher than 20000 Hz, they are longitudinal waves.
• (2) Infrared radiations are electromagnetic waves, they are transverse waves. 24. C
X (3) Gamma rays are electromagnetic waves, they are tiansvcrse waves. For a certain interval of time displayed in the CRO,
Xcompletes 2 cycles but Y completes 2.5 cycles.
17. A
ix :fy = 2:2.5 = 4:5
✓ (1) Frequency of Yis higher than that of.X: thus Yhas a higher pitch.
X (2) & they have the same amplitude, they have the same intensity and thus same loudness. 25. A
X
(3) By v "" f/2, Yhas the higher frequency, thus Y should have the shorter wavelength. d ½ct = ½ (1500) x (0.16) = 120 m
DSE Physics · Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA6-MS/05 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA6-MS/06
26. D 33. B
A. Radio waves are electromagnetic waves, they are transverse in nature. ✓ Sound waves are longitudinal waves, with particles vibrate along the direction of travel.
(I)
B. Visible light is electromagnetic wave, it is transverse in nature. • (2) Sotmd waves are mechanical waves, not electromagnetic waves •
C. X-rays are electromagnetic waves, they are transverse in nature.
✓ (3) Sound waves need a material medium for travelling, they cannot travel in vacuum.
✓ D. Ultrasonics waves are longitudinal waves, theyare NOT transVerse waves.
34. A
27. B
✓ (I) Since the graph is a straight line passes through the origin, A and ..!. are proportional,
✓ (I) Notes X and Y are of different qualities as they have different waveforms. f
(2) NotesXand Yhave the same pitch as they have the same frequency (same period). Le. the wavelength is inversely proportional to the frequency.
✓ (3) NoteXhas larger amplitude than note Y, so note Xis louder than note Y.
✓ (2) Thcslopcofthegraph"" ....!.. =JA = v.
I/f
28. C • (3) Since the slope is constant, the speed is independent ofthe frequencyf
Ultrasonics can be used to examine foetus without causing harmful effect
X-rays cannot be used since X rays
- would cause hannful effect to the foetus.
35. D
29. C
• (I) Pitch depends on the frequency.
As note Chas the lowest frequency, note·c should have the lowest pitch.
Since sound waves cannot travel in a vacuum,
✓ (2) Intensity level gives the loudness of sound.
the sound cannot be heard after the air has been pumped out.
As note D has the greatest intensity·level, note D has the greatest loudness.
✓ (3) Different musical instruments give out sounds of different quality, and they will sound differently.
30. D
• A. Microwaves can travel in vacuum but ultrasonic waves cannol
• B. Microwaves are transVerse waves but ultrasonic waves are longitudillal waves. 36. C
• C. Both microwaves and ultrasonic waves cannot be deflected by magnetic fields. • (I) The sound waves transmitted along the string should be longitudinal waves •
✓ D. Speed of microwaves equals speed of light but speed of ultrasonic waves equal t he speed of sound. ✓ (2) Speed of sound waves in solid is faster than that in the air.
Thus they have different speeds in air.
✓ (3) Frequency would not change when the sound travels along the string.
31. D
• A The two waves have different loudness, thus they should have different amplitudes, not the same. 37. A
• B The two waves have different loudness, thus they should have different amplitudes, not the same. ✓ (1) Since the spacing between wavefronts is the wavelength, as wavelength decreases, speed decreases.
• C. The two waves are produced by different musical instruments, they should have difl:erent quality,
When speed changes, refraction occurs.
thus they should have different waveforms, not the same. ✓ (2) The swimming pool appears shallower is due to apparent depth, which is due to refraction of light.
✓ D. These two notes have different amplitudes, representing different loudness. • (3) Alternate loud and soft sounds are due to interference, not refraction.
These two notes have different waveforms, representing different quality from different instruments.
38. A
32. A
✓ (1) Speed of infrared waves is the speed oflight which is much greater than the speed of sound waves.
✓ A. Decibel (dB) is a unit of sound intensity level.
• B. Hertz (Hz) is a unit of frequency. • (2) The flash lamps would emit infra.red waves and then detect the infrared waves reflected by the object.
• C Sievert (Sv) is a unit of radiation dose. The objects emit infrared waves or not would not affect the reflected infrared waves.
• D. Watt(W) is a unit of power. • (3) Ultrasonic waves cannot be heard byhumau ears, and thus no annoyance would be caused.
WA6 :Sound WA6: Sound
39. D 46. C
The definition ofultrasonic waves is sound waves with frequency higher than that of the audtble sound waves, The first bang is directly from the firecracker. •• t1 = � = 0.265s
340
or sound waves with frequency higher than 20 000 Hz.
Thus, ultrasound has frequency higher than that of audrllle sound. The second band is reflected from the building. tz = 80+80+90 = 0.735 s
340
Timeinterval = 0.735-0.265 = 0.47s
40. B
Atthepointofmaxitnum.pathdifference = 0.4 - 0.2 = 02m "' n/1. 47. B
Atthepointofminimum,pathdifference = 0.9 - 0.4 = 0.5m = (m+½P • (1) As the speed of sound wave in air is smaller, the wavelength of sound waves in air is shorter.
Suppose the wavelength is 0.2 m.. ✓ (2) Frequency must be unchanged during refraction.
Atthepointofmaximum,pathdifference = 0.2m = (1) A • (3) As the speed ofsound waves in air is smaller, the refracted angle is smaller,
Atthepointofminimum, path difference = 0.5 m = (2½) A thus the sound waves should bend towards the normal.
Since the wavelength 0.2m satisfies the above conditions, this is the only possible wavelength among the four values.
48. A
41. A ✓ (1) Sound intensity decreases with distance.
✓ (1) The noise is reflected by the barrier and cannot transmit to the region behind the barriers. • (2) As the path difference at Q is zero, Q has constructive interference.
✓ (2) The noise is absorbed at the lower part of the barriers to reduce the noise from spreading out • (3) This experiment only shows that the sound intensity decreases with distance.
• (3) Ifthe noise is diffracted and spreads away, the noise cannot be blocked.
To prove that sound is a wave, intetference must be demonstrated.
Alternate loud and soft sound should be shown to demonstrate the phenomenon of interference.
42. A
49. A
By V =fA :. (1400) = (30000) ,1, A= 4.67 x IO-lm
✓ (1) S1 takes a longer time to complete 1 cycle, thus the period ofF1 is greater.
By d = ½vM = ½(1400)(5) = 3500m
(2 ) As the period ofFi is greater, the frequency ofF1 is smaller, thus the pitch ofFi is lower.
(3) Both are sound waves travelling in air, thus they should have the same speed.
43. C
<D Xis a point under destructive interference since path difference atX is 0.5 /1.. Loudness atX is minimum initially.
50. B
If S1 is turned off, no destructive interference occurs, thus the loudness would increase.
When ultra�sound travels from water to air, it travels from a faster medium to a slower medium,
Yis a point under constructive interference since path difference at Y is O 'J,.. Loudness at Y is maximum initially.
If S1 is turned off, no constructive interference occurs, thus the loudness would decrease. thus the refracted angle is smaller, the refracted beam bends towards the nonnal.
44. A C
Wavelength ofthe sound wave : 0) In quiet school library, the sound level is very low, about 30 to 40 dB
By v =fA. :. (330) = (660)/2 :. A= 0.5m (ii) Near a busy road with heavy traffic, the sound level is very high, about 90 to 100 dB
Path difference atX = 4 - 2 = 2 m = 4/2 :. Constructive intetference occurs atX
52. C
Path difference at Y = 0 m = M :. Constructive intetference occurs at Y.
Path difference: I::. = 3.30 - 3-22 = 0.08 m
45. D ✓ (1) If A= 0.04 m, then I::.= 2 A, thus constructive interference occurs.
Audl"ble range of sound is from 20 Hz to 20000 Hz. ✓ (2) If /2= 0.08 m, then I::.= 1 A, thus constructive interference occurs.
Sound waves above 20000 Hz are not audl"ble. (3) If A= 0.16 m, then I::.= 0.5 A, thus destructive interference should occur.
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA6-MS /09 DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA6-MS/10
53. B 61. C
S1P = .Jcs)2+(1-0.4) 2 = 8.022m The first echo is due to the reflection of sound at cliffA.
S2P = .J(8 )2+(l+0.4)i = 8.122m

Distance between Mary and cliffA : d1 = ½ (320) x (1.2) = 192m
The second echo is due to the reflection of sound at cli:ffB.
Pathdifference atP = 8.122-8.022 = O.lm
Distance betweenM:aryandcli:ffB: dz= ½C320)x(l.8) = 288m
SinceP is at the first maximum from 0, path difference at Pis 1 I\..
Therefore, distance between the two cliffs :
:. I\,= 0.1 m = 10cm
d = d1+di = 192+288 = 480m
54. D
62. B
B y sin0.1r =� sinl3° 340 .-. a...1er = g30
sine.....,. sine,._ = 1soo Since the speed of light is very great, the time taken for the lightning to be seen is negligible.
v....,_
By v-.. = f;,_,., Distancetravelledbythe sound = vt = (320)(6) = 1920m
(1500) = (1000) 4-or

63. B
k.111o, = 15m
(I) frequency of domestic main voltage = 50Hz
55. A (2) typical order of wavelength of microwaves = 10-2 m typical orderoffrequency = (3xlO')"" l010 Hz
(!o-'J
di= fvt1 = ½(340)(15xlo- 3) = 2.55m (3) Frequency ofa soundnote from a violin "" 1000 Hz
ti;, = ½ V t2 = ½ (340}(20X 10-3) = 3.4M Ascending order offi:equency: (1) (3) (2)
v = D.d "" 3.4-25 . 5 = 1.7ms-1

b.t 0.5 64. D
✓ (1) Sound waves are longitudinal waves, with particles vibrate along the direction oftravel
56. A • (2) Sound waves are mechanical waves, not electromagnetic waves.
✓ (1) Moving alongthex direction would change the path difference, thus vary the type of interference. ✓ (3) Sound waves need a material medium for travelling, they cannot travel in vacuum.
• (2) Moving along they Wtection would keep the path difference remain as zero, thus no variation.
• (3) As the path difference is zero, destructive interference occurs, no matter what the frequency is. 65. D
✓ (1) Since they allhave the same number ofcycles in the same time interval, they have the same_ frequency.
✓ (2) Since the waveforms of (Y) and (Z) are different, they have different qualities.
57. B
✓ (3) Tuning fork would give the pure sinusoidal waveform as shown in (X).
When the boy walks a distanced, the echo is heard with an extra time of(0.8 - 0.6) = 0.2s
d= ½x330x02 = 33m
66. C
In air, the speed ofultrasound is the same as the speed of audible sound .
58. C :. C is INCORRECT.
Audible frequencies for a normal young adult are in the range of 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz.
67. C
59. D
The sound produced at P travels a distance of_PQ towards Q and Q hears the first sound.
Quality is determinedby the waveform of the sound waves.
The soundproduced atP travels towards the cliff and reflected to Q andQ hears the second sound.
60. D The extra distance travelledby the secondsound is two times the distance between P and the cliff.
We distinguish different sources of sound by observing the different quality of the sound notes. x4oo = 200mS-1
Speedofsound: v = z
4
DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA6-MS/ll DSE Physics - Section C : M.C. Solution PC-WA6-MS/12
68. C 74. D
At 0, the path difference is zoro. ✓ A. For sound travelling fromXtowards the right along a straight line,
Jfthe two waves emitted are in anti-phase, then destructive interference occurs at O. P and Q should be along the same line.
AtP, path difference = 3 - 2.8 = 0.2 m = 20 cm = 2 A ✓ B. The speed of sound vis calculated by: v = d It.
Since the two waves emitted are in anti-phase, thus destructive interference OCC'UIS at P. If the distance dis reduced, the percentage error of d Wlll increase,
thus the percentage error of v will increase.
69. B ✓ c. If distanced increase, time twill also increase, the calculated value ofv should be unchanged.
The ultrasound is emitted at the time of0.1 s and the reflected pulse is received at the time of0.5 s. D. The distance PQ can be any value, not necessary to be integral multiple of wavelength of sound.
The ultrasound pulse takes a time inteival of0.4 s to travel to the car and back to the detector.
Thus, the ultrasound pulse reaches the car after a time interval of 0.2 s. 75. D
At that instant, distance of the car from the generator = v t = 340 x 0.2 = 68 m Two musical notes having different waveforms can give different quality ofsound,
and this can be distinguished as two different sounds by human ears.
Distance travelled by the car during this time interval of 0.2 s = 68 - 64 = 4 m
Speed of the car = !!... = � = 20 m s-1

t D.2 76. C
Speed of sound in air is smaller than that in water, thus, speed of sound in air < x.
70. A Speed oflight in air is greater than that in water, thus, speed oflight in air > y.
(!) Sound waves are mechanical waves, not electromagnetic waves.

77. C
✓ (2) Sound waves need a material medium to travel, thus they cannot travel in vacuum.
✓ A. When we are close to an airplane taking-oft; the noise should exceed the threshold ofpain.
(3) All waves can form stationaiy waves, including sound waves.
Thus, 130 dB maybe possible.
✓ B. At a rock concert, the noise maybe very large and close to the threshold ofpain.
71. C
By d = vt
:. (H+H+2DX5) = (340)X(5) H = 800m
• c Normal conversationbetween two persons should be around 60 dB.
Thus, 80 dB is NOT a typical level.
✓ D. Inside a library, it may be very quiet.
72. A
• A. To give constructive interference, path difference PS2 - PS1 must be an integral multiples of A,.
However, PS;, andPS1 need not be integral multiples of A, e.g. 6. = 2.5/2- 1.5/2 = Lt
78. D
✓ B. The path difference maybe 1,1, 2,1, 3,1, •••
(!) Both longitudinal waves and transverse waves can transmit energy from one place to another.
The definite value cannot be determined.
✓ (2) Speed ofsound waves in solid > speed of sound waves in liquid > speed of sound waves in air
✓ C. The path difference at P is at least equal to 1 /2.
Between O and P, there is a point that the path difference is ½ A. ✓ ( 3) Infra.red radiation is a kind of electromagnetic wave, with wavelength longer than visible light.
At this point, destructive interference occurs and minimum loudness is detected.
✓ D. If S1 andS2 are in antiphase, then the type ofinterference will be reversed,
thus, destructive interference will occur at P.
73. C
• (!) lTitrasound cannot sterilize drinking water, only ultraviolet radiation can sterilize drinking water.
✓ (2) Ultrasmmd can be used to detect cracks in railway or machines.
✓ (3) lTitrasound can be used to smash kidney stones, break them into smaller pieces.
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC -WA6-Q/ 01 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA6-Q/02
WA6: Sound WA6: Sound I
Part A : HKCE examination questions 2. < HKCE 1991 Paper I -4 >

The below figure shows the set-up to study the interference of sound. P, Qare two identical loudspeakei:s. PC= 2.05 m and
�·· · ··· '···:f

1. < BKCE 1988 Paper 1- 5 > QC=2.31 m.
Two small loudspeakers P and Q emit sound wave of the same frequency and intensity. A microphone connected to a CRO is A Microphone
moved along the line IT as shown in the figure below. A trace on the screen is also shown in the figure.
C To oscilloscope
p4xr--------------------- y
Qi:d
B
(a) Initially only Pis connected to the signal generator and sound is emitted. A microphone connected to an oscilloscope is
placed at point C. The below figure shows the trace on the oscilloscope. The speed of sound in air is 325 m s~ 1• Find
(a) It is given that the time base setting is 0.1 ms cm- 1• the frequency and wavelength of the sound. (5 marks)
(i) What is the frequency ofthe sound? (3 marks)

' 1
10-R'
�O.l
(ii) Is this frequency below, within or above audible range?
(b) The amplitude ofth.e trace shows amaxinmm when the microphone is at C (on the perpendicular bisector of PQ) and
gradually decreases to a minimum at B.
(i) Explain briefly why this happens. (2 marks)

(b) NowbothP and Qare connected to the signal generator and they emit sound of the same :frequency and intensity as in
part (a). Interference is observed when the microphone is moved along AB.
(i) Is the interference of sound at C constructive or destructive? Explain your answer. (3 nwks)
(ii) Write down an equation to show the relationship between the distance PB, QB and the wavelength A.. (2 marks)
(ii) Compared with (a), bow do the pitch and loudness of the sound at C change? (2 marks)
(iii) IfPB= 3.04 m and QB"" 3.12m, calculate the speed.of sound in air. (3 marks)
(iii) The amplitude of the trace on the oscilloscope is not zero at the positions of destrµctive interference. Suggest two
possible reasons. (2 marks)
(iv) How would the distance CB be affected, when sound ofa lo-wer frequency is used? {I mark)
(iv) A student says that alternate constructive and destructive interference will also be observed along XY. {.¥ is the
(c) If loudspeaker P is disconnected from the signal generator when the microphone is still at B, how would the period and mid-point ofPQ.) State whether his statement is true or false. Explain briefly. (3 marks)
amplitude of the trace be affected? (2 marks)
I
3. <BKCE1996Paperl-4>
DSE Physics • Section C : Question
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-Q
The :figures below show the traces on a CRO of three notes produced by different musical instrument
/0311
4.
WA6: Sound
(b) A barrier with an opening is placed in the ripple tank as shown in Figure 1.
PC-WA6-Q/04
(Note: The settings ofthe CRO remain unchanged.) (i) In the figure below, draw the wave pattern formed on the other side of the barrier. Name this wave phenomenon.
(3 m&k,)
Barrier
Vibrator I 111"[
ITTm
(ii) The wavelength of the water waves is increased as shown in Figure 3.
I tt
(a) Which of the notes is produced by a tuning fork? (1 mark)
(b) Compare the pitch and loudness of the three notes. Explain briefly. (4marks)
Figure3
(1) Suggest two methods which can be used to increase the wavelength of the water waves.
4. < BKCE 2000 Paper I- 9 >

.....,., (2) On Figure 3, draw the wave pattero formed on the other side of the bani.er. (2 marks)
(,)
◄))))
Figure:z �'!IIJ"7-+----rumor
speaker cones
Figure 1 shows a vi"brator producing straight water waves in a ripple_ tank. Figure 2 shows a loudspeaker which is emitting
low-frequency sounds.
(a) You are given the following equipment:
a cork, a slinky spring, a candle and matches, a ruler.
Select suitable equipment and descnbe

Figure 4 above shows a loudspeaker unit with two speaker cones, a big one and a small .one. One speaker cone emits
low-frequency sounds and the other emits high-frequency sounds. The sound waves generated by the speaker cones will
(i) a method to demonstrate that the water waves in Figure 1 are transverse, and
bend around the rim of the cones in a way similar to water waves bending around comers of obstacles.
Which cone is more suitable for emitting high-frequency sounds? Explain your answer. (3 marks)
(ii) a method to demonstrate that the sound waves in Figure 2 are longitudinal (2 marks)
PC-WA6-Q/05 PC-WA6-Q/06
I
5. < HKCE 2001 Paper I- 6 > 7. < HKCE 2003 Paper I- 7 >
Explain the following phenomena:
(a) In a thunderstorm, lightning is seen before thunder is heard. (1 mark)
. l:(
D°"'�\
,,---,,,
Figure I
---
(b) Sound waves can bend round a comer but light cannot (2marks) Chemical
solution .. -;;�----;,,..:.-
Metal pipe
In a factory, an engineer uses a device to monitor the thickness of the wall of a metal pipe used for conveying chemical
solutions. The device consists of a transmitter and a receiver. During the test, the device is placed on the surl'ace of the pipe.
The transmitter emits an ultrasonic pulse of frequency 2 x 106 Hz. The pulse travels with a speed of 6 x 103 m s-1 inside the
wall. The pulse is reflected from the other surface of the wall and is recorded by the receiver (see Figure 1). The device is
connected to a CRO, which displays the transmitted and reflected pulses (see Figure 2).
6. < HKCE 2002 Paper I- 5 >
• P(Mary)
Fignnl
• Q (Susan)
Two identical loudspeakers S1 andSz are connected to a computer. The set-up generates a sound of frequency 200 Hz. Mary (a) Fmd the wavelength of the pulse inside the wall.
and Susan stand at positions P and Qin front of the loudspeakers, where PS1 = 6.10 m, PSi = 8.65 m and QS1 = QS2. The
speed of sound in air is 340 m s-l .
(a) Find the wavdength of the sound emitted by the loudspeakers. (2 marks)
(b) Which ofthetwopulses inFigure2 is the reflected pulse'? Explain your answer. (2nwks)
(b) (i) Find the path difference at P from S1 .and S2,. (1 mark)
(c) The engineer conducts the test every five weeks and measure the total time of travel of the pulse inside the wall The
(ii) Explain whether Mary will hear a loud or a soft sound. {2 marks) results are shown� the below table.
Time t/weeks 0 5 10 15 20 25
Total time oftravel/ 10 s -6

14.S 14.0 13.3 12.8 12.2 11.5
(c) The set-up now generates sound of frequencies 200 Hz and 400 Hz alternately. Susan then predicts that constructive Thickness of the wall d I mm
and destructive interference will occur alternately at Q. Explain whether Susan is correct or not. (2 marks)
(i) Show that the thickness of the wall at time t = 0 is 43.5 mm. (2marks)
WA6 :Sound
PC-WA6-Q /07 II DSE Physics - Section C : Question
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6 -QI 08
7. (c) ("u) Plot a graph of the thickness of the wall dagainsttime ton the graph below, with dranging from Oto 50 mm andt 8. < BKCE 2003 Paper I- 5 >
ranging from Oto 40 weeks. (5 marks)
A ToCRO
�
X
Microphone
B
The Figure above shows two loudspeakers P and Q emitting sound waves which are of the same frequency and in phase. As
a microphone is moved along the line AB, the amplitude of the trace displayed on the CRO is found to increase and decrease
alternately.
(a) Name the wave phenomenon observed.
(b) The amplitude of the trace reaches a maximum when the microphone is placed at a pointX, where PX= 1.74 m and
QX= 1.96 m. A student says that one possible wavelength of the sound waves is 0.44 m. Explain whether the student is
correct or not. (3 marks)
(iii) The pipe has to be replaced when the thickness of the wall drops to 30 mm. Using the graph in (c) (ll), estimate the
time at which the pipe has to be replaced. (2 marks) 9. < HKCE 2005 Paper 1- 6 >
You are provided with the apparatus shown in the Figure below.
signal generator
(d)
IB
$f' m------- two identical/�
..
Figure 3 's...._/ loudspeakers
Describe how you should use the apparatus to conduct an experiment to demonstrate the interference of sound waves. You
may use additional apparatus if necessary. (4 marks)
Figure 3 shows the CRO display of the test result on a certain day. The engineer points out that there maybe a small
crack in the wall of the pipe. Explain how the engineer arrives at such a conclusion. (2 marks)
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-Q/09
I
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-Q/10 II
10. < Ill{CE 2007 Paper I - 6 > 11. < HKCE 2007 Paper I -10 >
John wants to find out the time he takes to run 100 metres. A starter at the starting point uses a horn to emit a sound signal of
/loudspeaker
frequency 425 Hz to notify John to start running. A time keeper presses a stop watch to record the time when he hears the
sound signal as shown in the figw:e below. Given that the speed of sound in air is 340 m s·1• �
Y::= m1crophone
p
!OOm
signal generator Ar-------------------------CI
, xt B
•
+--- � John's starting position
,·(· Q
time keeper's position starter's position '-...,_ loudspeaker
In the above Figure, two identical loudspeakers P and Q are connected to a signal generator. Position A is the midpoint of
(a) Find the wavelength of the sound signal emitted by the horn. (2 marks) PQ. A microphone connected to a CRO is moved along BC to measure the loudness of the sound. The amplitude of the
CRO trace increases as the loudness of the sound detected increases. The Figure below shows the result
Amplitude ofthe
CROtrace
(b) (i) Find the time t taken by the sound signal to travel 100 metres. (1 mark)
o '---�---------'------�-+Position ofmicrophone
X y C
(a) (i) Explam why the loudness of the sound varies at different positions along BC.
(ii) As it takes time t for the sound signal to travel from the starter to the time keeper, David suggests the following
ways to reduce the time delay t:
1. using a horn emitting sound of higher frequency;
2. lowering a flag instead of using a hom to notify the time keeper. (n) State ONE reason why the amplitude of the CRO trace is NOT zero atpositionX (! nmk)
Explain whether each of the above suggestions will work (4marks)
(b) IfPY=5.10mandQY=5.78m,find
(i) the path difference at position Y from P and Q ; (1 mark)
(i.l.J the wavelength of the sotmd. (2 marks)

WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-Q /1 1 1 DSE Physics - Section C : Question
WA6: Sound
PC-WA6-Q/12 II
12. < HKCE 2009 Paper I - 11 > U. (c) Explain why ultrasound is not used to transmit signals from the satellite to the Tsunami W aming Centre. (1 mark)
A tsunami is a kind of large-scale water wave that is commonly generated by earthquakes. The Figure below shows a
simplified tsunami detection system. Sensor X on the sea:floor can detect earthquakes and tsunamis. When a tsunami is
detected, an ultrasound signal will be sent from Sensor Xto Device Yon the sea surface. Device Y will immediately transmit
a mi crowave signal to a satellite and the satellite will send the microwave signal to the Tsunami Waming Centre on land.
(d) After receiving the signal from the satellite, the Tsunami Waming Centre will send a warning signal to the alann stations
in neighbouring cities. John suggests using ultrasound to transmit the warning signal, while Peter suggests using radio
wave to transmit the warning signal. Explain which suggestion is more appropriate. (2 marks)
40000km
36000lan T""""'
Warning Centre
13. < HKCE 2010 Paper I� 6 >

The Figure below shows a metal string stretched over two wedges. Kathy plucks the string and a sound is heard.
,/70>---/--<V>?
stretched metal string
(a) Whatisultrasound? (1 mark)
(a) DescnOe how the sound is produced by the string. (3 marks)
(b) Given:
DistancefromtheSensorXtothe shore = 1 800km
Distance fromSensor Xto Device Y = 6 km
Distance from Device Y to the satellite = 36 000 km
Distance from the satellite to the Tsunami Warning Centre = 40 000km
(b) State one difference and one similarity in the nature of the wave on th e string and the sound wave prochiced. (2 marks)
Speed of ultrasound in water = 1500m s-1
Speed ofmicrowave = 3 x 103 ms· 1 Difference: ---------------------------------
Average speed of tsunami on the sea surface = 250 m s·1
Can the Tsunami Warning Centre receive the signal one hour before the arrival of tsunami to the shore ? Show your
calculations. (Assume that when a tsunami arrives at the water surface vertically above Sensor X, X sends a signal to
Device Y.) (3 marks)
Similarity :
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA6-Q/13 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA6-Q/14 I
14. < HKCE 2011 Paper IR 8 > 14. (d) Now loudspeaker K is disconnected and a microphone connected to a CRO is placed at Pas shown in Figure (d).
Two identical loudspeakers J and Kare connected in parallel to a signal generator as shown in Figure (a). They are emitting LouQSPeaker Jis emitting sound waves offrequency 850 Hz.
sound waves of frequency 850 Hz. Point Pis I m and 1.4 m away fromJandKrespectively.
Given: speed of Sound e 340 m s-1
·
mio,ophon\
J
Figare(a) Figiu-e (d) toCRO

sign,!
generator
generator
(a) Detemrine the wavelength of the sound pl"Oduced. (2 marks)

The waveform ofthe sound received by the microphone is displayed on the CRO as shown in Figure (e).
/I'\ / "\
I I \
(b) Determine the type of interference occurring at P. (3 marks)
\
Figui;-e(e)
(c) AnotherpointQ is 1.4m and 1 m awayfromJandKrespectively as shown in Figure (b). Mary walks along the straight
linePQ.
\
vI
\.
\
\. v
'
The settings of the CRO remain unchanged.
1.4m (i) If. the microphone is moved closer to loudspeaker J, descnOe the change of the waveform displayed on the CRO.
(Imm)
Fi gure (b)
signal rp
generator 1<------1-m
_____ ...:c,,._/ Q
(ii) Now the microphone is returned to P and the sound emitted by loudspeaker J is changed to 425 Hz, sketch the
Sketch a graph in Figure (c) to show the variation of the loudness of the sound that Mary bears between P and Q.
waveform displayed on the CRO in the Ftgure below. (1 mark)
{2 marks)
loudness
'' , ''
,, '' ,,
F igure(c) ,,
'' ''
'' '
_,
p Q
DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA6-Q 1151 DSE Physics - Section C : Question PC-WA6-Q/16
Part B : HKAL examination questions 16. < HKAL 2004 Paper I- 3 >
15. < BKAL 1984 Paper 11B - 3 >

In the figure below, a signal generator G is connected to two loudspeakers L1 and Li placed 3 m apart. The signal generator
ship� "'
X
gives out a frequency of 680 Hz to the two loudspeakers that give out the sound waves in phase. The speed of the sound
waves is 340 ms- 1•
A ship equipped with a sonar system is used to detect objects in the sea. Ultrasound offrequency 25 kHz are sent towards the·
seabed. The ultrasound, which then propagate at an angle of 50° to the sea surface, are reflected from a submarine back to
the ship after0.15 s. (Given: speed of sound in air= 340 m s- 1; speed of sound in sea water = 1500 m s- 1)
y (a) Find the wavelength of the ultrasound in sea water. (2 marks)
(a) A microphone is used to detect the sound intensity given out by the two loudspeakers.
(i) Descn'be the variation in the signal detected by the microphone when it moves along the line AB, which is the
perpendicular bisector ofL1 Li. (1 mark)
(b) Calculate the vertical distance of the submarine beneath the sea surface.
(c) Some of the ultrasound reflected by the submarine propagate along the dotted line and emerge into the air at X
(ii) Descnbe the variation in the signal detected by the microphone when it moves slowly along line XY, which is Calculate the angle ofrefraction in air. (3 marks)
parallel to Li Lz.. {l mark)
(b) Point Zin the above figure represents a point at which a nrin:imum intensity sound is heard. When the loudspeaker Li. is
disconnected, explain the change of the intensity of the sound heard atZ. (2 marks)
(d) Is it possible for the ultrasound, at certain angles of incidence, to undergo total internal reflection when it travels from
sea water to the air? Explain. (2 marks)
(e) Explain why radar using microwaves are not suitable for detecting objects in sea water. (1 mark)
Part C : HKDSE examination questions 18. <.HKDSE Sample Paper m - 6 >
17. <HKDSESamplePaperIB-10>. C
/loudspeaker
�
y� microphone
Ar------------------ _______xidB
,\ p
ship
•"';""' ,
:x signal generator
'"' ,,,Q
'--._ loudspeaker
submarine'#
The above Figure shows two identical loudspeakers P and Q connected to a signal generator. Position A is the mid-point of
PQ, A microphone connected to a CRO is moved along BC. The amplitude of the CRO trace increases as the loudness of
the sound detected increases. The Flglll'e below shows how the amplitude of the CRO trace varies with the.position of the
The figure above shows a ship equipped with sonar. The sonar emits ultrason ic waves of frequency 25 kHz into the sea. The
microphone.
waves propagate at an angle of50 ° to the surface of the sea and are reflected from a submarine back to the ship after 0.15 s.
Given: speed of sound in air= 340 ms·1 Amplitude of the
CROtrace
speed of sound in sea water= 1500 m s·1
(a) Calculate the vertical distance of the submarine beneath the sea surface. (2marks)
o '----'----------''-------�-+ Position of microphone

B X Y C
(a) (i) Explain why the loudness of the sound varies along BC. Cl""'"")
(b) Some of the reflected w aves propagate along the dotted line and emerge into the air at X Calculate the angle of
refraction in air. (2 marks)
(ri) State ONE reason why the amplitude of the CRO trace is NOT zero atpositionX. (I mark)
(c) Is it possible for ultrasonic waves, at certain angles of incidence, to undergo total internal reflection when they go from
sea water to the air ? Explain. {2 marks)
(b) IfPY= 5.10 m and QY= 5.78 m, find the wavelength of the solllld. (2marks)
19. < HKDSE 2020 Paper !B-6>
The set-up in Figure 6.1 is to f'md the speed of sound in air. Two identical microphones A and B are
connected to a timer and placed on a bench top as shown. The timer can be triggered to 'start' and 'stop'
timing using the respective microphones to feed signals to the START and STOP tenninals of the timer.
(a) Ycu are given a hammer and a metal plate ( c:ii, ). Use •x• _to indicate a suitable location on
Figure 6.1 where the hammer should hit the plate so as to generate a sharp loud sound to be received by
the microphones in this experiment. State an additional piece of appararus needed and the measurements
to be made in this experiment. (3 marks)
(b) The separation between A and B is set at 0.280 m. The experiment is repeated to obtain a few readings of
the timer as follows:
801 µs, g38 µs, 539 ftS, 821 µs

(i} Find the speed.of sound in air. Show how you would treat the data obtained in the calculation.
(ii) Suggest one adjustment to the experimental setting so as to obtain a more accurate result.
(3 marks)
HKBAA's Marking Scheme is prepared for the markets' :reference. It shcnud not be regarded as a set of model answer.;.
Students and teachers who are not involved in the marlcing process are advised to interpret the MarJcing Scheme 'With care. 2. (b) (iv) False
The path difference along XY is always equal to zero.
Question Solution
The interference is always constructive along.XY. [2]
1. (a) (i) Period T = 0.1 x 5 [!J
= 0.5 ms [!J
l _ = 2000 Hz 3. (a) Note Z
Frequen cy : f = ..!.. = __ [!J
T 0.Sxl0-3
(b) All of the notes X, Y and Zhave the same pitch since they all have the same :frequency. [2]
(ii) Within the audible range [!J However, noteXbas the greatest loudness since noteXhas the greatest amplitude [IJ
and note Z has the smallest loudness since note Z has the smallest amplitude. [IJ
(b) (i) Constructive interference at C [!J
Destructive interference at B [!J
(n) QB-PB= ½A [2J 4. (a) (i) Place the cork in the ripple tank. [IJ
The cork moves up and down. [!]
(iii) I\. = 2 X (3.12-3.04) = 0.16m [!]
(ri) Place the candle which has been lighted up in front of the loudspeaker.
' � JS [!]
The flame moves forward and backwartl. (OR The flame moves to and fro.)
[!]
[!]
= 2000 x 0.16 = 320 m s-1 [!J
(iv) larger [!]

< Correct shape > [!J
(,) Period unchanged [!] < Wavelength remains unchanged> [!J
Amplitude increases [!]
The phenomenon is diffraction. [lJ

2. (a) Period = 4 x 0.1 = 0.4 ms [!]
(ri) (1) © Increase the depth of the water in the ripple tank. [!J
Frequency = __ l_ = 2500 Hz [2]
0.4xl0-3 @ Decrease the frequenc y of the vibrator. [!J
Wavelength A = 2'.. = � = 0.13 m [2] (2)

f 2500
< Correct shape > [!]
(b) (i) Pathdifference = 231-2.05 = 026m = 2/\. [2] < Diffraction is larger than (b) (i) > [!]
:. Constructive interference [!]
(ii) Pitch remains unchanged [!]
(c) The smaller speaker cone is more suitable for emitting high-frequency sotmds. [IJ
Loudness increases [!] Since the wavelength of high-frequency sounds is shorter, diffraction is less. [lJ
(iii) AnyTWO of the following: Thus a smaller cone is used to increase its degree of diffraction. [!]
[2]
* Noisefromsurrounding (OR backgroundnoise)
* Reflection of the loudspeaker's sound at the walls

5. (a) The speed oflight in air is much higher than that ofsound. [!]
* The intensities of the sound fromP and Q reaching the microphone may not be equal
* The microphone has finite size
(b) The 'Wavelength oflight is much smaller than that of sound.
Thus the degree of diffraction of light is much smaller.
[!]
[lJ
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA6-QS /03 DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA6-QS/04
6. (a) V = j7,. [1] 7. (c) (ii) <Twoaxeslabelled> [1]

(340) = (200) /1. :; A = 1.7 m [1] < Range of scale correct > [1]
(b) (i) Path difference atP = 8.65 - 6.10 = 2.55 m < Points correctly plotted> [2]
[1]
< Straight line drawn> [1]
(Ii) Path difference atP = 2-55 A = 1.5 i,, [1]
1.7 (iii) From the graph, ddrops to 30 mmatt = 37.5 weeks [1]
Destructive interference occurs; so Mazy will hear a soft sound. [1] Tlllle at which the pipe has to be replaced = 37.5 weeks [1]
(c) Susan is incorrect. The path difference at Qfrom St and S2 is zero, [1] (d) Between the transmitted pulse and the pulse reflected from the wall,
constrnctive intetference will always occur at Q. [1] there is another pulse of smaller amplitude [1]
which should be reflected from the crack. [1]
7. (a) By V -f).
(6 X 103) = (2 X 106):11, [1]
8. (a) interlerence [1]
A=3x 10-3 m [1]
(b) Xis the reflected pulse

(b) Path difference atX"" 1.96-1.74
[1]
0.22m [1]
since the amplitude of the reflected pulse should be smaller. [1]
If the wavelength is 0.44 m, then the path difference is ½ A. [1]
d = � = (6xl0 )·(14.Sxl0 )
3 ...-;
(c) (i) [1] and thus the amplitude atX should be minimum but not maximum, so the student is not correcL [1]
2 2
= 0.0435 m = 43.5 mm [1]

9. Connect the two loudspeakers to the signal generator. [1]
(ii)
Time . t I weeks 0 5 10 15 20 25
Adjust the frequency of the signal generator to give a sound note that can be heard. [1]
Total time oftravel/ 10 -6 s 145 14.0 13.3 12.8

Wallcing in front of the two loudspeakers, [1]
12.2 11.S
Thickness ofthe wall d I mm 43.5 42.0 38.4 alternate loud and soft sound can be heard. [1]
39.9 36.6 34.S
<OR>
dlmm
Connect the two loudspeakers to the signal generator. [1]
Adjust the frequency of the signal generator to give a suitable sound note. [1]
Connect a microphone to a CRO and move the microphone in front of the two loudspeakers, [1]
alternate maxima and minima can be observed on the CRO. [1]
IO. (a) v = fil [1]

(340) • (425)/4
A= 0.8m [1]
I (b) (i) t=:!_= IOO =0.294s

V 340
[1]
(ii) 1. It does not work [1]

since the speed of sound is not affected by the frequency. [1]
!/weeks 2. ltworks [1]

since the speed of light is very high, time delay becomes negligi.ble. [1]
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA6-QS/0S DSE Pbysics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA6-QS/06
11. (a) (i) Along BC, inteiference occurs. [1] 14. (b) PathdifferenceatP "'- l.4 - 1.0 [1]
Constructive interference gives loud sound and destructive interference gives soft sound. [1] = 0.4m
= I?. [1]
(ii) Any ONE of thefollowing: [1]
* There is background noise.
Hence, constructive interference occurs atP. [1]
* Sound is reflected by the surrounding walls.

(,)
* P and Q do not have the same amplitude. <maximum atP and Q > [1]
* The microphone is not a point receiver. < all correct> [1]
(b) (i) Path difference = S,78-5.10 = 0.68m [1]
(ii) 6.=0.68=2A. [1]

A=0.34m [1]
p Q
12. (•) Ultrasound is sound wave of frequency higher than 20 000 Hz. [1] (d) (i) The amplitude of the waveform will increase. [1]
1 1 3
(b) Time for tsunami to reach the shore = SOO x 0 = 7200 s [1]
"'
25 0
' FA 11'\
3
Timerequiredfor tbetravelofthesig nals = 6000 + 76000 x a10 = 4.25 s [1 ] \ I \
1500 3 X lQ
Timeleftforannotmcingwamingsignal = 1200-425 = 7195.75s > lh
The system can meet the requirement.
[1]
\ ) '\
'/
\ 1/2,
(,) Ultrasound cannot travel in outer space. [1]
< same amplitude but with double period > [1]
( d) The speed of radio wave is higher. [1]
Therefore, Peter's suggestion ismore appropriate. [1]
15. (a) (i) Sound of.maximum intensity is heard, and the intensity decreases along AB. [!]
13. (,) When the string vt'brates up and down, [1] (ii) Alternative maximum and minimum intensity is detected alongXY [1]
the air nearby will be forced to move [1]
(b) There is a minimum intensity sound at Zbecause destructive interference occurs there
and the sowd wave travels outwards. [1] and the two waves an:iving at Z exactly cancel. [1]
(b) Difference: (any ONE) [1]
* Wave on the string is transverse but sound wave is longitudinal.
When L,, is disconnected, no such cancellation occurs, as only one wave arrives.
Thus the intensity increases. [1]
* Wave on the string is stationary but sound wave is travelling.
Similarity: (any ONE) [1]
* Both waves are mechanical waves. 16. {a) By v = fl\,
* Both waves need materialmedium for propagation. (15 00) = (25 X 10 3) A, [ 1]
A= 0.06m [1]
14. (,) V = f}. [1] (b) Distance between the ship and the submarine = ½ x (1500) x (0.15) = 1125. m [1]
(340) = (850) ?.
Vertical distance = ll25 x sin S0 Q = 862m [1]
it=0,4m [1]
DSE Physics - Section C : Question Solution PC-WA6-QS/07 Hong Kong Diploma of Secondary Education Examination
WA6: Sound Physics - Compulsory part ( ,t.-1fi!>1r)
Section A- Heat and Gases (#.:fi. lift.,Jlt)
16. (c) Theangle ofincidenceatX= 50° 1. Temperature, Heat and Internal energy ( ;:;_&_ , #.'f� f'.J /is)
[!] 2. Transfer Processes (#.-M- *.iiHl)
smso· 1soo 3. ChangeofState(>IH!�i!t.!,V
sinr =340 [!] 4. General Gas Law (-t.i&ft.:tt!t#)
r = 10° 5. K.ineticTheory (:Sr-I-.l.t1h'tt)
[!] Section B - Force and Motion (ir:fa .l:$.1%)
(d) No, the ultrasound refracts towards thenormal 1. Position and Movement ( 1:!r.ll'f"*$'J)
[!] 2. Newton's Laws (4tll!t#)
since ultrasound travels faster in water than in air. 3. Moment ofForce (h#E.)
[!]
4. Work,EnergyandPower(f'Ph, �6:i:f";:/Jlf,.)
(e) Microwaves would be absor bed by water effectively. S. Momentom(ilJ:U
[!] 6. Projectile Motion (4:{Hlt�fh)
7. Circular Motion( ml Jiil .l.ttl!)
8. Gravitation ( iJ I h )
17. (a) Verticaldistance = ½x(IS00)x(0.15)xsin50° SectionC-WaveMotion (�"Si&)
[!] 1. WavePropagation (ilt��ft.il!)
= 86.2m 2. Wave Phenomena (ilti,)JJl.�)
[!] 3. Reflection and Refraction of Light (Jc.� &.¼t .&.;/JrM)
(b)
smso0 1soo 4. Lenses (lU/1:)
[!] 5. Wave Nature ofLight Cic.�it.iri�!i.)
sinr =340
6. Sound< *V)
:. r= 10° Section D - Electricity and Magnetism ( (!;:fa�)
[!]
L Electrostatics('A?-11!:$)
-
(c) No, ultrasonic waves trave l faster in sea water than in,,;,,.
ITT 2. Electric Circu its ( 1!t�)
so theyare refracted towards the normal and no total internal reflection is possible when they 3. Domestic Electricity (�,%Ill 111:)
go from water to air. [lJ 4. MagneticFi eld(lit*)
5. Electromagnetic Induction ( 'tlit:€14)
6. Alternating Current uum. 'll!:)
18. (a) (i) Along BC, interferenceoccurs. Section E- Radioactivity and Nuclear Energy (1.t.Ml.t�:fa:it:�5)
[!] 1. Radiation and Radioactivity ( .ti M:f"lltM :IJL t,.)
Constructive interference gives loud sound and destructive interfer ence gives soft sound. 2. Atomic Model (,B;Ht�:l'!)
[!] 3. Nuclear·Energy(#.lis)
("ti) AnyONEofthefollowing:
* There is background noise.
[I] Physics -Elective part (�1+��£'")
* Sound is reflected bythe surrounding walls.

*
Elective 1 - Astronomy and Space Science ( � :X:.� :fa!l/i:.k,f-4 :!}!: )
* P and Q do not have the same amplitude.

I. The universe seen in differentscales (-'i- JS] :1: M.ffli&. "f � 'ilr,lr; !t)
2. Astronomy through history( � J{ l:j!, 11\l.fi-A .t.)
* The _microphone is not a point receiver. 3. Orbital motions under gravity ( :!Ct h ""Fl!\l.fiMi!:il£i;)
4. Stars and the universe(·&&'f� *'iii)
(b) Path difference = 2 /I. Elective 2 -Atomic World (ffi. 7"-tlt.W.-)
l. Rutherford's atomic model (li:Ji�Ri.-'f-�1'!)
:. 5.78-5.10 = H, 2. Photoelectric effect (Jo 'il!:i!tt:.J!)
[!]
:. A.= 0.34m 3. Bohr's atomicmodelofbydrogen (l&.i {I:! fl.J!i.-1-«�)
[!] 4. Particles or waves (�+:iti.t)
5. Pr obingin&nano scale(,ll-t1f..tR$1!-.W.)
Elective 3-Energy and Use ofEnergy (�5i::fc'116.i&i.atr�m)
1. Electricity at home{�,%- J!l 11:)
2. Energy efficiency in building {,t�{l:l�ti!!i-i!li:.fll:)
3. Energy efficiency in transportation (;f.�°l�!i6llf.!4.$)
4. Non�renewableenergysources(;f:7f-Pi-.i.li'6i!f.)
5. Renewable energy sources {,f -Pi-i.1t�.)
Elective 4 -Medical Physics ( Ji $-Jfh Jlf.$-)
1. Makingsenseoftheeye(Dll�l!.'I.'&)
2. Making sense of the ear ( .lf-{I:! l!,'I. 1')
· 3. Med ical imaging using non-ionizing radiation ( �� 11!: iMr.-iiM -1-�itft. ,1¥:)
4. Medical imagingusi.ng iomzing:radiati.on { 'lf!lllPi:�M-1-4':!H#.4':)

Phy 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Phy 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AL CE DSE.

-----3>- Direction ofwave

2. <HKCE 1987Paper 11-11 > �

t = 0.000 s 5. < HK.CE 1991 Paper ll- 21 >

7. <BKCE1993Paperll-22> 10. < HKCE 1999 Paper II- 20 >

12- < HKCE 2{100 Paper II - 24 >

�::':',j�=k,. ,�= ==��- ===== __,,,:;:�,==-- ===== --========:=,=,

Direction of Which cork has the motion represented by the graph?

15. <HKCE 2003 Paper Il- 2S >

19. < HKCE 2005 Paper Il- 35 >

24. < HKCE 2010 Paper II-34 >

22. <HKCE2008Paperll-37> ---�------,quili'briumposition

a h ,d, f g h 25. < HKCE 2010 Paper IT� 35 >

27. <HKCE2011Paperll-35> 30. < HKAL 1993 Paper I-24 >

o o.,vo., op '0; /JL0J\_ •

Figure (a) Figure(b)

direction of propagation ofwave

33. <BKAL 1998 Paper llA-13 >

Displacement of air particles

< HKDSE 2015 Paper IA - 12 >

46. <BKOSE2017 Paper IA- 14>

Figure(b) , , '-\- time= 1 s

Which of the following statements MUST BE correct?

50. <HKDSE 2020 Paper IA-12>

M.C. Answers T= ..!._ =_!_=0 .2s

3. C 13. B 23. C 33. A 43. A 5. C

C 15. A 25. A 35. A 45. B ✓ (2) Pis in ma:timuJl1 displacement ⇒ PR = amplitude

7. D 17. C 27. B 37. B 47. C

C 19. B 29. C 39. A 49, D

C 20, B 30. B 40 . B 50. C

�--, ½7\:: From figure (a), A"" x.

Frequency: f = ..!. = _l_ = 2.5 Hz

13. B By v = f/2 :. v = (2) (100) = 200ms-1

Time taken should be found by t = d Iv.

_'w ____ �---

Tak e the rightward direction as(+) :

direction oftravel 31. A

For a particle to be momentarily at rest, it must be at the extreme point, T=2xI0-3s

l ftmost position and must be momentarily at rest at !1.

As the wave travels 2 cm, i.e. ½ /1. in 0.05 s which is ½ T,

Period T = 0.05 s x 8 = 0.40 s

Frequency : f = l = _l_ = 2.5 Hz

(3) C and D both move downward.

.-. Amplitude = 6 c m 47. C

✓ (!) At t = 2 s, P is at the position of trough, thus it must be moinentarily at rest

(2 ) Particles Q and S should move in the same direction.

(3) Particle R is not momentarily at rest, but mo ving downwards.

✓ (!) fff= lOHz,then T= I.=..!__= 0.1s. Afteratirneof0.05s: t = �T= fT,

(2) Iff= 20Hz,then T= _!_= 2.. = 0.05s. Afteratimeof0.05s: t =IT,

(3) If f= 40Hz, then T= _!_ = 2.. = 0.025s. Afteratimeof0.05 s: t = 2 T,

(i) the amplitude ofthe wave, D

(u) the wavelength.

(iv) the frequency.

(i) moving upwards,

(il) moving downwards,

(iii) momentarily at rest?

(d) Find the wavelength of the wave. (1 DWk)

_, (e) Describe the motions ofparticlesP and Q at a quarter of a period later.

(ii) 'A.= 8cm [l] (ii)

(iii) T=4s [l]

(iv) f = 025 Hz [l]

(b) (i) R,S [2]

(u) P,T [2]